Home

PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual

1. SBA3 NIC 020000 Of Of 25 0 Connection GSPBHO GbEBA oK intel mock Goon Gih Fii Port fozooo0 ov s av0 GSPB O GbE S oK NemarkGornazasa 847 020000 0 5 01 SPEAKER InteKR 2576 Gigabit Dual Port ADi QSPBRO GbEHG OK Peinar Ot wractan 0 020000 Of 6 Of ai TnteKR 82576 Gigabit Dual Pert 5 P GSPBAO GbEHT OK Netuork Gonia 020000 Of Bf 0 1 F LSI Adapter SAS 3000 series 4 of SPBHO SAS J GSPBHO SAS H oK port with 100E StorPort 010000 of 7 Of 0 BU LSI Adapter SAS 3000 series 8 3 SASL 1 Controler oK port with 1068E StorPort 010000 o 8 0 0 OK InteKR PRO 1000 PT Dual Port 090000 Of 14 Of 0 Server Adapter 3 oK InteKR PRO 1000 PT Dual Port 020000 0 14 07 1 Server Adapter 2 TnteKR PRO 1000 PT Dual Port 020000 013 070 PT Dual Port of 15 0 1 FIGURE 7 22 PCI Devices window 206 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows Some multifunction cards differ only in the part after FUNC in the Unit name Also some differ only in the Func number at Seg Bus Dev Func Perform the following steps 2 to 9 for each of these multifunction cards 2 Select the Unit name of the NIC to be replaced to open the Ethernet Controller window Record the IP Address and IP Subnet Mask values under IP v4 Interfaces in order to search for the device to be replaced or set these values again after replacement gt Partition gt Part
2. In the following table TABLE 3 15 Partition status transitions 1 to 4 indicate the status transitions of each partition 82 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal TABLE 3 15 Partition status transitions Status transition in chronological order left to right Partition Partition P In operation Faulty Reset SB switching Power on gt In operation If Partition P Partition Q and Partition R are all operating the partition status is as indicated in 1 in the table The following explains what happens if SB 0 becomes faulty later is disconnected and is switched to SB 2 which is set as a Reserved SB TABLE 3 16 Explanation of partition status transitions Description numbers correspond to status transitions 1 Partition P Partition Q and Partition R are operating SB 0 in Partition P becomes faulty SB O in Partition P is disconnected and stopped Then the power to Partition R is turned off Later SB 2 is removed from the Partition R configuration and the specification of Partition Q as a Reserved SB is canceled After being removed from the Partition Q configuration SB 2 is incorporated as the SB of Partition P The power to Partition P is automatically turned on and the partition begins operation In status transitions 1 to 4 SB 2 is incorporated into Partition P in place of faulty SB
3. 2 If not installed incorporate the PCI Hot Plug driver module into the system by executing the modprobe command sbin modprobe pciehp Executing the modprobe command automatically incorporates all relevant modules into the kernel Confirming the slot number of a PCI slot When removing a PCI card you need to manipulate the power supply to the appropriate slot through the operating system First use the following procedure to obtain the BUS number and slot number from the physical location of the PCI slot for the card It will be used to manipulate the power supply 1 Identify the mounting location of the PCI card to be removed See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to check the mounting location board and slot of the PCI card to be removed 2 Obtain the slot number of the mounting location 133 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Check the table in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers and obtain the slot number that is unique in the cabinet and assigned to the confirmed mounting location This slot number is identification information for operating the slot of the PCI card to be removed Checking the power status of a PCI slot Using the PCI slot number confirmed in Confirming the slot number of a PCI slot confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a dir
4. displayed DeviceName Emulex LightPulse LPel250 F8 PCI Slot Team Team 0 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Team Team 0 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed 2 From the Device Manager select the interface to be deleted and click Properties 187 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows sal Device Manager Jo File Action View Help CEE ml s Gis E a w508x86 m Computer Eg Disk drives Ry Display adapters fq Emulex PLUS J Human Interface Devices H Keyboards z A Mice and other pointing devices E Monitors Ea Network adapters ts Intel R 82567LF 2 Gigabit Network Connection Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 10 C Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 11 Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 12 Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 9 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 4 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 9 TEAM Team 0 MME TEAM Team 0 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter sip a TEAM Team 0 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server aq Update Driver Software gt Other devices Disable J Processors Uninstall H Storage controllers ail System devices Scan for hardware ch
5. IOB 1 PCIC 4 FUNC 0 Emulex LightPu iPe1250 F8 PCI S Storport Miniport Driver IOB 1 PCIC 6 FUNC 0 Emul sightPul iPe1250 F8 PCI S Storport Miniport Driver CNS The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed 7 Start ETERNUS Multipath Manager and place all the replaced devices online Confirm that the devices are normally incorporated with the multipath driver 198 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows ETERNUS Multipath Manager ioj x File Tools Help Fault list 0 Status Machine name Unit name WS08x86 3rd Path H E E3000 E340811A 230004 LUNO Disk1 Offline Active SCSPort2 BusO TargetIp 34 LUN1 Disk2 Offline Active SCSPort3 BusO Targetl 35 LUN2 Disk3 Offline Active Auto Path Recovery ON Auto Path Check ON FIGURE 7 13 ETERNUS Multipath Manager 4 2 FC card addition procedure Referring to 7 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Cards add an FC card 199 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows 7 5 Hot Replacement Procedure for iSCSI The prerequisites for iSCSI NIC hot replacement are as follows The target system runs Windows Server 2008 or later The maintenance person has the Administrator privileges required for operations The ETERNUS multipath driver
6. You can edit the user name password permission and status Enable Disable in the Edit User window To deny access to a user set No Access for permission or Disable for Status Access Control Access control settings for network protocols Add Filter Edit Filter Adds edits or deletes a filter Remove Filter button Edit Filter window Protocol Select the target protocol HTTP HTTPS telnet SSH SNMP Access Control Select Enable or Disable Disable Denies access by any IP address Enable Permits access by only the specified IP addresses IP Address Subnet Mask You can specify this item only if the Access Control setting is Enable The filtering permits access by only the IP addresses specified here Alarm E Mail Settings for e mail notification of an event Alarm E Mail Used to select whether to send e mail for the occurrence of an event Enable Disable Filter button Used to edit Alarm E mail transmission filter settings The occurrence of any event specified in the filter settings is reported by e mail The default for target events is all events Severity Target severity Error Warning Info Partition Target partition Unit Target unit 13 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation oo Source Target source CPU DIMM Chipset V oltage Temperature Other Video redirection remote stora
7. The card has removed Please replace the card and input y key y Adding the card The card has added When Please replace the card appears replace the NIC and insert the cable After replacing the NIC press the y key 4 Start the command prompt Display a list of hot replacement enable PCI cards by using the fjpciswap command Confirm that the added card is correctly displayed C gt fjpciswap 1 Replaceable PCI cards are displayed UnitName Func DeviceName 1 PCIC FUNC Intel R PRO 1000 PT l Port Server FUNC Intel R PRO 1000 P17 L Port Server 5 As shown in FIGURE 7 8 Device Manager window right click the target device on Device Manager and select Enable if it is available in the displayed menu If Disable is displayed skip this step Note For up to 30 minutes after the target device is enabled the MAC Address item in the Ethernet Controller window of the Web UI of PSA displays a hyphen 193 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows a vice Manager _ of x File Action View Help C FIOIN Sei EN WSO08X86 Computer Disk drives B Display adapters q Emulex PLUS oe Human Interface Devices Keyboards ic A Mice and other pointing devices amp Monitors El Network adapters Intel R 82567LF 2 Gigab
8. i ETERNUS Multipath Manager oj x File Tools Help Fault list 0 Status Machine name S 10G 1st Path 2nd Path 3rd Path E2000 E205L4C 0014B6 LUNO Disk1 Offline Active Port2 BusO TargzetID 0 CAD 01 SCSPort 2 BusO TargetD 1 CAD 02 Online FIGURE 7 34 ETERNUS Multipath Manager 216 C122 E108 10EN CHAPTER 8 Backup and Restore This chapter describes the backup and restore operations required for restoring server data 8 1 Backing Up and Restoring Configuration Information 218 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 8 Backup and Restore 8 1 Backing Up and Restoring Configuration Information The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series has partitioning functions These functions provide the user with partitions acting as independent servers The user must configure the UEFI Unified Extensible Firmware Interface for each partition The user can make these settings with operations on the MMB The MMB has BIOS configuration information for each partition It also has backup and restore functions for the configuration information on the MMB Notes Configuration information on the server must be backed up ahead of time The backup enables restoration of the original information if the system becomes damaged or an operational error erases data on the server Be sure to periodically back up server configuration information in case of such events The PRIMEQUEST 1
9. mv etc modprobe conf bak etc modprobe conf Restoring etc sysconfig hwconf To restore the etc sysconfig hwconf file perform the following operations In the current etc sysconfig hwconf file confirm the information area equivalent to the SLAVE interface of the bonding configuration The etc sysconfig hwconf file is described in the information entry format delimited by a hyphen as follows class NETWORK bus PCI detached 0 device ethX Interface nam network hwaddr 00 00 00 11 11 11 Varies depending on NIC pcidev peiin Confirm that the device line has the entry of the SLAVE interface name of the bonding configuration Restore the entries of all the SLAVE interfaces other than the hot replaced SLAVE interface from the saved etc sysconfig hwconf bak The kudzu command executed in step 11 may rewrite the entries corresponding to the SLAVE interfaces of the bonding configuration in etc sysconfig hwconf i e an invalid value may be set in the MAC address This symptom may occur if a bonding device is installed in the system irrespective of whether the interface to be replaced is an interface under bonding The SLAVE interfaces that can be rewritten are interfaces other than the hot replaced interface Edit and restore the entries of the etc sysconfig hwconf files of SLAVE interfaces other than the hot replaced interface based on the same entries of the saved etc sysconfig hwconf bak
10. 0 312 Physical mounting locations in the PRIMEQUEST 1800F2 1800P sciescsseticiieccntiacimnimenanines a12 Physical Mounting Locations of Components 312 Port NU DELS icies ineine pires snieni 313 Power Control window eceeeceeeeees 228 229 23 Power Failure and Power Recovery seesecererereee 237 Powering On Off the Whole System 224 Powering On and Off Partitions 229 Power LED Alarm LED and Location LED 329 Power off methods and Units eect eeeeeeeeeeeees 226 Power On Off csicsa irei oxide cir asessorin i e alts 233 Power on off permissions 227 Power on method and unit eee eeeeeeeeeneeeeees 223 Power recovery POliCy cece eeececesceseeeeeeeeeeseeereeseeneees 25 Power status and IO_PSU LED display 330 Power status and PSU LED display eee 329 381 Preparation for Systemwalker Centric Manager Linkage 362 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Cabinets Link 323 Production LAN vies cccccsesceecasciscecgsdascasevctecessectavtersccecbonece 17 Properties WiNdOW cceescceeeeceseeceeeeeceaeeeeeeeesnaeeeees 209 PSA CLI eneee e EE S TR 247 PSA Web Ul soeeeeeeeeeseeeseessesseessrerreseeessereeessssessssreee 246 PSU LED oeni aE ai 329 R Rack MOuUntunes css scssccsesesscipsosssbianbeidessuedepssbabsapessdoavens 349 Relationship between DIMM size and mutual operability Within a Cabinet cee ceeeceeseeceseececeesteecseeee
11. 9 2 Powering On and Off Partitions This section describes the types of and methods for powering on and off partitions and how to check the partition power status 9 2 1 Powering on a partition The three partition power on methods are as follows 1 Partition power on through MMB Web UI or MMB CLI operations You can power on a partition by operating the MMB Web UI or MMB CLI In this method you can specify power on of all partitions or power on in units of partitions 2 Scheduled operations automatic operations according to set schedules You can power on partitions by a scheduled operation automatic operation function Registering the power on time in advance by using the scheduled operation function enables automatic power on in units of partitions 3 Wake On LAN WOL You can power on a partition with WOL In this method power on with WOL you can specify power on of each relevant partition containing the GSPB Notes After AC power off device stop the WOL configuration returns to the initial status Here to restore the WOL configuration start the OS Make the setting for enabling disabling WOL from the operating system To enable WOL in Windows you need to make the following setting for all device manager ports Click Device Manager Network adapters INTEL R 82576Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection Properties Power Management and then check the Wake On Magic Packet from power off state
12. For details on the network configuration see 1 1 External Network Configuration 10 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation The following lists the settings for the management LAN configuration Only a user with Administrator privileges can make management LAN related settings For details on the setting window see Chapter 1 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference c122 E110EN TABLE 1 5 Parts of the management LAN configuration Network Interface IP address and other settings for MMB access Virtual IP Address Virtual IP address In a dual MMB configuration the IP address is inherited during MMB switching Host Name IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address MMB 0 MMB 1 IP Address Physical IP address of MMB 0 MMB 1 You set this IP address for MMB 0 MMB 1 mounted in the system Enable Disable setting Interface Name IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address DNS optional Option It specifies the IP address of the DNS server used The default is Disable Enable Disable setting IP Address DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 DNS Server 3 Management LAN Specifies duplication of the management LAN ports The default is Disable Only the ports on the 0 side are enabled Enable Disable setting Maintenance IP Address Specifies the REMCS CE port The default is Disable Enable Disable setting IP Address Subnet
13. To turn off the Fault LED with the disk management command perform the following operations 1 Display the status by executing the disk management command and confirm the location with the Fault LED that is on opt FISVpsa bin diskctrl 1 ioc0 0 dev sda Faul 1 dev sdb Faul 2 none Faul 3 dev sdd Faul From the above example you can confirm that the Fault LED of slot 2 of iocO is on so sdc was used in that slot 2 Turn off the Fault LED by executing the following disk management command opt FISVpsa bin diskctrl o ioc0 2 The Fault LED goes out Display the status by executing the disk management command You can confirm that none is displayed as the device name of slot 2 of iocO and the slot is empty opt FISVpsa bin diskctrl 1 ioco 0 dev sda Fault LED Off 1 dev sdb Fault LED Off 2 none 3 dev sdd Faul ED Off 5 Execute the following PSA command You are performing hot maintenance of the hard disk with PRIMECLUSTER GDS in Red Hat opt FJSVpsa sh force_search sh a 4 2 3 Replacement procedure for hard disk failures not causing non responsiveness If a hard disk fails or is predicted to fail by S M A R T proactive detection replace the hard disk by using the following procedure 90 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks 1 To replace a hard disk containing
14. dev sdb Faul ED Off mount Fau AD On dev sdd Faul ED Off 3 To replace a hard disk containing a partition specified as a raw or swap device take action as follows If the hard disk contains a raw device If the hard disk to be replaced contains a partition operating as a raw device terminate all the applications that may access this partition as the raw device Then replace the hard disk If the hard disk contains a swap device The target hard disk contains a partition specified as a swap device Stop the system Then replace the hard disk 4 Take action as follows The action depends on whether the target hard disk has the Mirror configuration in PRIMECLUSTER GDS In the Mirror configuration in PRIMECLUSTER GDS From PRIMECLUSTER GDS select the disk to be removed and remove it For details on the removal procedure see the PRIMECLUSTER GDS manual Not in the Mirror configuration in PRIMECLUSTER GDS Unmount all the disk partitions mounted on the disk to be replaced umount dev sdcl umount dev sdc2 Remarks You need not unmount any partition operating as a raw or swap device 93 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks 5 Use the disk management command to stop the disk rotation Stop the disk rotation by specifying the slot confirmed in step 3 opt FJSVpsa bin diskctrl e ioc0 2 6 Replace the hard disk at t
15. snmp UDP Changeable Not used Notused 161 snmp trap Changeable UDP 162 RMCP UDP snmp UDP Not used Not used Not used Used 161 snmp trap 309 C122 E108 10EN il N WwW PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Component Communica Component USER CE REMCS Partition Protocol Port A tion B port port port LAN port Port No No direction SERVERVIE Duplex W RM TCP UDP 3172 SMTP SMTP TCP Duplex Not used Not used Not used Used Server UDP 25 PostgreSQL PostgreSQL Duplex DB Not used Not used Not used Used TCP UDP 9212 MS SQL S TCP UDP MS SQL 1433 Duplex Not used Not used Not used Used DB MS SQL M TCP UDP 1434 snmp UDP Duplex SVOM Not used Not used Not used Used 161 SVagent SERVERVIE Duplex SVOM Not used Not used Not used Used W RM TCP UDP 3172 RMCP UDP Duplex MMB Not used Not used Not used Used 7000 to 7100 SNMPTRAP From B to A MMB Not used Not used Not used Used UDP 162 SNMP UDP SVmco Duplex MMB Not used Not used Not used Used 161 icmp echo Duplex MMB Not used Not used Not used Used request echo reply DHCP UDP Not used Not used Not used Used 67 SVIM Duplex PXE client PXE UDP Not used Not used Not used Used 4011 310 C122 E108 10EN APPENDIX B Physical Mounting Locations and Port Number
16. Describes installation and update installation of ServerView Windows Agent v C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Preface ServerView Mission Critical Option User Manual ServerView RAID Manager VMware vSphere ESXi 5 Installation Guide MegaRAID SAS Software MegaRAID SAS Device Driver Installation Modular RAID Controller Installation Guide Abbreviations Describes the necessary functions unique to None PRIMEQUEST notification via the MMB hot replacement command and ServerView Mission Critical Option SVmco which is required for supporting these functions Also includes explanation of ServerView Mission Critical Option for VM SVmcovm required for VMware vSphere 5 server monitor Describes the installation and settings required to None use ServerView RAID Manager on the VMware vSphere ESXi 5 server Provides technical information on using array _ None controllers Refer to the manual from the SVS DVD2 supplied with the product or from the following URL The Fujitsu Technology Solutions manuals server http manuals ts fujitsu com Provides technical information on using array _ None controllers Refer to the manual from the SVS DVD2 supplied with the product or from the following URL The Fujitsu Technology Solutions manuals server http manuals ts fujitsu com Provides technical information on using array _ None controllers Refer to the manual from the SVS
17. Partition 1 Poff Partition 2 Poff Partition 3 Pon To oi OPP PIE peril SB 0 SB 1 SB 2 Partition 0 Pon UK A PEDA 1 Partition 1 Poff Partition 2 Poff Partition 3 Pon FIGURE 3 9 Example 4 Example where the Reserved SBs 0 1 and 2 for Partition 0 belong to other partitions In Example 4 SB 1 and SB 2 in the powered off partition are available SB 2 has the higher SB number SB 2 is selected as the switching destination SB 53 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal SB 0 SB 2 SB 3 Partition 0 Pon Partition 1 Pon Partition 2 Pon Uke ELL ort e t Partition 3 Pon ei ekt lt SB 0 SB 1 SB 2 Partition 0 Pon Partition 1 Pon Partition 2 Pon Partition 3 Poff ile ekke FIGURE 3 10 Example 5 Example where the Reserved SBs 1 2 and 3 for Partition 0 belong to other partitions In Example 5 there is no SB in a powered off partition Among SB 1 SB 2 and SB 3 in the powered on partitions SB has the highest SB number SB 3 is selected as the switching destination SB The following describes examples of switching the Home SB to a Reserved SB In switching of the Home SB to a Reserved SB the SB that becomes the Home SB has the lowest number among the Reserved SBs Example 6 If an SB other than the Home SB is degraded the
18. System Event Log to open the System Event Log window The system event log information is important for an investigation so first click the Download button at the bottom of the window to save the information The information will be needed when you contact a field engineer or your sales representative For details on how to read system event log messages see Chapter 1 Message Overview in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Message Reference C122 E111EN 269 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures BMMedel PRIMEPQUEST Le Active DIM Red Post Naseber MCDSACLU Serial Number bese feo States Nas we ad h System Event I 16 01 13 175112 m fE an EE NAA PMO RQ CT cnet in hgt Some 10 18 107 43 n r a a 2 G D p n v e o g o 3 ne jate Opa etig ren Aho 4 eee 4010 01 13 A tenoa WOOUCFF Sytem fahre Desi 13443 Lanse d 010 01 13 BOD0IFF Ope rfd shadows 11633 stg reer ga a a 3 Jas 26 10 ee pe Ea a E eja O f zj ai __ nn FIGURE 11 11 System event log display Finding out about a faulty partition Investigate the entire system partition configuration and the faulty partition Select Partition Partition Configuration in the MMB menu window You can find out the status of each partition 270 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error N
19. TABLE C 2 External MMB interfaces External interface Number of Remarks ports LAN MMB 1000Base T USER port Management LAN 100Base TX Maintenance LAN port LOCAL port 100Base TX REMCS port REMOTE port Connector type D Sub 9 pin 317 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX C Lists of External Interfaces G3 List of Other External Interfaces The following lists other external interfaces TABLE C 3 Other external interfaces External interface Number Remarks of ports UPC Connector type D Sub 9 pin 318 C122 E108 10EN APPENDIX D Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Built in I O and PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers This appendix shows the correspondence between the physical locations and BUS numbers of built in I O in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server It also shows the correspondence between PCI slot mounting locations and slot numbers D 1 Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Internal I O Controllers of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series 320 D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot NWMBGIS cccccccieecsscseccseeesseneeesnccseeees 321 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX D Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Built in I O and PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers D 1 Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Internal I O Controllers of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series The following table shows the corresp
20. The MMB Web UlI displays Read Error in Part Number and Serial Number for the status of a component 9 2 5 Partition power on and power off procedures The procedures include those for single partition power on off and those for multiple partition power on off The single partition power on off operation is the same as the multiple partition power on off operation When powering off multiple partitions that share one external device first power off the multiple partitions and then the external device The following table lists power on off permissions TABLE 9 3 Power on off permissions User privilege Power on off permission Administrator Has permission for all partitions Has permission for all partitions Partition Operator Has permission for only the partition authorized for the user Does not have permission for any partition Does not have permission for any partition For details on the user privileges for the MMB Web UI menus see 1 1 Web UI Menus in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 9 2 6 Powering on a partition by using the MMB This section describes the partition power on procedure using the MMB 1 Log in to the MMB Web UI The MMB Web UI window appears 2 Click Partition Power Control The Power Control window appears This window displays only partitions having an SB IOB or GSPB 227 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startu
21. 1 Confirm the serial number of the faulty PCI card Example fio config g FIO_PREALLOCATE_MEMORY FIO_PREALLOCATE_ MEMORY XXXXXXXXX For the procedure to confirm the serial number see the ioMemory Product Family User Guide Microsoft Windows for Driver Release x x x X x x is the version number at the following website http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest download e 2 Delete the serial number of the PCI card from PREALLOCATE_ MEMORY Note Before replacing the PCI card delete the serial number of the faulty PCI card from PREALLOCATE_MEMORY For details see the ioMemory Product Family User Guide Microsoft Windows for Driver Release X xX X X X X is the version number at the following website http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest download e To configure SWAP with multiple PCI cards delete all the PCI card serial numbers 3 Power off the partition For details on powering off partitions see 8 1 2 Powering off a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 4 Replace the faulty PCI card 5 Power on the partition For details on powering on partitions see 8 1 1 Powering on a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 6 Format the replacement PCI card Use the following procedure Execute commands from the command prompt 70 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Adminis
22. 4 2 Disk Management Command diskctrl Starts or stops PSA 4 3 PSA Start Stop Command y30FJSVpsa Collects PSA data for investigation 4 4 Command for Collecting PSA Data for Investigation getopsa Copies and updates the filter definition to the PSA work 4 5 Filter Definition Update Commands fltcpy directory fltupdate Displays a local partition number on the standard output 4 6 Local Partition Number Acquisition Command getpartid Displays a serial number on the standard output 4 7 Serial Number Acquisition Command getserialno Sets the host that accepts SNMP packets 4 8 SNMP Security Setting Command setsnmpsec Collects firmware information 4 9 Firmware Information Acquisition Command getfwinfo Confirms information for the PCI card you want to replace 4 10 PCI Card Operation Command fjpciswap and replaces the card Opens a port used for PRIMECLUSTER linkage for the 4 11 Firewall Setting Command for the Management management LAN interface LAN Interface setmlanfw sh 247 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 10 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures 10 5 UEFI The following lists the functions provided by the UEFI For details on the UEFI provided commands see Chapter 6 UEFI Command Operations in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN For details on the functions in TABLE 10 5 Menus provided by the UEFI see the
23. 9 Not Not DVD board Replaceable Not replaceable replaceable replaceable DVD drive 10 Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable 11 Replaceable PCI_Box Replaceable Replaceable 4 Not replaceable PCI_ Replaceable IO_PSU Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable 2 Box 2 IO_FAN Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable PEXU Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Not replaceable PCI PEXU Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable 1 5 6 12 Express card This is possible only if the system is duplicated Redundancy software is required 2 This is when the PSU redundant configuration is used 23 The SB will need to be removed 4 The LGSPB LIOB and LPCI_Box in a partition share physical hardware Therefore the partition using the components needs to be shut down Before IOB replacement the partitions using the GSPB must be shut down 5 The PCI Hot Plug function is required 6 Replacing the boot path is not possible with hot replacement 7 One SAS disk unit or SAS array disk unit and one SAS card or SAS array controller card make one set of maintenance parts Replacing only the card is not possible 8 The SAS disk unit will need to be removed O This is possible only if the MMB is duplicated 10 Replace only the DVD drive without removing the DVDB 11 The connections to all partitions must be disconnected free before replacement 12 Hot maintenance of a converge
24. APPENDIX L Sotware LINK cnicana i EE EENET AA ET EE 375 APPENDIX M Failure Report Sheet occ cicieiciccccsesaccvsertsancceedsetneccaena vis eccceutaaadcdevibaadeceuviaaadaecesbadecceevvbaatvacebian ce 376 Mi Failures Repon UNE sirimni dh ca cetcdcsccaedadde canta denacsestencachbenaiseesasdeatesasseedouen shaceuanearsaatieeecns 377 INN A E T N E E E E E E E E E E E O T 379 xix C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Figures Figures Warning label location PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 1800E rear ccecceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseaaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees x Warning label location PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 1800E rear IOBS removed cccceeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeesaaeees xi Warming label WaT POLBO icipicit tsi bs asec causes i iaa ay sdeaeeieivecetas hat ada aa aaa tiers xi FIGURE 1 1 Ektemal newWwork COMMISION otc ote cececins stectccsean iia aaa aaia naa naai Eaa oana 2 FIGURE 1 2 Exemal nenwork MNCIOMS siisii aa aaia aE A aa aE Eiaa 3 FIGURE 1 5 Management LAN COMJUTaWOM ciiiesinsiiaierraanda anaa aas vie aa Eaa eana eta ERKAN K DERA 9 FIGURE 1 4 Maintenance LAN and REMCS LAN of the MMB eeeseceeeececeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeecaeeeseenaeeeeseeeeeeeeeaaes 16 FIGURE 1 5 Connection configuration for video RedireCtion ccc cccccctccsesensecscnsesavercecechtcnenecee cavebeseeesanie aia 21 FIGURE 1 6 Operating sequence of video redirection ceccccecseceeccceceeceeeeneeeceeaeceeaaeeseeaeeeeaaaesneeeeeaaeeeen
25. Click the OK button to close the System Properties dialog box 13 Restart the partition After the partition restart the settings take effect 11 4 5 Acquiring data for investigation RHEL If a problem occurs in RHEL data on the situation is required for ensuring a prompt and correct investigation 295 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 11 5 Configuring and Checking Log Information This section describes how to configure and confirm the log information on problems that occurred in the system 11 5 1 List of log information This section lists the types of log information that can be acquired Available log information 1 Syslog and event log Agent log available only on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E Partition Event Log OWmWANI HNN FW WV aA A U Ne O System event log Hardware error log BIOS error log Information on factors in partition power supply control Network configuration log information NTP client log information REMCS configuration log information Operation log information Physical inventory including PCI_Boxes information System and partition configuration information System and partition configuration file Information on internal rack sensor definitions 296 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Noti
26. DVD2 supplied with the product or from the following URL The Fujitsu Technology Solutions manuals server http manuals ts fujitsu com This manual uses the following product name abbreviations Formal product name Abbreviation Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 for Intel 64 Linux Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 for x86 RHELS RHEL Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 for Intel 64 Linux Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 for x86 RHEL6 RHEL Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition Windows Windows Server 2003 vi C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Preface Formal product name Abbreviation Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 i iti Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Datacenter x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Datacenter Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 i iti Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Datacenter x64 Edition Windows Windows Server 2008 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Datacenter VMware vSphere R 4 SLES11 SP2 Notation This manual uses the following fonts and symbols to express specific types of information Font or Meaning Example symbol italics Title of a manual that you should refer to See the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107E
27. How to confirm the version number of firmware After a card is added and the partition is started use the following procedure to confirm the firmware version How to confirm the firmware version of the SAS array controller card To confirm the version number see APPENDIX K How to Confirm Firmware of SAS Array Controller Card How to confirm the version number of the firmware of FC card To confirm the version number see Section 1 2 14 IOB menu or Section 1 2 17 PCI_Box menu in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Changing the firmware When the version numbers of firmware are not identical change the firmware The information about the firmware and the procedures are provided in the following web site Download of drivers and the bundled software of PRIMEQUEST 1000 series http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest download e Remarks In the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series the customer may have to perform part of the firmware change 3 4 1 Addition procedures in hot maintenance This section describes the procedures before and after expansion in hot maintenance Procedure before expansion Stop the relevant partition according to 8 1 2 Powering off a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN Procedure after expansion Start the relevant partition according to 8 1 1 Powering on a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 3 4 2 Addition procedures in
28. MPD has been applied To replace more than one card one card at a time will be replaced For details on the fjpciswap command see Section 4 10 PCI Card Operation Command fjpciswap in Chapter 4 PSA CLI Command Line Interface Operations in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN a1 Confirming the incorporation of a card with MPD This section describes the procedure for confirming that a card has been incorporated with MPD Windows Server 2008 1 From the MMB Web UI click Partition Partition N PSA PCI Devices to search for the NIC to be replaced You can search for the NIC to be replaced from the Unit names or BUS numbers Suppose that you are going to replace IOB 0 PCIC 7 The red box indicates the target device figuration PCI Devices c al _ Te display the device information click on the unit entry r Unit Status Device Name paves Cee EA SBAB NIC OK s 020000 Of Of 25 0 QSPB O GbE 4 oK 020000 0 5 0 0 QSPB O QbE 5 OK 020000 Of 5 0 1 GSPBRO GbERE OK 020000 07 67 OF O GSPBRO GbEN7 OK 020000 0 6 0 1 GSPBRO SAS 1 OK 010000 Of 7 0 0 SASU 1 Controller OK 010000 10B 0 OK 020000 O 147 0 0 IOB 0 PCIC 6 FUNC I OK 020000 Of 147 OF 1 IC 7 FUNCHO 020000 Of 15 0 0 O 15 O 1 FIGURE 7 14 PCI Devices window Some multifunction cards dif
29. No action is required for unchanged entries 114 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Hot replacement done on this NIC lt Required recovery by hwconf lt Required recovery by hwconf FIGURE 5 3 Required interface recovery example 1 lt Required recovery by hwconf Hot replacement done on this NIC lt Required recovery by hwconf lt Required recovery by hwconf FIGURE 5 4 Required interface recovery example 2 13 Confirm the hardware address Powering on the slot creates an interface ethX for the replaced NIC Execute the following command Compare its results with those of step 6 to confirm the created interface name sbin ifconfig a Confirm the hardware address HWaddr of the replaced interface by executing the ifconfig command For a single NIC with multiple interfaces confirm the hardware addresses of all the interfaces Example sbin ifconfig a Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 0E 0C 70 C3 40 BROADCAST MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 1000 RX bytes 0 0 0 b TX bytes 0 0 0 b Memory 8ab00000 8ab20000 Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 0E 0C 70 C3 41 BROADCAST MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packet
30. PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 Collects configuration information of the PCI cards recognized in the partition and monitors them for problems QSS Collects troubleshooting information when a software failure occurs in a partition Communication with the REMCS Center is handled by the MMB The MMB summarizes the information from each partition and sends it to the REMCS Center To receive the REMCS service you will need a SupportDesk Product Basic Service agreement Users without an agreement may register with the REMCS Center registration but cannot receive the service For details on the SupportDesk Product Basic Service contact your sales representative REMCS function Configuration information monitoring 260 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Detects changes in the hardware or software configuration and reports the latest configuration information to the REMCS Center Problem notification When a hardware problem occurs in a server automatically notifies the REMCS Center of the problem and sends problem information including logs to the REMCS Center Software problems are not monitored automatically To report a software problem collect troubleshooting information using the SIRMS QSS information collection tool and instruct the system to send the information Whenever an event involving a hardware problem occurs in the same u
31. Reserved SB Configuration window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 5 Set the partition name gt gt See 1 3 4 Partition Configuration window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 6 Set various modes gt gt See Mode window in 1 3 7 Partition x menu in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 7 Start the partition gt gt See 1 3 1 Power Control window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 47 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal 3 2 High availability Configuration The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series supports the Reserved SB function and Memory Mirror function to implement high availability on the system This section describes the Reserved SB function and the Memory Mirror function 3 2 1 Reserved SB The Reserved SB function can prepare spare SBs in the cabinet automatically disconnect an SB that fails restart the partition that incorporated the SB and replace it with a spare SB In particular a spare SB intended for use as a replacement SB in case of failure is called a Reserved SB All PRIMEQUEST 1000 series models support the Reserved SB function The Reserved SB function can provide the following advantages in cases of SB hardware failures No decrease in SB resources and quick recovery Capability to recover a single SB partition
32. System administrator eee Operations management software console PSA runs on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E SVS runs on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 FIGURE 11 3 REMCS linkage 262 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 11 2 Troubleshooting This section describes how to troubleshoot system problems 11 2 1 Troubleshooting overview The following shows the basic procedure for troubleshooting Occurrence of system problem Notified via MMB Web UI window Status displayed in information area As indicated by LED on DVD board Notified by e mail Alarm LED On orange 11 2 4 Finding out about abnormal conditions 11 2 5 Investigating abnormal conditions trouble spots MMB Web UI window Examine the following logs according to the displayed status and displayed configuration 1 System event log Investigate malfunctioning components 2 PSA agent log or Partition event log Investigate partition problems 11 2 6 Checking into errors in detail See this manual Check for the Event ID of the message on the message list 11 2 7 11 2 11 Taking appropriate action depending on the message Contacting your sales representative or a field engineer 11 4 Collecting data for maintenance data for a detailed investigation oe Maintenance completed FIGURE 11 4 Troubleshooting overview Ope
33. dh command in the UEFI shell eee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 370 DIMM secs bosch Si dante ac aacels 340 DIMM mounting pattern ee ee cee eceeceeeereeeeeees 342 DIMM mounting pattern 1 eee eeee cree eseeeeeees 343 DIMM mounting pattern 2 0 eee eeeeee tse treeeeeees 343 DIMM mounting pattern 3 00 0 eee eeeeseecseetneeeeeees 344 DIMM mounting pattern 4 0000 ee eee cee ereeeeeees 345 Display and setting items in the ASR Control window 236 drivers command in the UEFI shell ee eens 370 DVDB device status and LED display 328 DV DB LEDS irci eair eE e E 327 E Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Pro ed tes fo2 32 5 echeieeesdas ae E E 251 ETERNUS Multipath Manager 197 199 216 ETERNUS Multipath Manager window 0 213 Ethernet Controller window ccccsssseeees 201 207 Event log at recalibration eee cess eeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeees 65 Event log when the battery level is low 1 66 Event log when the battery level is low 2 ee 66 Example 1 a Example with two SBs set as Reserved SBs in two partitions SB 0 and SB 1 fail simultaneously 52 Example 1 b Example with one SB set as the Reserved SB in two partitions SB 0 and SB 2 fail simultaneously 32 Example 2 Example of multiple SBs failing in a partition 52 Example 3 Example with multiple free SBs 2 and 3 set as Reserved SBs for Partition 0 eeeeeeeereeeeereeeee Example
34. ethl 00 0e 0c 70 c3 39 0000 0b 01 1 20 The above step is used in creating the correspondence table in step 13 Prepare a table here so that you can reference it later Note In areplacement due to a device failure the information in the table showing the correspondence between the interface and the hardware address bus address and slot number may be inaccessible depending on the failure condition We strongly recommend that a table showing the correspondence between the interface and the hardware address bus address and slot number be created for all interfaces at system installation 3 Execute the higher level application processing required before NIC replacement Stop all access to the interface as follows Stop the application that was confirmed in step 2 as using the interface or exclude the interface from the target of use by the application 4 Deactivate the NIC Execute the following command to deactivate all the interfaces that you confirmed in step 2 The applicable command depends on whether the target interface is a single NIC interface or the SLAVE interface of a bonding device For a single NIC interface sbin ifdown ethX If the single NIC interface has a VLAN device you also need to remove the VLAN interface Perform the following operations before deactivating the real interface 154 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterpr
35. fjpciswap in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Notes SAN boot paths are not valid LTO library devices are not supported Depending on the Windows specifications if the FC card connection destination has a Page File or other such paging scheme FC card hot plugging may not be supported The error message Source FJSVpsa ID 25004 may be output to the event log during the replacement procedure This message does not indicate any problem 4 1 Hot plugging an FC card incorporated with the ETERNUS multipath driver This section describes the hot plugging procedure for an FC card incorporated with the ETERNUS multipath driver 1 From the MMB Web UI click Partition Partition N PSA PCI Devices to search for the FC card to be replaced You can search for the FC card to be replaced from the Unit names or BUS numbers Suppose that you are going to replace IOB 1 PCIC 4 The red box indicates the target device System User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt Partition gt Partition 1 gt PSA gt PCI Devices PCI Devices Refresh _ Help To display the device information click on the unit entry SB 1 NIC GSP BEI GhEe4 ok 0 14 0 0 0 14 0 1 S P 900400 FIGURE 7 9 PCI Devices window Remarks Some multifunction cards differ only in the part after FUNC in the Unit name Also some differ only in the Fu
36. if an error occurs at CPU 0 on SB 0 this item will display SB 0 To identify the unit the FRU in control of the sensor was identified from the event ID of the sensor Then the associated parent entry was retrieved from the Entity Association Record The displayed name is the Board Unit Name written in the FRU Record of the parent entry 282 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Each unit has a link to a webpage for information on the unit You can see the part number and serial number of the unit there Displays the ID 8 digit hexadecimal value that identifies the event details For details on Event ID assignment see Chapter 2 MMB Messages in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Message Reference C122 E111EN Description Displays the details of the event or error If the sensor recorded data other than Trig Offset in Event Data this item also displays that Event Data For example the R and T values recorded by the sensor are displayed as the Reading Value and Threshold Value at the event occurrence time However for an event related to the mounting or removal of a board this item displays the part number and serial number of the board Part Displays the Part value stored in the SEL If no Part value is stored this item displays Displays the serial number of the component where the event occurred Displays Event Da
37. piscovery Favorite Targets Volumes and Devices RADIUS Configuration M Quick Connect To discover and log on to a target using a basic connection type the IP address or DNS name of the target and then dick Quick Connect Target Quick Connect r Discovered targets Refresh feternus 2000 cm0 porti Connected eternus2000 cm1 port0 Connected To connect using advanced options select a target and then Connect dick Connect To completely disconnect a target select the target and Disconnect then dick Disconnect For target properties induding configuration of sessions Properties select the target and click Properties For configuration of devices associated with a target select the target and then click Devices More about basic iSCSI connections and targets FIGURE 7 25 iSCSI Initiator Properties window in Windows Server 2008 R2 5 Click the Sessions tab in the Properties window and click the MCS button 208 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows Sessions portal Groups C fffffas00fe2b2F8 40000 13700000009 To add a session dick Add session Add session wea To view devices associated with a session select Devices a session and then dick Devices M Session Information Target portal group taa z Status Connected Connection count 1 Maximum Allowed Connecti
38. restart any registered applications fa Abort a system shutdown This can only be used during the time out period p Turn off the local computer with no time out or warning Can be used with d and f options 7h Hibernate the local computer Can be used with the f option hybrid Performs a shutdown of the computer and prepares it for fast Must be used with s option Document the reason for an unexpected shutdown of a computer FIGURE 9 7 Simplified help for the shutdown command 239 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 240 C122 E108 10EN CHAPTER 10 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures This chapter describes functions for checking the configuration and status of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server The functions are broken down by firmware or other software and by tool POT MMB WEB sirrinin 242 WAI GED iratra aioa 245 TOS PSA PPD aches stesteenwcne conve dues dh caeehaictarstidheietescewass 246 TLA POSAGU mossi ns cadet tiie aE aan 247 TOUS MER goroni aa E E 248 10 6 ServerView Suite oo ec eeeeeceeesseeeeeeeeneenees 249 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 10 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures 10 1 MMB Web UIl The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series unifies PSA and SB management via the MMB Web UI The following lists the functions provided by the MMB Web
39. 0 is restarted and begins operation Partition Q is not affected Partition R stops and SB 2 is removed from its configuration SB 2 was set as a Reserved SB in 1 and is subsequently cleared from this status The resultant status is given in TABLE 3 17 Partition settings after switching and TABLE 3 18 Reserved SB settings after switching After the SB is switched to the Reserved SB the MMB changes the settings as follows TABLE 3 17 Partition settings after switching Cc a E a e a T e a A O Indicates that the SB is set for the partition 83 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal TABLE 3 18 Reserved SB settings after switching Set partition ESS Sa Sea e a a e E a e E a When switching to a Reserved SB takes place as described above the MMB displays the following SEL information SEL 1 SB a was replaced with Reserved SB c in Partition P SEL 2 Reserved SB c was removed from Partition Q SEL 3 Reserved SB c was removed from Partition R SEL 1 indicates that SB a for Partition P was replaced by SB c as a Reserved SB The SEL 2 and SEL 3 messages indicate that the Reserved SB setting for SB c was canceled or SB c was removed from the operating partition The partition operation before and after the switching determines the status In the above example Partition R was powered off immediately before SB c was r
40. 164 6 2 2 PCI card addition procedure in detall ieissiiconciiiiiinorni cseesecen suessenabteenedsssdestenstsenssneceneaetie iia 164 6 2 3 FG card Fibre Ghannel card addition procede niisiis iaaa anada Kaa 165 6 2 4 Network card addition procedure cccccececceceeeseeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeneaeeeseaeeceeeesnenseeeeesseneeeeeseseeeeeeensnnaaes 167 ma Remang PS CSCI ss ass cece iarainn aa ga Ea EE beater E aa E aE E aE K TEA aes 172 6 3 1 Common removal procedures for all PCI Cards ccccececceescceeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeenaeeseeaeeeeaaaeeneeeees 172 6 42 POI card removal procedure in detall a srai aannaaien iaaea AE AA A aAA KAAKE 172 6 3 3 FC card Fibre Channel card removal procedure cceeesceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeseeneeeeeaaeeeeeneeeseaaeeeneneeess 173 6 3 4 Nolwork card romoval DroceduUTe crassipes ana RRR Kaaa Hib ARa EA tee dened een 174 GHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in WiINQOWS 22 0 0 os ccccccees te eneecee sent veneneeeserbeasasaneeceesttebenecceeeneen aak 181 Ti Ovemiew of hot Maimtenante os sic cezenscnedite cca des vesueededceesanptesenaistaghaes gave ana aaa ia anii aaan iaaa 182 ES E U NORE A A EE E E E A vate tiartenineess 182 7 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PC Cards csssiseiiiiisiciisiiernnirisivaseniaprienindinii iana 184 Fl o e eee e T A A ins renee ain veda ewer E E deee ee eth eecdiy E tis 184 BICMOS ace ica teas Seas pene sacs Sees dein cc eveced soi se ceed ebdadnecaatensdidadsadete weisec aae
41. 2011 12 20 All pages Addenda C122 E119 20EN to C122 E119 24EN Changed and added descriptions mainly concerning the following items Video redirection notes Stopping the ServerView RAID 2012 07 17 All pages paths FC card replacement procedure and explanation ASR Control window display setting items Partition Event Log window Added descriptions about Windows Server 2012 2013 01 25 All pages Added descriptions about 785 GB 1 2 TB internal solid state drives that use PCI slots Added descriptions to Notes on VMware in 3 2 1 Reserved SB 2013 11 19 Chapter 3 Added descriptions on Windows Software RAID and Windows configuration Chapter 3 Added descriptions about GSPB 2013 07 02 Chapter 11 replacement Chapter section and item numbers in the Revised location column refer to those in the latest edition of the document However a number marked with an asterisk denotes a chapter section or item in a previous edition of the document This manual shall not be reproduced or copied without the permission of Fujitsu Limited Copyright 2010 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED xiv C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Contents Contents CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation eccccecceeeeeeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeneeeetaeeeeeaes 1 Tal External Network Configuration visiini inae aa aia aeaa ada EE i aiaa iie peti 2 1 2 How to Configure the External Networks Manage
42. 229 FIGURE UT WAONE ove cae caeeen ade tenes cceedan ce ue even acen sara coeeted iaaiiai iaaa niaii naina 230 FIGURE 95 Power Control WiNOW 22 2 c8cincteesetcisicici ind bec ne ei etna ditt la 231 FIGURE 9 6 ASR Automatic Server Restart Control WINdOW cceecceceeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeeeeteaaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaas 235 FIGURE 9 7 Simplified help for the shutdown command 0 eeccecetceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeteaaeeseeeeeeeaaeeeanes 239 FIGURE TET WU A eroinin eioan aeea anaa e aiidns 254 FIGURE 11 2 Operations management software linkage cceeeceeeeeeseee cette eeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeeseaaeseseeeeeteaaeeeee 256 FIGURE TIS ERAS GAGE osc cic ee ccc gcse nr a aii a aaae a aaiae E aaae aa aeiaai 262 FIGURE T14 Troubleshooting OVEIMIOW J 2 h 0 cco Giedi nde iaa erties a ae ed ede 263 FIGURE TLO eI 1 acrespir ban envied ctnecha ad engeveileitnn sa qu adios sana raa e a a era aeiia 264 FIGURE TLO Label bahon 2 vcsir dete bani ete ne ee 265 FIGURE 11 7 Alarm LED on the front panel of the device o eeceeeeccceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeesesaeeeeaaeeseeaeeeeaaaeeeeaes 266 FIGURE 11 8 System status display in the MMB Web UI Window ccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesenaaeeessnaeeeeeaas 267 xxi C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Figures FIGURE 11 9 Alann E Mail settings WINGO os c cs seek acs ccse cen cstavaceceecasklescessecezsntesedeacecavh dar ecesased deasineeee antennae 268 FIGURE
43. 255 128 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 10 PADDR 192 168 16 1 ETMASK 255 255 255 0 E RK 192 168 16 0 Ethernet SLAVE interface of the bonding configuration Example DEVICE eth0 Specified interface name confirmed in step 7 BOOTPROTO static HWADDR 00 0E 0C 70 C3 40 MAS TER bondy SLAVE yes ONBOOT yes Adding the bonding interface itself also requires the MASTER interface configuration file of the bonding configuration Note The interface configuration file is required for automatically activating the interface when the system is started Add the added interface to the etc modprobe conf file This associates the interface with the driver The following example shows etc modprobe conf contents et e1000e et igb et igb et igb eth5 igb eth6 igb eth7 igb eth8 igb eth9 igb eth10 e1000e eth11 e1000e scsi_hostadapter mptbase scsi_hostadapterl mptscsih usb controller ehci hcd usb controllerl uhci hcd scsi_hostadapter2 lpfc tho e1000 Added al al al al al al al al al al al al al al al al al 129 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 11 To add the bonding interface itself you need to also add the device driver
44. 266 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Model PRIMEQUEST Active EMB 0 Part Number MCD3ACI11 FUjiTsu Serial Number 1480935001 a Status a u Partition User Administration Network Configuration Mantenance System gt System Status Description Displays the system status FIGURE 11 8 System status display in the MMB Web UI window The MMB Web UI window always displays the information area Status in the information area displays the system status The following table lists the Normal Warning and Error status indicators You can view the details of a message about a trouble spot by clicking the displayed icon to jump to the System Event Log window TABLE 11 6 Icons indicating the system status Display color Icon Normal Green None normal status AN A black mark in a yellow triangle Error A white x mark in a red circle critical status Remarks If Part Number or Serial Number the content or information area in the MMB Web UI window displays Read Error contact a field engineer or your sales representative Before making contact confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the main unit Alarm E Mail notification Alarm E Mail notification can inform you of system problems You can configure Alarm E Mail notification for problem occurrences by selecting Network Conf
45. 4 1 Logs that can be collected by the MMB cccceecesceeceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeesaaaeeesecaeeeeteneeeeeeeaaes 278 114 2 Logs Tet can be collected by PSA nomion aen eai iiaa el isin ene 283 11 4 3 Collecting data for investigation Windows cceccceceeseeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeceaaeesteaeeeseeneeeeteeeeeeeeeeaaes 285 11 4 4 Setting up the dump environment Windows 0 ccccceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeceaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeseeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaees 285 11 4 5 Acquiring data for investigation RHEL cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeecaeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseaaaeeeseeeeeeeees 295 11 5 Configuring and Checking Log Information cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeseaeeeseeaaeeeeeaeeeeseaeeeneeaes 296 TLETT ASE NT WAT oieee aea iaa a aeaaaee iaa i aieiaa 296 TRG Fima UNdIEE onci a ane ne A a a a A ada 297 11 6 1 Notes on updating AUIS accesso ese See sati een hat wade lensced ese snea tu ceedihctabyhcdeauadede Saseeddacedeuadepecdstecteedeauale 297 APPENDIX A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series cccsceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesenaeeesenees 299 Peel PUNY LID swettisieaGevicetcciavieediid tenis ais nine A E EAT 300 A 2 Correspondence between Functions and Interfaces ceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceaaaeseeeeeeeaaeeseceeseeaeees 305 A 3 Management Network Specifications ceeeccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeseaeeecaaaeseeeeeesesaeeseeeeeeeaeees 309 APPENDIX B Physical Mounting
46. BH checking in us microseconds cow Cpu Min 0 Max 500000 DataMover Digest Misc BHTimeout DirentryCache Disk Time out for bottom half handlers in milliseconds Misc BhTimeBound Min 0 Max 5000 Misc BlueScreenTimeout Time out in seconds Set to 0 for no time out Min 0 Max 65535 Misc ConsolePort Name of serial port to use For visor console COM1 COM2 vmwire Fw PageRetire Power RdmFilter ScratchConfig Se Enable buddy debugging Set to 0 to disable SvMotion Syslog Min 0 Max 1 User UserVars Misc DebugClient YMFS3 ae Debug client to choose SerialPort Network vProbes Misc DebugBuddyEnable Cancel tp FIGURE 3 4 BlueScreenTimeout setting Misc settings For details on the vSphere Client see the manual of VMware Switching rules The Reserved SB switching rules are as follows Determining the switching source SB Ifan SB has been configured as a Reserved SB for multiple partitions that experience simultaneous SB failures the partition with the lower number takes priority for the SB switching Example 1 If multiple SBs in a partition fail the SB with the lower SB number takes priority for switching Example 2 Determining the switching destination SB Among multiple Reserved SBs that have been set for a partition and do not belong to any partition the Reserved SB with the highest SB number takes priority for switching Example 3 Among multiple Reserved SBs that have all be
47. BIOS configuration information Supported save and restore Maintenance wizard Component Supported replacement Maintenance wizard Maintenance Supported mode setting and cancellation PCI card hot replacement and Supported addition HDD hot replacement and addition Pf fF J Suporte Supported 308 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series A 3 Management Network Specifications The following lists the management network specifications of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series TABLE A 3 Management network specifications Component Communica Component USER CE REMCS Partition Protocol A tion B port port port LAN port Port No direction telnet TCP Duplex Changeable MMB Used Used Notused Notused 23 ssh TCP 22 Changeable Video MMB VNC TCP oo Duplex Used Used Not used Not used redirection BMC 80 Remote MMB Duplex BMC Used Used Not used Notused Storage TCP 5901 telnet TCP Duplex Changeable 23 FST Duplex MMB Used Used Not used Notused ssh TCP 22 Changeable Peres e Duplex REMCS Cent From B to A MMB Used Used Used Not used SMTP enter NTP server MMB NTP UDP clock Duplex Used Used Not used Not used client 123 device Web http https Duplex MMB PSA Used Used Not used Not used browser TCP 8081 telnet TCP 23 9 Changeable Changeable N WwW VY Changeable ssh TCP 22 Changeable
48. Boot Watchdog to Disable for the following operations CD ROM boot Operation system installation Boot in single user mode Backup or restore with SystemcastWizard Professional With Enable set for Boot Watchdog the above operations will try to restart the operating system for the specified number of times before performing the specified action Stop rebooting and Power Off Stop rebooting or Diagnostic Interrupt assert The number of retries and the action taken depend on the settings in the ASR Automatic Server Restart Control window of the MMB In the ASR Automatic Server Restart Control window you can forcibly set Boot Watchdog to Disable by checking Cancel Boot Watchdog and clicking the Apply button Set automatic partition restart conditions by using the following procedure 1 Click Partition Partition x ASR Control The ASR Control window appears Bledel PRIMPOUPRST Lae Active DIM Ben 3 Past Kishor MCDSACIL FUJITSU Sesia Number lisent Srta ASR Automatic Server Restart Control wij set the Apply Button to apply al changes eey Coreei e a FIGURE 9 6 ASR Automatic Server Restart Control window 2 Set automatic partition restart conditions 235 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control The following lists the setting items in the ASR Control window TABLE 9 6 Display and set
49. CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use This section describes the operating conditions and use of the management tools The MMB Web UI operating conditions are as follows Supported Web browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6 Service Pack 1 or later Mozilla FireFox version 3 or later Maximum number of Web UI login users Up to 16 users can log in to the Web UI at a time If 16 users have logged in when another user attempts to log in a warning dialog box appears and the login attempt is rejected The MMB Web UI login procedure is as follows 1 Specify the URL of the MMB in the Web browser to connect to the MMB gt gt The Login window appears 2 Enter your user name and password gt gt The Web UI window System System Status appears For details on basic Web UI window operations see 1 7 Basic Operations in the Web UI Window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series User Interface Operating Instructions C122 E109EN For details on the MMB Web UI login procedure see 3 3 4 Logging in to MMB in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN MMB user privileges User privileges specify the levels of MMB operating privileges held by user accounts Only users with Administrator privileges can create delete and modify user accounts For details on operations permitted 1 e privileges in the MMB Web UI menus see Chapter 1 MMB Web UI W
50. Device dialog box From the storage devices on the PC you can select those to be connected to the partition 38 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation Ej Add Storage Device Look In I PKG4_1224 ly alle co a D hardcopy bmp p1 teraterm log D p3 teraterm log D sel_20091224153128 tgz FileName Files of Type All Files FIGURE 1 24 Remote storage selection window The following lists the operable items in the remote storage selection window TABLE 1 14 Items in the remote storage selection window Fi Select the storage type enter the file name and click the Select button Then the display returns to the remote storage list window From the remote storage list window click the Connect button to connect the selected storage to the partition 39 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation Y Storace Devices Device Type FIGURE 1 25 Window with a remote storage list The following lists the storage types supported by remote storage TABLE 1 15 Supported storage types CD ISO image The partition side can use a CD ISO image on the PC terminal side DVD ISO image The partition side can use a DVD ISO image on the PC terminal side i The partition side can use a floppy dis
51. Even after a switch to First Event and back to Specified Time the window retains the time data entered in Specified Time The default is First event The default for Specified Time is 2009 01 01 00 00 00 End Date Time Select the last event or an event of the specified time by using the radio buttons If you select Specified Time you can enter the last time Even after a switch to Last Event and back to Specified Time the window retains the time data entered in Specified Time The default is Last event The default for Specified Time is 2009 01 01 00 00 00 Number of events Specify the number of events to display to display The denominator represents the total number of events logged The specifiable maximum value is 3000 The default is 100 Displaying details of an event 281 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Procedure 1 Click the Detail button of the event to display its details The System Event Log Detail window appears Model PRIMEQUEST 1800E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCD3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number 1480935001 Status AWaring System Event Log Detail Error 2010 01 18 19 06 56 SB 1 DIMM20D0 BODE43FF Hafan eg eae eeeae n nj Event Data on DIMM 0D0 Memory Uncorrectable error ECC Oxaf0c0250b1544bc2 0x0
52. Example fio attach dev fct0 Remarks For details on each command see the ioMemory Product Family User Guide Linux for Driver Release X xX X X X X is the version number at the following website http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest download e 8 Create a swap entry for the replacement PCI card Remarks You need to create a partition before creating a swap entry e mkswap dev fioal e swapon dev fioal 9 Confirm the serial number of the replacement PCI card For details on how to confirm the serial number see the ioMemory Product Family User Guide Linux for Driver Release x x x X X x is the version number at the following website http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest download e 69 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal 10 Register the serial number of the replacement PCI card in preallocate_memory in etc modprobe d iomemory vsl conf Note After replacing the PCI card add the serial number of the replacement to preallocate_memory in etc modprobe d iomemory vsl conf For details on the procedure see the ioMemory Product Family User Guide Linux for Driver Release X xX X X X X is the version number at the following website http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest download e 11 Restart the partition OS In a SWAP configuration Windows configuration
53. FIO_PRI EALLOCAT E_ M EMORY XXXXXXXXX Note After replacing the PCI card add the serial number of the replacement to PREALLOCATE_MEMORY After replacing the PCI card add the serial number of the replacement to preallocate_memory in etc modprobe d iomemory vsl conf For details on the procedure see the ioMemory Product Family User Guide Microsoft Windows for Driver Release x x x x x X is the version number at the following website http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest download e To configure SWAP with multiple PCI cards register all the PCI card serial numbers including the serial number of the PCI card being replaced 10 Restart the partition OS 71 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal 3 4 Adding Components This section describes how to add components The following lists the components and their expandability by maintenance mode Some components cannot be added TABLE 3 11 Expandability of components and addition conditions Component name AC power off AC power on AC power AC power on cold system All partitions off on Target partition on hot system cold Target hot maintenance partition partition off maintenance hot system cold partition maintenanc e mo m mw NA NA i Ce e fee oo ev o orme erame ernan neona eo m w m vw e dis
54. Hardware RAID Configuration VMware does not support hot replacement of hard disks The following message may appear for a mounted hard disk It does not indicate any operational problem kernel mptscsih iocO gt gt Attempting bus reset sc e000004082adc480 kernel mptbase ioc0 IOCStatus 0x0048 SCSI Task Terminated After mounting a hard disk you may need to pause the disk rotation to mount it on another slot If so wait about 60 seconds after you mounted the disk before stopping the disk rotation The operating system executes the Hot Plug process when the disk is mounted Therefore if you immediately stop the disk rotation the following error may occur Device sdb not ready nd_request I O error dev sdb sector 204706 Buffer I O error on device sdbl logical block 6396 PSA should not be started during execution of a disk management command Otherwise PSA will not operate normally After the command is completed start PSA The concurrent execution of multiple instances of the disk management command may cause PSA to terminate abnormally Before executing a disk management command confirm that no other instance of the command is being executed You can perform the following operations with the disk management command For details see 4 2 Disk Management Command diskctrl in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Displaying a list of SGPIO and SES controllers or a list of
55. Home SB is replaced the operating system reads the RTC value of the new Home SB This may result in a difference between the times before and after the Home SB replacement 3 1 1 Examples of partition configurations This section provides examples of partition configurations PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 1800E The PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 1800E can have a configuration with up to four partitions It can have a combination of any SB together with any LIOB and LGSPB 45 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal The following shows examples of partition configurations In the figure components shown inside dotted lines or on a white background have not been mounted SB 0 SB 1 LIOB_0A LIOB_0B 1OB o0 LIOB_1A LIOB_1B lOBH LGSPB o LGSPB_1A LGSPB 18 GSPB 1 Partition 1 a Partition o Partition 2 SBH1 LIOB_0B LGSPB_0A LGSPB_0B GSPB 0 SB 2 SB 3 LIOB_1A LIOB_18 OB 0 LGSPB_1B Partition o c SB 0 LIOB_0A LIOB_0B 1OB o LGSPB _0A LGSPB_0B GSPB 0 Partition o Partition 1 b Partition o Partition 2 SB 0 SB 1 SB 2 SB 3 LIOB_0A BS B_1A OB o LIOB_1B LGSPB _0A GSPB 0 Partition 1 io cera cane a Partition configuration example Here is an example with three partitions Partition 1 contains 1 SB 2 1 Possible LIOBs and 2 LGSPBs Part
56. Mask SMTP Address MMB PSA IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address Specifies the NIC on the MMB of the PSA to MMB LAN The default is Enable and the specified IP Address value The MMB blocks communication between partitions Management LAN Port Configuration Management LAN port settings Speed Duplex for MMB 0 Specifies a Speed Duplex value for the MMB 0 MMB 1 LAN ports MMB 1 Port USER Port Maintenance Port Setting value Auto default 1G Full 1OOM Full 100M Half 10M Full 10M Half The MMB USER port is duplicated The speed of 1 Gbps can be specified only for the USER ports The possible settings for the respective ports depend on the MMB hardware configuration Network Protocols Network protocol settings HTTP HTTPS telnet SSH Specifies whether to enable or disable a protocol the port number and the SNMP Timeout time SNMP Configuration SNMP related settings 11 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation SNMP Community Specifies SNMP System Information and Community User values System Information Specifies System Location and System Contact values for SNMP It also displays the system name specified from System System Information Community Can specify up to 16 Community User items Each Community User item includes the access permitted IP address SNMP version access permission and authentication setti
57. NAME ethl The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Do this editing for all the interfaces listed in the table created in step 2 Reflect the edited rules in udev udevd reads the rules described in the rule file at its start time and then retains the rules in memory Simply changing the rule file does not mean the changed rules are reflected Take action as follows to reflect the new rules in udev udevadm control reload rules Power on the PCI slot To enable the card again and make it available write 1 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the disabled slot echo 1 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power This also installs the device associated with the relevant adapter on the system Collect the information associated with an interface on the replacement NIC An interface ethX is created for the replacement NIC at the power on time Make a table with information about each interface created for the replacement NIC Such information includes the interface name hardware address and bus address Use the bus address confirmed in step 1 and the same procedure as in step 2 TABLE 6 3 Example of interface information about the replacement NIC 00 0e 0c 70 c3 40 0000 0b 01 0 00 0e 0c 70 c3 41 0000 0b 01 1 Confirm that a new hardware address is defined for the bus address Also confirm that the assigned interface name is the same as that b
58. Note In specific releases of RHEL a message like a for confirming FC card incorporation may be output in the following format with card name information omitted scsil0O on PCI bus Of device 08 irq 59 In this case check for the relevant message on the FC card incorporation by using the following procedure 1 Confirm the host number XX in scsixx xx is a numerical value in the message is a host number In the above example the host number is 10 2 Check whether the following file exists by using the host number sys class scsi_host hostxx modeldesc xx in hostxx is the host number entered in step 1 If the file does not exist the judgment is that no such message was output from the FC card 3 If the file exists check the file contents by using the following operation cat sys class scsi_host hostxx modeldesc Emulex LPel250 F8 8Gb PCIe Fibre Channel Adapter 107 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 xx in hostxx is the host number entered in step 1 If the output is like the above the judgment is that the relevant message was output by the incorporation of the FC card How to confirm the FC card incorporation results using Web UI of PSA 1 From the Web UI of PSA display the Fibre Channel window For details on how to display the Web UI see Chapter 3 PSA Web UI Web user interface Operations in the PRIMEQUES
59. Operations management software console FIGURE 11 2 Operations management software linkage Targets of management with the MMB user interface The following provides an overview of the management targets of the MMB and PSA Management targets of the MMB Hardware implementation information and status in the rack e g SB PCI_Box FANTRAY PSU KVM MMB System information display and settings e g rack settings MMB Partition configuration management and settings Maintenance operations hardware replacement in the rack display and collection of partition logs Management targets of the PSA Information management and operations within the partition PCI card connection I O operating system information display operating system resource Maintenance operations hot replacement of a PCI card or disk display and collection of partition logs 256 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Note that hot replacement of a PCI card is supported only in Windows Server 2008 and hot replacement of a disk is supported only in Red Hat Available functions The following lists the operations that can be performed from the GUI of the partition TABLE 11 2 Operations that can be performed from the GUI of the partition Partition configuration SB configuration IOB configuration GSPB configuration information display CPU config
60. Properties In the following example window Controller Properties is clicked MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Physical Configuration Physical View PRIMERGY 5X35 94 Connector External B Port D 136 218 GB Online SEAGATE 5T314685555 36 218 GB Online SEAGATE 5T314685555 D 136 218 GB Online SEAGATE 5T314685555 3 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Online SEAGATE ST31468553S 4 SAS HDD 136 216 GB Online SEAGATE ST314685535 SAS HDD 136 218 GB Online SEAGATE ST314685555 JAS HDD 136 218 GB Online SEAGATE ST314685535 D 136 218 GB Online SEAGATE 5T314685555 ation Wizard FIGURE K 5 Home window in the WebBIOS 9 The details of the array controller are displayed Confirm the current firmware version number Firmware Version or FW Package Version indicates the firmware version number 371 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX K How to Confirm Firmware of SAS Array Controller Card pE MegaRAID SAS 8880EM2 Serial Number FRU None SubVendorID Encryption Capable 00 SubDeviceID 6 TNURAMSize 32 KB PortCount HostIinterface TPC ee DIZe Firmware Version Max Stripe Size 1 MB FW Package Version Virtual Drive Count Firmware Time l 0a Drive Count WebBIOS Version FIGURE K 6 Controller Properties window in the WebBIOS Remarks When the Home button is clicked it returns to the HOME window 10 When more than one MegaR
61. Removable components The following lists the components and component removal conditions Some components cannot be removed N A in all the condition columns below indicates components that are not removable TABLE 3 12 Component removal conditions Component name AC power AC power AC power on PSU on on on PSU on Target partition on PSU off Target partition off ancy a Na NA a CSC cru ieoa renove Reman orere a E Removable Removable Removable 3 Not removable IOB PCI PCI Expresscard card Removable Removable 4 7 7 Removable GSPB Removable Removable 3 Not removable SAS ISAS disk unit 5 o unit ee Removable Removable Removable Notremovable removable disk unit SAS SAS array controller card lt _ lt ISAS array controller card card MMBED 2 MMBC 2 Removable Removable Removable Removable DVD board o board 77 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal Component name AC power AC power AC power AC power on PSU on off on on PSU on Target partition on PSU off Target partition off Removable PCI_Box Removable Removable 3 Not removable PCI_ IO_PSU PCI Express PEXU d Removable Removable Removable Removable 4 7 car The component does not belong to any partition 2 CPU removal requires VRM removal for both the CPU core and the cac
62. Series Administration Manual APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions G 1 CPU This section describes the number of CPUs that can be mounted and the criteria for mixing different types of CPU Notes A single cabinet or partition cannot contain both a CPU belonging to the Intel Xeon 7500 series and a CPU belonging to the Intel Xeon E7 family A single cabinet can contain CPUs that have different frequencies cache sizes and numbers of cores A single partition can contain only completely identical CPUs which for example have the same frequency cache size number of cores power consumption QPI and scale When the hyper threading function of the CPU is enabled the number of CPUs recognized by the operating system is doubled The number of logical CPUs that can be installed in a partition depends on the operating system used i e Windows RHEL version and x64 x86 version When replacing CPUs even if the replacement CPU is of the same generation firmware update is required if the CPU version number is different You can set the x2APIC mode in the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 Set Enabled or Disabled for x2APIC mode according to the operating system If the operating system does not support x2APIC set Disable for x2APIC from the UEFI If the operating system supports x2APIC set Enable The following table shows which operating systems support x2APIC TABLE G 1 x2APIC support of each operating system PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 Windows Serv
63. TITO System SIRIUS CIS DIGY 2 205 cd esheets ee tes ee es Hales ele ele 269 FIGURE 11 11 System event log display ant ccssecsccceschsch cc senaleschecenete ccs aiian niinniin eaaa aeaaaee oaiae 270 FIGURE 11 12 Partition Contiguration WINGGWE siiis aiiin aaa 271 FIGURE 11 13 Parity Event Log Wie faces sce eis ais eh enened ceeeesthovetecc ensue deeeeastis eeenshse hese eapianideneensnnns 272 FIGURE T1142 Age nt Log WINGOW 2228s c cies case els iia eaa aeaa E aa tanec 272 FIGURE 11 15 System Event Log WANGOW cccccc6 2 ceccacsceh ccecteanaccaecegedeeseceeeneeadedsauecdendtesetepeeaaebdanteneueueebanss 279 FIGURE 11 16 System Event Log Filtering Condition WindOW 0 0 0 eeecceceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseaaeeenaas 280 FIGURE 11 17 System Event Log Detail window 00 2 eceeeeceeeeseceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeecaeeedeaaeeseaeeeeeaaeesseeeeseaaeeeaees 282 FIGURE T118 Agent Log WNGOW sce ces facepiece ccc eette i ast eeee dec daa aaa N a ao aa aaa ERAT Eaa 284 FIGURE 11 19 Startup and Recovery dialog bOX ssssssesssssssesssssssssrssssssesssnsssnnsosenssenesssesnssonnnesenssesnsesesnnene 288 FIGURE 11 20 Startup and Recovery dialog DOK nniecnienrieiiiiianniiiiiwe iiaii aa N i aaa 289 FIGURE 11 21 Advanced options dialog DOR ected ctes eee peesectbacee cece eaasis desenese vies dedesetsbobiaiedeatieatnves 291 FIGURE 11 22 Virtual Memory dialog DOR iiine iie inea aaa en aa anaiai 292 FIGURE 11 23 Advanced tabot the dialog BOX
64. VMware 5 Seg Bus Dev Func is displayed for Unit on the Partition Event Log window Example 0 0 25 0 For details on the method of identifying the Unit in this case contact the distributor where you purchased your product or your sales representative 271 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Model PRIMEQUEST 140082 Active MMB Part Number MCDIACIIIL Serial Number 1480917001 Status Normal gt System gt Parttion Event Log 20110324 eo Derice Software error MalFuxction Error 08 48 27 s0 aa 20110324 oe Software error MalFunction Error ro ee SS o e elxstor Device RaidPort2 Adapter er 20110324 7 f ror Severe Eror 00 vendor id lt 08 48 06 Partitions 1 lt Unknown gt VENDOR gt device id lt ADAPTNAME gt revis ion lt REVISION gt a is a a D a a D a a D a o D D o oa e o FIGURE 11 13 Partition Event Log window Arnve MAIB Diodot PRIMPQUEST 1900F Part Naber MCDSACLU Serial Number ser eo States Nae we od Parton Pacatcr 7254 gt Agere Leg Agent Log dnplsy Cetated reformation cick on the entry mum er ot DD copreseintelR PRO 1000 2 2010 01 13 FT Dus Port Server Adopter 620 aoa were bred vendo SL donne WAICEE even al IN express ial RI 225 Giph Dual Port Notaork GSP DOS CkLes 2 Sennection R Adapter errer EEPROM error verdor d S008
65. a PCI slot is shown at lt slot number gt location in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt Confirm that the PCI card in the slot is enabled or disabled by displaying the power file contents in this directory cat sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power When displayed 0 means disabled and 1 means enabled Powering on and off PCI slots You can power on and off a PCI slot through an operation on the file confirmed in Checking the power status of a PCI slot To disable a PCI card and make it ready for removal write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out cho 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power This operation concurrently removes the device associated with the relevant adapter from the system Note Be sure to manipulate the power supply from the operating system To enable the card again and make it available write 1 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the disabled slot cho 1 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power This operation concurrently installs the device associated with the relevant adapter on the system Note After power on you need to confirm that the card and driver are correctly installed The procedures vary depending on the card and driver specifications For the appropria
66. and make it available write 1 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the disabled slot echo 1 gt sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power This operation concurrently installs the device associated with the relevant adapter on the system Confirm the incorporation results Confirming the FC card incorporation results describes the confirmation method Start operation with the FC card again by restarting applications as needed or by other such means Confirm the incorporation results using Web UI of PSA For details on the confirmation procedure see How to confirm the FC card incorporation results using Web UI of PSA Perform the necessary post processing If you stopped the ServerView RAID service in step 1 restart the service by using the following procedure 105 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 sbin service aurad start If you stopped any other application in step 1 restart it too as needed Confirming the FC card incorporation results Confirm the incorporation results of the FC card and the corresponding driver in the following method Then take appropriate action Check the log The following example shows a log of FC card hot plugging As shown below the output of an FC card incorporation message and device found message as the log output to var log messages after the PCI s
67. and partition operation requires one or more available SBs and one or more available LIOBs or LGSPBs A partition may not satisfy the above requirements at certain times such as while configuration work is in progress You can neither power on nor operate a partition that has no SB or does not otherwise satisfy the requirements The SAS disk unit SAS array disk unit and PCI_Box are not essential requirements for a partition The following lists partition configuration rules TABLE 3 1 Partition configuration rules components SB LIOB LGSP 1 or more required 1 B SAS disk unit SAS array disk unit For details on the CPU mounting conditions see APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions The criteria for combinations of the SB LIOB and LGSPB are as follows For partition resources the LIOB and LGSPB can be selected However the LGSPB requires the availability of the IOB connected to the GSPB to which the LGSPB belongs For example if IOB 0 is available both LGSPB_OA and LGSPB_OB are available If IOB 0 is not mounted or degraded LGSPB_OA is unavailable even if it is mounted The LIOB can be connected to any SB There is no specific criteria on SB and LIOB combinations The LGSPB is independent in terms of partition granularity so there is no specific criteria on LIOB and LGSPB combinations A partition configured with more than one SB 2 or more SBs must use NTP If an SB failure causes SB degradation and the
68. are the same as those of the confirmation method in the FC card replacement procedure See Confirming the FC card incorporation results 9 Confirm the incorporation results using Web UI of PSA The confirmation procedure is the same as the procedure performed for the replacement of the FC card See How to confirm the FC card incorporation results using Web UI of PSA 2 4 Network card addition procedure NIC network card addition using hot plugging needs specific processing before and after PCI slot power on or power off Its procedure also includes the common PCI card addition procedure The procedure describes operations where a single NIC is configured as one interface It also describes cases where multiple NICs are bonded together to configure one interface bonding configuration Single NIC interface Bonding configuration interface MASTER SLAVE GILES interface FIGURE 5 6 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface NIC addition procedure This section describes the procedure for hot plugging only a network card Note When adding multiple NICs be sure to add them one by one If you do this with multiple cards at the same time the correct settings may not be made 1 Confirm that the PCI Hot Plug driver is installed Execute the Ismod command Confirm that the PCI Hot Plug driver module is installed sbin lsmod grep pciehp pciehp 206984 0 If not installed incorporate the PCI Hot Plug drive
69. as when the USB memory is open in Explorer etc remote storage does not recognize this terminal as a connectable device You may receive a STOP error message on a blue screen when using the remote storage function from your terminal The blue screen appears on the terminal under the following circumstances You are using the remote storage function from a terminal running one of the following Windows operating systems Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 R2 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 You are using two USB devices as remote storage devices This issue does not occur when only one USB device is used Example One of your remote storage devices is a USB device and the other is an iso image If your terminal is running Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 you can avoid this issue by applying the hotfix from KB 974711 For details see the Microsoft Knowledge Base If your terminal is running Windows XP Windows 7 Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 R2 or Windows Server 2008 R2 use only one USB device For more information related to Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 see the Microsoft Knowledge Base The following shows a diagram of the connection configuration for remote storage ICH10 USB 2 0 F A Processor j _ B gt i E Video memory Terminal gt USB Mass Storage emulation FI
70. can be set for a specific day Note The times recorded in the SEL may lag behind the scheduled operation times as described below 1 After a configuration check and preparation for startup the power on sequence may take a while to start In such cases the displayed SEL times may be six to eight seconds later than the scheduled operation times 2 The shutdown instruction from the MMB to the operating system is executed within a few seconds after the set time However the following times may vary depending on the setting configuration etc The time that the instruction from the MMB takes to reach the operating system The time from the start of the operating system shutdown to MMB notification of the shutdown start in the SEL 3 Even if the Power on Delay setting is 0 seconds the period from the start of the power on sequence to a reset may still range from 30 to 70 seconds For details on schedule settings see 1 3 2 Schedule menu in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 9 3 2 Powering off a partition by a scheduled operation Setting scheduled operations for a partition will turn off the power to the partition at a set time A daily weekly or monthly schedule can be set or a schedule can be set for a specific day For details on schedule settings see 1 3 2 Schedule menu in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 9 3 3 Relationship between scheduled operations and the power recovery
71. check box To make the setting in Windows the supplied Intel PROSet driver needs to have been installed 9 2 2 Partition power on unit The possible power on units depend on how a partition is powered on as shown below For details on operation permissions i e privileges for the partition power on operation see 1 1 Web UI Menus in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN TABLE 9 1 Power on method and unit Power on method Power on unit Power on unit Remarks All partitions Single partition 225 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control Power on method Power on unit Power on unit Remarks All partitions Single partition Wake On LAN WOL Not possible Possible Relevant partition units containing the GSPB 9 2 3 Powering off a partition The three partition power off methods are as follows 1 Shutdown from the operating system recommended Shut down the operating system by using an operating system command or other means Usually to power off a partition shut it down from the operating system For details on operating system shutdown commands and other information see the respective operating system manuals 2 Partition power off through MMB Web UI window or MMB CLI operations In this method you can power off a partition by operating the Web window of an external terminal or the MMB CLI These methods enabl
72. cold maintenance This section describes the procedures before and after expansion in cold maintenance Procedure before expansion 74 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal Stop all the partitions according to 8 1 2 Powering off a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN Procedure after expansion Start the necessary partition according to 8 1 1 Powering ona partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 3 4 3 Adding an internal solid state drive that uses a PCI slot This section describes the procedure for adding an internal solid state drive that uses a PCI slot a 785 GB 1 2 TB internal solid state drive Note Hot replacement of an internal solid state drive that uses a PCI slot is not supported Stop the partition before the addition In a RAID configuration Linux software RAID Windows software RAID 1 Power off the partition For details on powering off partitions see 8 1 2 Powering off a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 2 Add the PCI card 3 Power on the partition For details on powering on partitions see 8 1 1 Powering on a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 4 Make environmental settings for the added PCI card Remarks For details on the environmental settings see t
73. configuration 174 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Single NIC interface Bonding configuration interface MASTER SLAVE interface interface FIGURE 6 5 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface NIC removal procedure This section describes the procedure for hot plugging only a network card Note When removing multiple NICs be sure to remove them one by one If you do this with multiple cards at the same time the correct settings may not be made 1 Confirm the slot number of the PCI slot that has the mounted interface Confirm the interface mounting location through the configuration file information and the operating system information First confirm the bus address of the PCI slot that has the mounted interface to be removed ls l sys class net eth0 device lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 09 26 sys class net eth0 device gt 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 0 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Excluding the rest of the directory path check the part corresponding to the file name in the symbolic link destination file of the output results In the above example the underlined part shows the bus address 0000 0b 01 in the example Next check the PCI slot number for this bus address grep il 0000 0b 01 sys bus pci slots address sys bus pci slots
74. configuration to the bonding device Add the following to the etc modprobe conf file alias bondY bonding bondY Name of the new bonding interface to be added You can also specify an option for the bonding driver Activate the added interface Execute the following command to activate the interface Activate all the necessary interfaces The activation method depends on the configuration For a single NIC interface Execute the following command to activate the interface Activate all the necessary interfaces sbin ifup ethx For the bonding configuration To add the SLAVE interface when the bonding device is already installed you need to incorporate the SLAVE interface into the bonding interface and assign the correct interface name The ifup command for activating single NIC interfaces also has the capability to assign interface names according to the interface configuration file ifcfg ethX file However the ifenslave command for activating bonding interfaces does not have this capability Therefore add a SLAVE interface by using the following procedure Temporarily start and stop the NIC that was added as a single NIC interface Reconfigure it as a SLAVE interface Incorporate it into the bonding configuration First temporarily configure the SLAVE interface of bonding alone Comment out the lines MASTER SLAVE related to bonding in the contents of the configuration file created in step 9 The corresponding lines
75. daaa kani aaan 212 FIGURE 7 30 ETERNUS Multipath Manager wWiNdOW cccececeeceececceeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaaeeeseaaaeeeeeaeeeeees 213 FIGURE 7 31 TOPNP deletion Message co cssscdcccecc esses ctseccded aecesaceceeuessabctcccentesacnacensbanth cause ea eaaa eiaei 213 FIGURE 7 32 iSCSI Initiator Properties window in Windows Server 2008 cccceceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 214 FIGURE 7 33 iSCSI Initiator Properties window in Windows Server 2008 R2 cccssceeeeeseeeeeeetteeeeeees 215 FIGURE 7 34 ETERNUS Multipath Mana er cecciceldh eile n ne ieee eddies 216 FIGURE 8 1 Backup BIOS Configuration WINGOW 0 ccccccc sec cece cusses seteensedecocee cess cabsadaneesosccasetancteeesecuesteeee 219 FIGURE 8 2 Restore BIOS Configuration WihGOW osiers naa aaien 220 FIGURE 8 3 Restore BIOS Configuration window partition selection eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeeeeeees 220 FIGURE 8 4 Backup Restore MMB Configuration WINGOW cceceeeeeeeneeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeeseaaeeetaas 221 FIGURE 8 5 Restore conminnation dialog BOX 0 checsectecececesstcceeseessuesdenabeccdveedaseadacecedhaededecsennssdcensaneceteee 222 FIGURE 9 1 System Power Comto Window ascii eiiiai ai aaa aaia aie 224 FIGURE 9 2 Power Contoh WAN seo cosines ccsaces cgeeedhsals eceiea anaandaa iiaeaae einas iaaa iaid aaaeaii 228 FIGURE 93 Fower Control WANIOW 2 2 0 eee ceil cent stele eit aaa dee tle ieee tee eine
76. describes how to do so Describing a MAC address in the interface configuration file A MAC address is a unique six byte hardware specific address assigned to each NIC The interface configuration file is used to configure a network interface e g ethO This file is created in the etc sysconfig network scripts directory under the file name ifcfg interface name To fix a NIC interface name define the NIC hardware address MAC address in the interface configuration file Specifically describe the following line in the ifcfg interface name file HWADDR MAC address The following example assigns the eth0 interface name to the NIC where the MAC address is 00 0E 0C 70 C3 40 Interface names can be fixed only for the activated interfaces To fix an interface name when starting the system describe ONBOOT yes Example DEVICE eth0 Interface name BOOTPROTO static HWADDR 00 0E 0C 70 C3 40 Hardware address BROADCAST 192 168 16 255 IPADDR 192 168 16 1 NETMASK 255 255 255 0 NETWORK 192 168 16 0 ONBOOT yes TYPE Ethernet This file is automatically read when the interface is activated For this reason you need to describe the hardware address before the interface is activated You also need to describe the interface name before the interface is activated 119 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Lin
77. digit decimal values Here lt BUS number gt is information added to the slot number for descriptive purposes The operational target directory is defined uniquely with lt slot number gt To disable a slot and make it ready for the addition of a PCI card write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out echo 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power Note Be sure to manipulate the power supply from the operating system 5 Add the NIC to the PCI slot 6 Power on the PCI slot To enable a PCI card and make it ready for use write 1 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the slot to which the PCI card is added The interface ethX is added at the same time echo 1 gt sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power 127 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 7 Confirm the newly added interface name Powering on the slot creates an interface ethX for the added NIC Execute the following command Compare its results with those of step 2 to confirm the created interface name sbin ifconfig a Confirm the hardware address of the newly added interface Confirm the hardware address HWaddr of the created interface by executing the ifconfig command For a single NIC with multiple interfaces confirm the hardware
78. disable a PCI card and make it ready for removal write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out 146 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 echo 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power This operation concurrently removes the device associated with the relevant adapter from the system Note Be sure to manipulate the power supply from the operating system 4 Physically replace the target card 5 Reconfigure the peripheral according to its manual For example suppose that the storage device used is ETERNUS and that the host affinity function is used to set the access right for each server Their settings would need to be changed as a result of FC card replacement 6 Connect the FC card cable 7 Power on the PCI slot To enable the card again and make it available write 1 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the disabled slot echo 1 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power This operation concurrently installs the device associated with the relevant adapter on the system 8 Confirm the incorporation results Confirming the FC card incorporation results describes the confirmation method Start operation with the FC card again by restarting applications as needed or by other such means 9 Confirm the incorporation results using Web UI of PS
79. duplicated When the MMB detects an error in the MMB itself it switches the active MMB so that operations can continue When the active MMB is switched the virtual IP address is inherited by the MMB that becomes active Therefore the administrator does not to need to consider which MMB is active Because the MMB cannot recognize errors occurring in the path for accessing the MMB user port from the management LAN it is unable to recover from them by switching the active MMB Therefore two user ports of the management LAN are mounted on the MMB This redundant configuration enables recovery from management LAN errors The redundant configuration of the user port is disabled as standard and only user port 0 is enabled When the redundant configuration of the user port of the management LAN is enabled the NICs on both user port 0 and user port 1 are enabled These two NICs appear as one virtual interface from external devices because of the bonding function each MMB has a physical address and a MAC address The MMB monitors errors of the management LAN including connections to unit external switches and LAN cable disconnections When it detects an error it switches the duplicated NIC so that the monitoring operation which includes the Web UI operations can continue The values of the physical IP address and the MAC address of the MMB prior to switching are maintained 14 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual
80. ees Driver Version 0413A000 Driver Type BUS Configuration YES Diagnostics YES Manag jae criei LSI MegaRaid SAS Controller ChildT13B Logical Channel Child 13E Physical Channel FIGURE K 2 dh command in the UEFI shell 4 Execute the drvcfg s XX YY command Specify the following for XX and YY XX UEFI driver number confirmed in step 2 YY Controller number confirmed in step 3 Shell gt drvcfqg s 6A B4 5 In the menu displayed next select 1 370 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX K How to Confirm Firmware of SAS Array Controller Card Press 1 for EFI WebBIOS 2 for EFI CLI Or any other key to return 6 The WebBIOS starts and the Adapter Selection window appears The list of the mounted array controllers is displayed The Type column lists the array controller names More than one array controller may be mounted at the same time Adapter Selection siy s13 FIGURE K 3 Adapter Selection window in the WebBIOS 1 7 Use the Adapter No button to select the target array controller and click the Start button Adapter Selection A sis oye Firmware Version 1 12 542 FIGURE K 4 Adapter Selection window in the WebBIOS 2 8 The HOME window of WebBIOS appears To confirm the version number of the firmware of the array controller click Controller Properties or Adapter
81. error in the device For the front of the device 327 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX F Status Checks with LEDs Function supported in future Function supported in future System Identifies the device DVDB location For the front of the device Location ID Can be arbitrarily turned on set to blink or For locating DVDB turned off by the user The following table lists the LED indications for each status of the DVDB device However it shows only the LED indications to be noted for each status A blank space indicates that the LED can be on or blinking TABLE F 9 DVDB device status and LED display DVDB status device status The power to any partition is on lon greeny fs The MMB is being started Blinking f on oo Oo a E ae The MMB is in the Ready status A problem occurred in the device en The device is being located On or blinking F 1 7 MMB The MMB comes equipped with the Active LED and Ready LED The Active LED indicates the active MMB and the Ready LED indicates the MMB firmware status After the MMB firmware starts the active MMB turns on the Active LED The Ready LED blinks while MMB firmware startup is in progress The Ready LED stays on when the startup is completed TABLE F 10 MMB LEDs Ready Green Indicates the MMB status Synchronizes with the MMB Ready LED of the DVDB Indicates whether there is an error in the MMB Indicates wh
82. fan failure Displays the temperature of the temperature sensor in the 1 2 12 Temperature window system Displays the reaction response to a temperature error Displays and sets the SB x board 1 2 13 SB menu Displays and sets the IOB x board 1 2 14 IOB menu Displays and sets the GSPB x board 1 2 15 GSPB menu Displays and sets the status of SAS disk unit x 1 2 16 SASU menu 242 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 10 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures Function Displays the status of the PCI_Box connected to the system Displays the DVDB DVD board status Displays information related to the MMB Controls the partition power supply Sets a schedule for each partition Sets which partition to connect to the DVD Sets the SB IOB and GSPB that configure a partition Sets a Reserved SB Reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 1 2 17 PCI_Box menu 1 2 18 Other Boards menu 1 2 19 MMB menu 1 3 1 Power Control window 1 3 2 Schedule menu 1 3 3 DVD Switch window 1 3 4 Partition Configuration window 1 3 5 Reserved SB Configuration window Sets video redirection text console redirection and remote 1 3 6 Console Redirection Setup window Displays the partition status and various information related to the partition Sets conditions for automatically restarting the partiti
83. firewall File and Printer Sharing must be checked If the target Windows system is in the workgroup environment The user name and password of the management terminal must match those of the target Windows system If the target Windows system is in the Active Directory environment A user with Administrator privileges for the target Windows system must log in to the management terminal 9 6 2 How to use remote shutdown To perform a remote shutdown log in to the management terminal and enter the shutdown command shutdown s m lt Server Name gt In lt Server Name gt specify the computer name of the target Windows system For details on other options of the shutdown command see the help for the command Executing the shutdown command with the option displays the simplified help 238 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control C gt shutdown Usage shutdown i i l i s i Zh i Ze i Zo hybrid 7f m computer t xxx d piu xx yy 7c comment No args Display help This is the same as typing 7 Display help This is the same as not typing any options Zi Display the graphical user interface GUID This must be the first option 41 Log off This cannot be used with m or d options s Shutdown the computer r Full shutdown and restart the computer 7g Full shutdown and restart the computer After the system is rebooted
84. for the status of every unit 268 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 11 2 5 Investigating abnormal conditions Investigate trouble spots First check the component e g SB IOB and the partition where the problem occurred The corrective action varies depending on various factors including the location of the trouble spot error level and the system operation mode Finding out about a faulty component Investigate the entire system component configuration and the faulty component Select System System Status in the MMB menu window to display the window shown in the following figure You can find out the status of each component Medel PRIMFQUEST IO Arive AINED 3 Past Nusabex MCDSACIU FUJITSU Serial Nianber 8093400 Starer 2Syerm 2Syerm St System Status Rebesh Help Cack alri below to mew detale d efscmatee ado each wat B o 2 a o o La D o 9 o o o 9 a 3 FIGURE 11 10 System status display Click the icon displayed for an existing trouble spot to display a window showing the component status If Part Number or Serial Number the content or information area in the MMB Web UI window displays Read Error contact a field engineer or your sales representative You can view the component status and system event log contents by selecting System
85. function In the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series scheduled operations and the power recovery function operate jointly when power recovery mode is set to Schedule Sync TABLE 9 4 Relationship between scheduled operations and power recovery mode No Power failure Power recovery Always Off a On Restore Schedule time time Sync Outside During working OFF working hours hours 232 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control Power failure Power recovery Always Off Always On Restore Schedule time Sync During During working OFF ON working hours Outside Outside working OFF working hours During Outside working OFF working hours ON Partition power on OFF Partition power off Note Operations indicated by an asterisk in the table assume normal shutdown when a power failure occurs If an abnormal power off occurs because no UPS is used the partition will not be automatically started OFF mode operation irrespective of the power recovery operation settings 9 3 4 Scheduled operation support conditions TABLE 9 5 Power on off lists power on off items scheduled operation support conditions and menu items TABLE 9 5 Power on off All Partition Power On Not supported Powers on all partitions All Partition Power Off Not supported Powers off all the partitions that are powered on through an operat
86. function of the fjpciswap command 2 Confirm the added card by using the display function of the fjpciswap command 183 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows 7 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Cards This section describes the PCI card replacement procedure that does not involve additional steps e g when a redundant application is not used Note Insert the PCI card securely 2 1 Replacement procedure 1 Confirm the physical location by using the display function of the fjpciswap command C gt fjpciswap 1 Replaceable PCI cards are displayed UnitName Func DeviceName 1 PCIC FUNC Intel R PRO 1000 P7 L Port Server FUNC Intel R PRO 1000 P17 L Port Server 2 Replace the PCI card by using the swap function of the fjpciswap command C gt fjpciswap r IOB 1 PCIC 5 Selected card name is Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 15 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 16 Please delete all settings about this card Do you want to remove this card y n y User input When Do you want to remove this card y n appears press the y key Removing the card The card has removed Please replace the card and input y key When Please replace the card appears replace the PCI card L 184 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Se
87. in the following example are MASTER bondY and SLAVE YES DEVICE ethxX MASTER bondy SLAVE YES O NBOOT YES Omitted Execute the following command under the above described conditions sbin ifup ethX sbin ifdown ethX Now the correct name has been assigned 130 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Next edit the configuration file to restore the lines that were commented out The corresponding lines in the following example are MASTER bondY and SLAVE YES Omitted Finally execute the following command to incorporate the SLAVE interface into the bonding configuration Incorporate all the necessary interfaces into the bonding configuration sbin ifenslave bondY ethX To perform this operation for more than one interface execute the ifup command and the ifdown command in succession on all interfaces At this time the ifup command may fail to execute In such case skip the interface once and execute the ifup and ifdown commands on the other interfaces Then retry executing the ifup and ifdown commands again on the failed interface To add the bonding device together with SLAVE activate the interface by executing the following command In this case no individual operation is required for SLAVE sbin ifup bondy 5 2 5 Assigning a fixed interface name to
88. input on PSU on On orange Error at PSU PCI_Box IO_PSU Green AC off or 5V SB output stopped AC on or 5V SB being output mm E Home SB location IOB Power Green GSPB Power Green unit 334 C122 E108 10EN SAS disk unit SAS array disk unit power off On or Blinking On green PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX F Status Checks with LEDs SAS disk unit SAS array disk unit power on Alarm Orange SAS disk unit SAS array disk unit normal Error in SAS disk unit SAS array disk unit On or Blinking Component location Component location PCI_Box Power Green Location Blue ae PCI_Box IO_FAN Alarm Orange Error in IO_ FAN OR output of two IO_PSU CHECK LEDs If the CHECK LED of even one IO_PSU goes on the IO_PSU_CHECK LED goes on 335 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX F Status Checks with LEDs 336 C122 E108 10EN APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions This appendix describes the mounting conditions of components for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series OP cs E E E A 338 GA DIMM iranun n 340 G 3 PCI Card Mounting Conditions and Available Internal E E E E r EE 347 G 4 Legacy BIOS Compatibility CSM 0 0 2 348 G9 RICK MOUNINO ioeina asas 349 G 6 Installation Environment ccceeeesesssteeeeeeeessessnaees 350 G I SAS atray CUSK UMIT aaan 351 G 8 NIC Network Interface Card cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 352 PRIMEQUEST 1000
89. interfaces including the bonding device deactivate them collectively by executing the following command sbin ifdown bondyY 140 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 5 Power off the PCI slot Confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for the target slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the slot number confirmed in step 3 is shown at lt slot number gt in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt Note lt BUS number gt and lt slot number gt are both four digit decimal values Here lt BUS number gt is information added to the slot number for descriptive purposes The operational target directory is defined uniquely with lt slot number gt To disable a PCI card and make it ready for removal write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out The interface ethX is removed at the same time echo 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power 6 Remove the NIC from the PCI slot 7 Remove the interface configuration file rm etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg ethx When deleting a bonding device also delete the related bonding items 8 Remove the removed interface configuration from e
90. is installed Execute the lsmod command Confirm that the PCI Hot Plug driver module is installed sbin lsmod grep pciehp pciehp 206984 0 If not installed incorporate the PCI Hot Plug driver module into the system by executing the modprobe command 124 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 sbin modprobe pciehp 2 Confirm the slot number of the PCI slot by using the following procedure 1 Identify the mounting location of the PCI card to be added See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to check the mounting location board and slot of the PCI card to be added 2 Obtain the slot number of the mounting location Check the table in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers and obtain the slot number that is unique in the cabinet and assigned to the confirmed mounting location This slot number is identification information for operating the slot of the PCI card to be added 3 Power off the PCI slot Confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for the target slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the slot number confirmed in step 2 is shown at lt slot number gt in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt Note l
91. multiple NICs are bonded together to configure one interface bonding configuration Single NIC interface Bonding configuration interface MASTER SLAVE interface interface FIGURE 6 4 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface NIC addition procedure This section describes the procedure for hot plugging only a network card Note When adding multiple NICs be sure to add them one by one If you do this with multiple cards at the same time the correct settings may not be made 1 Confirm the existing interface names To confirm the interface names execute the following command Example eth0 is the only interface on the NIC sbin ifconfig a etho Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 0E 0C 70 C3 38 BROADCAST MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 1000 RXbytes 0 0 0 b TX bytes 0 0 0 b 167 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Link encap Local Loopback inet addr 127 0 0 1 Mask 255 0 0 0 UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MTU 16436 Metric 1 RX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 0 RXbytes 0 0 0 b TX bytes 0 0 0 b 2 Confirm the slot number of the PCI slot containing an interface by using the following procedure
92. number gt To disable a PCI card and make it ready for removal write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out The interface ethX is removed at the same time echo 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power 6 Save the interface configuration file Save all the interface configuration files that you checked in step 2 by executing the following command udevd and configuration scripts may reference the contents of files in etc sysconfig network scripts For this reason create a save directory and save these files to the directory so that udevd and the configuration scripts will not reference them 155 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 cd etc sysconfig network scripts mkdir temp mv ifcfg ethX temp following also executed for bonding configuration mv ifcfg bondx temp 7 Replace the NIC 8 Delete the entries associated with the replaced NIC from the udev function rule file Each entry for the new NIC is automatically added to the udev function rule file etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules when the NIC is detected However the entries of a NIC are not automatically deleted even if the NIC is removed Leaving the entries of the removed NIC may have the following impact The interface names defined in the entries of the removed NIC cannot be assigned to
93. of common replacement procedures for all PCI Cards 0 cccceecccseeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeetneeeees 100 5 1 2 PCI card replacement procedure in detail cccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeneeeeeseeeeeetaaeeeee 100 5 1 3 FC card Fibre Channel card replacement procedure ccccececeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeseseeeeetsaeeeeeeeees 103 5 1 4 Network card replacement procedure cccecescceeeecnceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaaeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeenaaeeeee 108 5 1 5 Assigning a fixed interface name to a NIC eecceccecteceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeteeeeeeeseaaeeeenaeeneees 119 5 1 6 Hot replacement procedure for iSCSI NIC eecceecceceeeeneeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeneeeeeeaaeeseaeeseeeeeeetaaeeeee 120 Be Hot Addition of Pil Cane schist tik nevi eieinil AE A E EN EEAS 122 5 2 1 Common addition procedures for all PCI Cards 0 cceeccececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeneeeseaeeeseeeeeteaeeeees 122 5 2 2 PGI card addition procedure in detail rerien ie iinan innia aiaa aiai 122 5 2 3 FC card Fibre Channel card addition procedure cccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeesecaeeeeeeeeees 124 5 24 Network card addition procedure cniciiriiininiuriasionaia niena iaa aa aaa inline cerns 126 5 2 5 Assigning a fixed interface name to a NIC sssssssssssssssssssssssssrrnsssrssrrtnsssnnnotnnssrtnssctnnoernnnnrnenssennsent 131 g3 Removing FOLCANIG aiian uan iea aa i aa ETE E EA Eiai 132 5 3 1 Common
94. or Windows Server 2008 R2 or later 4 Click the Targets tab in the iSCSI Initiator Properties window One of the targets displayed in Targets is connected to the NIC to be replaced If you know which target select the target click the Details button and proceed to step 8 If you do not know select any target click the Details button and proceed to step 5 201 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows iSCSI Initiator Properties xi Favorite Targets Volumes and Devices General Discovery To access storage devices for a target select the target and then dick Log on To see information about sessions connections and devices for a target dick Details Targets eternus2000 cm0 porti Connected eternus2000 cm1 port0 Connected FIGURE 7 17 iSCSI Initiator Properties window in Windows Server 2008 5 Click the Sessions tab in the Target Properties window and click the Connections button 202 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows Target Properties xi EE Devices Properties This target has the following sessions mf ff FFa800fF330 18 4000013700000005 Log off Refresh Session Properties Target portal group 2 Status To configure how the connections within this session are load balanced dick Connections FIGUR
95. output it indicates that the NIC is not mounted in a PCI slot e g GbE port in the GSPB With the PCI slot number confirmed here see D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers to check the mounting location and see also B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to identify the physical mounting location corresponding the PCI slot number You can confirm that it matches the mounting location of the operational target NIC If the NIC has multiple interfaces you need to remove all of them Confirm that all the interfaces that have the same bus address in a subsequent step Example ls l sys class net device grep 0000 0b 01 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 09 26 sys class net eth0 devic gt devices pci0000 00 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 09 26 sys class net ethl devic gt devices pci0000 00 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 1 As the above example shows when more than one interface is displayed they are on the same NIC If only one interface is displayed you can skip the rest of this step Proceed to step 4 Confirm the hardware address from the interface name managed by the operating system Example cat sys class net eth1l address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 41 139 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5
96. partition that consists of multiple SBs a Reserved SB with only two mounted CPUs can be set For a partition that consists of multiple SBs only the SB that has the same CPU mounting conditions as the partition can be set as a Reserved SB 1 For a partition that consists of multiple SBs only the SB that has the same DIMM mounting conditions as the partition can be set as a Reserved SB 1 2 1 Supported for SA11061and SB11062 or later For SA11051 and SB11061 and earlier even when a partition that consists of one SB only the SB that has the same CPU mounting conditions or DIMM mounting conditions as the partition can be set as the Reserved SB for the partition 2 An SB that cannot use the Memory Mirror function can be set as a Reserved SB for a partition that uses the Memory Mirror function Notes on Windows At the first startup after an SB is switched to the Reserved SB in a partition running Windows the operating system may not start Set Windows to automatically restart in the settings of the Reserved SB in the partition running Windows For details on the settings see 11 4 4 Setting up the dump environment Windows in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual C122 E108EN Check the Automatically restart check box shown in FIGURE 11 19 Startup and Recovery dialog box If the SB failure causes a suspension of business for the aforementioned reason take into account the length of time required for the restart The
97. partition would have to be stopped for maintenance PRIMECLUSTER linkage is disabled For operation in Linux do not change the output destination of the system log from var log messages If it is changed the following restrictions apply T O e g PCI card HDD error notification and trap notification to the administrator are disabled Notification about exceeded thresholds in M A R T monitoring of HDDs is disabled Even under an REMCS agreement no hardware or software errors are reported Setting example In RHELS etc syslog conf has the following default setting Do not change the file name var log messages info mail none news none authpriv none cron none var log messages Do not stop the Windows Printer Spooler service while Windows is running For hardware configuration management PSA uses WMI Windows Management Instrumentation to collect information from the operating system If the Print Spooler service is not running WMI reports an error and does not collect the information Operations management GUI The GUI consists of the Web UI functions for problem monitoring and configuration management on the partition side PSA on each partition is linked with the MMB firmware so even if the partition does not have the Web server function PSA enables display and operation of the partition from the MMB Web UI The MMB firmware has a CGI Common Gateway Interface WebGate CGI for interacting with the Web server
98. point P P system using a line such as ISDN line 11 1 8 REMCS linkage This function reports resource information or problems in a partition to the REMCS Center in linkage with the MMB REMCS Agent reports error information log information and other information of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series system to the REMCS Center via the Internet or P P connection REMCS Agent of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series consists of the MMB firmware as well as PSA on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E or SVS on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 and SIRMS installed in each partition As the REMCS linkage in the figure shows the MMB firmware monitors the entire system for problems and reports them to the REMCS Center when it detects them PSA on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E or SVS on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 notifies the REMCS Center of hardware problem information and hardware configuration information detected by the operating system in the partition via the MMB firmware It also reports the software configuration information and software problem information detected by SIRMS to the REMCS Center via the MMB firmware For details on REMCS see the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series REMCS Installation Manual C122 E120EN 261 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures PRIMEQUEST 1000 series B bso REMCS Agent Partition x REMCS Center MMB firmware Linux Windows Management LAN
99. prevent users and bystanders from being injured and to prevent property damage This indicates a hazardous situation that is likely to result in death or serious personal injury if the user does not perform the procedure correctly This indicates a hazardous situation that could result in minor or moderate personal injury if the user does not perform the procedure correctly This also indicates that damage to the product or other property may occur if the user does not perform the procedure correctly Important This indicates information that could help the user use the product more efficiently Alert messages in the text viii C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Preface An alert statement follows an alert symbol An alert statement is indented on both ends to distinguish it from regular text Similarly one space line is inserted before and after the alert statement AWARNING Only Fujitsu certified service engineers should perform the following tasks on this product and the options provided by Fujitsu Customers must not perform these tasks under any circumstances Otherwise electric shock injury or fire may result Newly installing or moving equipment Removing the front rear and side covers Installing and removing built in options Connecting and disconnecting external interface cables Maintenance repair and periodic diagnosis and maintenance The List of important alert items
100. procedure Overview of event monitoring linkage Event monitoring linkage enables the reporting of event alarms monitored and logged by PSA to the operations management server in linkage with the Systemwalker agent Only the event alarms recognized by Systemwalker itself are reported An event filtering definition is simple to include An event filtering definition provided for each model Systemwalker template see TABLE J 1 Files and tools to prepare For details on how to include this template see the Systemwalker manual To change part of a Systemwalker template definition change the event monitoring criteria definition The setting procedure is described below For details on message definition contents see the Filtering Definition Manual that comes with the event filtering definition Modification procedure for event monitoring linkage Use the following procedure to define filtering for event logs stored by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server 1 In Systemwalker Console select the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series node to add a filtering definition to it 2 Select Policy Distribute Policy Event Node from the menu bar The Event Monitoring Criteria Definition dialog box appears 366 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX J Systemwalker Centric Manager Linkage 3 While the event to change is selected select Event Update Event The Event Definition dialog box appears 4 Change
101. reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN TABLE 10 5 Menus provided by the UEFI Function Reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Displays menus for migration to boot processing Boot 5 2 Boot Manager Front Page Manager Device Manager and Boot Maintenance Manager Sends processing into automatic operating system startup 5 3 Continue Menu and performs boot processing in the currently set boot sequence Sets the boot devices 5 4 Boot Manager Menu Makes settings such as whether to assign an I O space to 5 5 Device Manager Menu each I O device CPU settings and whether to enable PXE boot Makes settings such as addition and deletion of boot 5 6 Boot Maintenance Manager Menu options and boot priority changes 248 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 10 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures 10 6 ServerView Suite You can use ServerView Suite to visually confirm the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series configuration and the status of each part For details on how to operate ServerView see the ServerView Suite ServerView Operations Manager Server Management 249 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 10 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures 250 C122 E108 10EN CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Conte
102. removal procedures for all PCI Cards ccceceeccesceeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaeeeceaaeeeeaaeeseeaeeeeaaeeneneees 132 5 3 2 PGI card removal procedure ih detail eniinn aie heicl silent ccedeteelcgaeseeentieeeses 132 5 3 3 FC card Fibre Channel card removal procedure ceeccceceeneeeeeeceeeeaeeseeneeeeeaaeeeseeeeesaaeeeseneeee 135 5 3 4 Network card removal ProCe Cure ccecceececceceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeeeaaaeseaaeesdeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaaeeeea 137 CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise LINUX 6 o ccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeenenees 143 eT Hot Replacomen Ot FOl CR a ie Seen Os ana iE a a Ea a aiaia 144 6 1 1 Overview of common replacement procedures for all PCI Cards ssssoseeessseessosnnneseessssnnnnsssenssens 144 6 1 2 PCI card replacement procedure in detail cceecsceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeetseeeeeeeaaeeneea 144 6 1 3 FC card Fibre Channel card replacement procedure cccccceceeeceeeeeceteeeeeeeeeaaeseeeeeeetaaeeeneeeeees 146 6 1 4 Network card replacement procedure cccccecceeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseneeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeesneneaeeseeennennsaaees 150 6 1 5 Hot replacement procedure for SGSI NIC icccceccccevs steeve dian tetecie vets gecedee ces aaao ainaka aa aKa 161 ee POT Addition PC i ninian ae a E a EA E Ea A EENS 164 6 2 1 Common addilion proced res tor all PC Garde arosi iaisnirnansian anii adrenka vcetesaseeenevseeaercneesbigs
103. restart will take twice as long since one restart is needed after the switching to the Reserved SB and one restart for the subsequent initial startup However the following workaround can suppress the restart request Workaround for the Windows restart You can suppress the restart request only if the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server has already set as the Reserved SB Repeat the following procedure for all the partitions with Windows Server OS installed Note that no message requesting a restart is displayed on the screen even if an SB failure occurs during switching to the Reserved SB 49 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal 1 After completing installation of the Windows Server OS shut down the partition 2 Remove the SB from the partition by using the MMB Web UL If the partition has multiple SBs mounted you can remove any SB For details see Removing an SB IOB or GSPB in 3 4 1 Setting a partition configuration in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 3 Add an SB as the Reserved SB to the partition For details see Adding an SB IOB and GSPB in 3 4 1 Setting a partition configuration in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 4 Power on the partition Then start the Windows Server OS 5 Log in with Administrator privilege After the message that the system must be restarted is displaye
104. return to the iSCSI Initiator Properties window shown in step 4 8 If no IP address in step 6 matches select the next target and repeat the steps after step 4 Otherwise click the Devices button 210 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows Targets Discovery Favorite Targets Volumes and Devices RADIUS Configuration OO OOOO To discover and log on to a target using a basic connection type the IP address or DNS name of the target and then dick Quick Connect Target Quick Gonnect r Discovered targets Refresh eternus2000 cm0 porti Connected eternus2000 cm1 port0 Connected To connect using advanced options select a target and then Connect dick Connect To completely disconnect a target select the target and Disconnect then dick Disconnect _ For target properties including configuration of sessions Properties select the target and dick Properties _ For configuration of devices associated with a target select the target and then dick Devices hes More about basic iSCSI connections and targets ee e j e FIGURE 7 28 iSCSI Initiator Properties window in Windows Server 2008 R2 9 Record the values displayed in the Address column in the Devices window Port 2 Bus 0 Target 0 LUN 0 in this example 211 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual
105. settings Also confirm that the storage can be correctly viewed from LUNO Eliminate the problem Then confirm the settings and recognize the system by using the following procedure 1 Confirm the host number of the incorporated FC card from the message at a 148 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 XX in scsixx Xx is a numerical value in the message at a is a host number In the above example the host number is 10 2 Scan the device by executing the following command gt sys class scsi_host hostxx scan is command prompt xx in hostxx is the host number entered in step 1 The command for the above example is as follows echo _ gt sys class scsi_host host10 scan 3 Confirm that a message like c was output to var log messages If this message is not displayed confirm the settings again Note In specific releases of RHEL a message like a for confirming FC card incorporation may be output in the following format with card name information omitted scsil0 on PCI bus Of device 08 irq 59 In this case check for the relevant message on the FC card incorporation by using the following procedure 1 Confirm the host number XX in scsixx xx is a numerical value in the message is a host number In the above example the host number is 10 2 Check whether the following file exist
106. ssiinrorsviisiinscieisniisneorianinianiaineissindandinnierinadianai innreda 293 FIGURE 11 24 Virtual Memory dialog DOK 2 0 0 secant eens debetich esthetician a 294 FIGURE B 1 Physical mounting locations in the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 1800E sesssscessseesserrnserrese 312 FIGURE B 2 Physical mounting locations m the PCI Box ccu die ete ieee ates 312 FIGURE B3 PES GL MINS iaeiei aieeaa aiaa aai aaia iiaa ia DE aaie ii 313 FIGURE B A MMB port DUMDEFS ceccesvtclcceeedistaldtaclevneiet eeebied detente ec oe des eee ne de 313 FIGURE F 1 LED mounting locations on components equipped with LAN ports ccececseeeeeeetteeeeeeeees 331 FIGURE F2 MMB LED mounting locaton 2 ccc cudnt ele a leeea dines 331 FIGURE F3 System LED mounting lOCAOIIS usec cece cas ccececeneca se acess dase Meawensad dsaiedesdbeceaedeesdantsanteneeeceedatan 331 FIGURE Fa PO Bex LED mounting loCatgNE iid hee nti nie ee ee eel 331 FIGURE A T MIB tree St riie dice esse cuid acca sbean hat wen daca eainnt iadi iaa latent cdevauenetaeuccaandagededidnsastea 355 FIGURE K 1 drivers command in the UEF Shell scccii s neti envi etna iterates 370 FIGURE K 2dh command inthe VEF shell oo cccits cceccsscctececeensdhecvedeced sect ceddanceavneedetasata eae sedes dewisideeesnaiensde 370 FIGURE K 3 Adapter Selection window in the WebBIOS 1 ccccceeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeescaaeeeeeeaeeeesaas 371 FIGURE K 4 Adapter Selection window in the WebBIOS 2 eeeccceeee
107. state of the operating Power Cycle 2 system Does not perform any power operation Power button pressed SEL is Press Power Button 2 recorded Reset 2 Forcibly performs a reset irrespective of the state of the operating system Pulse NMI 2 Issues an NMI Sends a reboot request to ServerView Agent Graceful Reboot 2 If ServerView Agent has not been installed the request does not result in a reboot Sends a shutdown request to ServerView Agent Graceful Shutdown 2 If ServerView Agent has not been installed the request does not result in a shutdown Japanese Sets the menu display to Japanese Sets the color depth number of colors If the communication speed is low set 3bpp Low Bandwidth 2 None No change 3bpp 8 colors 8bpp 256 colors Internal TCP Port 2 Sets the TCP port used for remote storage 24 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation A menu title with a hyphen indicates that it is a submenu item The hyphen is not actually displayed 2 The display has been updated in SA11081 or later and SB11071 or later The following lists the buttons available in the Video Redirection window TABLE 1 9 Video Redirection window buttons Mouse Sync Aligns the mouse pointer positions on the PC and partition Ctrl Functions in the same way as the Ctrl key Alt Functions in
108. table lists important alert items Product operating environment This product is a computer intended for use in a computer room environment For details on the product operating environment see the following manual PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Hardware Installation Manual C122 H0O04EN Note If you have a comment or request regarding this manual or if you find any part of this manual unclear please take a moment to share it with us by filling in the form at the following webpage stating your points specifically and sending the form to us https www s fujitsu com global contact computing PRMQST_feedback html The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice The PDF file of this manual is intended for display using Adobe Reader in single page viewing mode at 100 zoom The PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 1800E model supports only 200 V power supply Trademarks Microsoft Windows and Windows Server are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Red Hat the Shadowman logo and JBoss are registered trademarks of Red Hat Inc in the U S and other countries Intel and Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Co Ltd in Japan and is a registered trademark of Xerox Corp in the United States and other countries VMware is a trademark or regis
109. tdi aaepieiivinest 261 TEZ THROU BIS MOOT oreren eaae che raa eaaa aTa a aa 263 TLS Troubleshooting DVEIMIEW ocne rniii ea ea aa a E AA EE aN EEA aai 263 11 2 2 Items to confirm before contacting a sales representative cceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeecaaeeeeeteeeteeenees 265 11 23 Sales representative CONTACT occ sce dered Alec ea ica AEA AE aiid 265 11 2 4 Finding out about abnormal conditione 2 20 6 c ccieceteccsadieccececauscstdeeeesabanceeededeediesdadenenseesseeenentes 265 11 25 Investigating abnormal conditions einiino ninani ia aaaea aaa aai ian 269 xvii C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Contents TL26 Checking mo ercors Moeta orriren ck eves daaessatanedssae dathcesetaedaeasaieeUlideedestedAiecedeaecs 273 11 2 7 Problems related to the main unit or a PCI BOX uo cece eceesceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseceseeessesseseeeseeneeeseeees 273 11 2 8 MMB rela ted problems cic cocks sstceeet cates eeeeetadeacteeesadedanelceesiensegeceeedednnsdedlniessaslacieaslideaaoeeasaneas 274 1129 PSR ated proble ME ana aaa aa a aaa a a aa EN aiia ENEE eases 274 11 2 10 Svmeorelated PRODIE IIS n iriicrnrnienrnnniadiviriaani ianiai iaae anaa 275 11 211 Problems wiih parition Operations c 2 c ccd ieee aeieeetesetindiethaeiendacesendiarietse 275 TLS Noteson Troubleshooting oes fect sisce hd fez ecaea yeedes eho in tenee a eanne iaa a aaan 277 114 Collecting Mantehane Data csi cccts teehee adit Aiea add alesis a aA 278 11
110. the replacement NIC or an added NIC For this reason delete or comment out the entries of the removed NIC from the udev function rule file 1 Confirm the correspondence between the interface name and hardware address in the table created in step 2 2 Edit the udev function rule file etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules to delete or comment out the entry lines of all the interface names and hardware addresses confirmed in the above step 1 The following example shows editing of the udev function rule file Example of descriptions in the file before editing PCI device O0x 0x e1000 SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS ATTR address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 38 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME eth0o PCI device O0x 0x e1000 SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS ATTR address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 39 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME eth1 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Example of descriptions in the file after editing In the example ethO was deleted and eth is commented out PCI device Ox 0x e1000 SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS 156 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 10 11 ATTR address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 39 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth
111. the PCI card removal procedure with the PCI Hot Plug function The procedure includes common steps for all PCI cards and the additional steps required for a specific card function or driver Thus the descriptions cover both the common operations required for all cards e g power supply operations and the specific procedures required for certain types of card For details on removal of the cards not described in this section see the respective product manuals 6 3 1 Common removal procedures for all PCI cards 1 Performing the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI card type 2 Confirming that the PCI slot power is off See Powering off a PCI slot 3 Removing a PCI card 4 Performing the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI card type Note This section describes instructions for the operating system and subsystems e g commands configuration file editing Be sure to refer to the respective product manuals to confirm the command syntax and impact on the system before performing tasks with those instructions The following sections describe card removal with the required instructions e g commands configuration file editing for the operating system and subsystems together with the actual hardware operations 6 3 2 PCI card removal procedure in detail This section describes operations that must be performed in the PCI card removal procedure Preparing the sof
112. the SLAVE interfaces but the MASTER interface itself remains However even if you have a MASTER interface with no SLAVE interface continue operation as is because there will be no operational problems The bonding interface will be completely removed at the next system startup Execute the higher level application processing required after NIC removal Perform the necessary post processing such as changing application settings or restarting an application for the operations performed for the higher level applications in step 3 179 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 180 C122 E108 10EN CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows This chapter describes the hot plugging procedure for PCI cards in Windows Hot plugging is supported only in Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2012 This procedure is only for the PRIMEQUEST 1800E For the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 contact the distributor where you purchased your product or your sales representative 7 1 Overview of Hot Maintenance ccceecsseeeseeeeees 182 7 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Cards 184 Ta NIG Hot PG UR soe ca cst cececveeeteetnavstaseteeesteieeisareneantie 187 TA FCO Gard Hot PIUQQUIO ecesna iiaeiai 195 7 5 Hot Replacement Procedure for iSCSI 006 200 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in
113. the operating system 5 Physically remove the target card 6 Perform the necessary post processing 136 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 If you stopped the ServerView RAID service in step 1 restart the service by using the following procedure sbin service aurad start If you stopped any other application in step 1 restart it too as needed 3 4 Network card removal procedure NIC network card removal using hot plugging needs specific processing before and after PCI slot power on or power off Its procedure also includes the common PCI card removal procedure The procedure describes operations where a single NIC is configured as one interface It also describes cases where multiple NICs are bonded together to configure one interface bonding configuration Single NIC interface Bonding configuration interface MASTER SLAVE Tal ele interface FIGURE 5 7 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface NIC removal procedure This section describes the procedure for hot plugging only a network card Note When removing multiple NICs be sure to remove them one by one If you do this with multiple cards at the same time the correct settings may not be made 1 Make the necessary preparations If the ServerView RAID service is running temporarily stop the service by using the following procedure 1 Log in as the sy
114. the same bus addresses before and after the NIC replacement 4 In the table created in step 11 enter values corresponding to the interface names before and after the NIC replacement TABLE 6 4 Example of entered values corresponding to the interface names before and after NIC replacement Interface name After replacement Hardware address Bus address Slot number gt Before replacement eth gt eth0 00 0e 0c 70 c3 40 0000 0b 01 0 eth0 gt eth1 00 0e 0c 70 c3 41 0000 0b 01 1 If an interface name is switched before and after the NIC replacement make the interface name correspond to the same bus address as before the NIC replacement by using the following procedure Note Confirm that the interface name is the same before and after the NIC replacement Then proceed to step 15 1 Power off the PCI slot again 158 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Repeat the process done in step 5 to power off the PCI slot echo 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power 2 Correct the interface name that is not the same before and after the NIC replacement in the entries of the udev function rule file etc edev rules d 70 persistent net rules Make the interface name the same as before the NIC replacement Example of descriptions in the file before editing PCI device O0x 0x e1000 SUBSYSTEM net ACT
115. them 347 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions G 4 Legacy BIOS Compatibility CSM The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series uses the UEFI which is firmware that provides the BIOS emulation function Currently the following legacy BIOS restrictions are known Option ROM area restriction The number of PXE enabled cards that can operate as boot devices is restricted to four I O space restriction In a legacy BIOS environment I O space is required on a boot device Note In a CSM environment I O space must be allocated to a boot device 348 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions G 5 Rack Mounting For details on installation in a 19 inch rack see the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Hardware Installation Manual C122 HO04EN 349 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions G 6 Installation Environment For details on the environmental conditions for PRIMEQUEST 1000 series installations see the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Hardware Installation Manual C122 HO04EN 350 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions G 7 SAS array disk unit This section provides notes on using the SAS array disk unit Note When starting the WebBIOS of the RAID controller with an SAS array disk unit you cannot us
116. to be removed has the Mirror configuration in PRIMECLUSTER GDS If the hard disk to be removed has the Mirror configuration in PRIMECLUSTER GDS From PRIMECLUSTER GDS select the disk to be removed and remove it For details on the removal procedure see the PRIMECLUSTER GDS manual If the hard disk to be removed does not have the Mirror configuration in PRIMECLUSTER GDS Unmount all the disk partitions mounted on the disk to be removed umount dev sdcl umount dev sdc2 Remarks You need not unmount any partition operating as a raw or swap device However the removal of devices requires changes to the raw and swap device settings 3 Use the disk management command to stop the disk rotation Execute the disk management command to perform the following processes Stop the disk rotation The Fault LED amber goes on Instruct the operating system to remove the target disk opt FISVpsa bin diskctrl e dev sdc 4 Remove the hard disk at the location indicated by the Fault LED amber that is on When an internal hard disk is removed the Fault LED behind its slot goes on The Fault LED goes on or blinks until it is turned off by the disk management command or the partition is powered off or rebooted 89 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks Note If there is an SSD removing the SSD may output the W13139 message from FJSVpsa to the system event log
117. website http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest download e 3 Delete the serial number of the PCI card from preallocate_memory in etc modprobe d iomemory vsl conf Note 68 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal Before replacing the PCI card delete the serial number of the faulty PCI card from preallocate_memory in etc modprobe d iomemory vsl conf For details see the ioMemory Product Family User Guide Linux for Driver Release x x x x x x is the version number at the following website http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest download e 4 Power off the partition For details on powering off partitions see 8 1 2 Powering off a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 5 Replace the faulty PCI card 6 Power on the partition For details on powering on partitions see 8 1 1 Powering on a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 7 Format the replacement PCI card Use the following procedure 1 fio detach Disconnecting the device from the operating system 2 fio format Low level formatting of the device Remarks If the device is used as a swap device the formatting must have a 4K sector size 3 fio attach Making the device available on the operating system Example fio detach dev fct0 Example fio format b 4K dev fct0
118. window Backing up MMB configuration information 1 Click the Backup button The browser dialog box for selecting the save destination appears 2 Select the save destination path Then click the OK button Download of the file begins The default MMB Configuration file name for the backup is as follows MMB save date _ MMB version dat Restoring MMB configuration information 1 Confirm that the system has stopped completely 2 Select the backup MMB Configuration file stored on the Remote PC Then click the Restore button File transfer to the MMB begins A restore confirmation dialog box appears when the file transfer is completed 221 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 8 Backup and Restore Windows Internet Explorer xi MMB Configuration File Information SavedDate 2010 03 02 iii MMB Version 1 19 Cancel FIGURE 8 5 Restore confirmation dialog box 3 To restore MMB configuration information click the OK button To cancel restoration click the Cancel button 8 1 3 Saving PSA management information For details on how to save PSA management information see 6 8 1 Saving PSA management information in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN Remarks This function is provided only with the PRIMEQUEST 1800E 222 C122 E108 10EN CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control This chapter describes how to start and shut do
119. 0 3 seconds Confirm the hard disk location Then with the hard disk selected in the tree view select Stop location from the right click menu to turn off the Alarm LED With the hard disk selected in the tree view select Make Offline from the right click menu to turn on the Alarm LED Confirm that Status for the target hard disk is Failed Offline or Available A field engineer performs steps 10 to 12 as the hard disk recovery procedure Confirm that the Alarm LED of the hard disk on the main unit is on Replace the hard disk whose Alarm LED is on In the MMB Web UI open the PSA window for the partition Select PCI Devices from the left menu The window displays Error or Warning at Status for the array controller card that manages the faulty hard disk Select the card Then click the Status Clear button After replacing the hard disk confirm that hard disk replacement was completed properly by using the following steps depending on whether the disk is a spare disk If not set as a spare disk ServerView RAID Manager automatically performs a rebuild Then the Alarm LED of the hard disk starts blinking Wait until the rebuild is complete in the ServerView RAID Manager window Confirm that Status for the hard disk is Operational If set as a spare disk The replacement hard disk automatically becomes a spare disk Then the Alarm LED of the hard disk goes out In the ServerView RAID Manage
120. 0 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX J Systemwalker Centric Manager Linkage Process overview Define conversion to convert SNMP traps from the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server into messages that can be read and understood by the monitoring operator Converted message text is displayed on the Systemwalker console Remarks To ensure that converted text can be identified as a message from the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server the keyword PRIMEQUEST is embedded in the text Example A SNMP trap from the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server is converted and displayed PRIMEQUEST FileServer E 14002 SB O DIMM 0A0 DIMM Uncorrectable ECC Part no 0x0101 Serial no 5023 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Note that to receive SNMP traps the operations management server must be registered as the SNMP trap destination in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server For details on how to set an SNMP trap destination see the following manuals 7 5 2 Configuring SNMP in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 1 5 6 SNMP Configuration menu in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN SNMP trap linkage procedure 1 Place the prepared TrapMSG conversion definition file described in TABLE J 1 Files and tools to prepare in a directory on the operations management server 2 Execute the prepared SNMP trap conversion definition application command desc
121. 00 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 3 Click the Mouse Sync button in the Video Redirection window to synchronize the mouse pointer If the mouse pointer is not synchronized correctly adjust the slider on Select a pointer speed For RHELS Execute the following command gt xset m 0 0 Notes If the server screen has a resolution of 800 x 600 it may not display part of the window output by video redirection or it may display after images of the mouse pointer only when Linux is installed When Windows key is used to minimize the video redirection window the Windows key remains pressed on the partition side In such case when the video redirection window is opened again the Ctrl Alt Del key combination may not work or a command entry may not be available To release Window key press Window key once while the video redirection window is open While the video redirection is being used a warning message indicating that the digital signature is expired may be displayed Since this warning message does not affect the operation of Java Application click the Execute button To avoid displaying this waning message every time the video redirection is connected check the check box for Always trust content from this publisher and click the Execute button Network communication problems between the terminal and PRIMEQUEST may cause a session interruption resulting
122. 000 series server cannot be connected to an FDD floppy disk for backup restore or other such operations To use an FDD connect it to a remote PC or another server connected to the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server This section describes the backup and restore operations for UEFI configuration information and MMB configuration information For details on the backup and restore windows see Chapter 1 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 8 1 1 Backing up and restoring UEFI configuration information Users can perform the following processes with the backup and restore functions for UEFI configuration information Backing up all items that are set in the UEFI window Backing up the specified UEFI configuration information in a UEFI window for one partition from the MMB This backup information can be applied to other partitions Restoring backed up UEFI configuration information during replacement of a faulty SB Restoring and copying the configuration information saved on a certain partition to another partition A remote terminal can store the saved information The data saved to the remote terminal can be restored From the Backup BIOS Configuration window of the MMB Web UI back up UEFI configuration information to the PC running your browser The procedure is as follows 218 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 8 Backup and Resto
123. 004de2c6f436fF 0x4000000001000000 0x4000000000000000 0x0100000000000000 0x0000000013000000 0x0000000000000000 0x0000000004a30000 0x204008001b000000 Ox80fc8 6800000000 0x0000000000000000 0x0000000000000000 0x0000000000000000 0x0000000000000000 0x0000000000000000 0x0000000000000000 s FIGURE 11 17 System Event Log Detail window 2 Click the button of the chosen operation Back button The display returns to the System Event Log window Previous button The window displays the previous event according to the display order in the System Event Log window Note that the order of events displayed in the System Event Log window is not the actual order of stored events in the SEL Next button The window displays the next event according to the display order in the System Event Log window TABLE 11 9 Setting and display items in the System Event Log Detail window Displays the severity of the event or error Error Serious problem such as a hardware failure Warning Event that is not necessarily serious but is a potential problem in the future Info Event such as a partition power on reported for informational purposes Date Time Displays the local time of occurrence of the event or error Format YY YY MM DD HH MM SS Displays the name of the sensor indicating the occurrence of the event or error Unit Displays the unit whose sensor indicated the occurrence of an event or error For example
124. 0EN APPENDIX J Systemwalker Centric Manager Linkage This appendix describes linkage with Systemwalker Centric Manager J 1 Preparation for Systemwalker Centric Manager Linkage gis ces E toes Sueveniy E T T 362 J 2 Configuring Systemwalker Centric Manager linkage 363 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX J Systemwalker Centric Manager Linkage J 1 Preparation for Systemwalker Centric Manager Linkage Systemwalker Centric Manager is an application for intensive system and network management according to the life cycle of system deployment This section describes preparation for configuration of monitoring by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server in linkage with Systemwalker Centric Manager referred to below as Systemwalker Prepare the following files and tools in advance TABLE J 1 Files and tools to prepare Extended MIB file DVD ROM disk supplied with SVSLocalTools Japanese PS A MMB ComTrap MIB txt mmbComtTrap cnf Execute the command on the Windows operations conversion definition directory management server 1 application command Execute the command on the Linux Solaris operations management server 2 Menu registration Systemwalker installation install dir mpwalker dm bin mpaplreg exe command directory Execute the command on an operations management client 3 Filtering definition Systemwalker technical template information 4 1 Execute the command on the Window
125. 1 Identify the mounting location of the PCI card to be added See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to check the mounting location board and slot of the PCI card to be added 2 Obtain the slot number of the mounting location Check the table in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers and obtain the slot number that is unique in the cabinet and assigned to the confirmed mounting location This slot number is identification information for operating the slot of the PCI card to be added Note The four digit decimal numbers shown in lt Slot number gt in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers have the leading digits filled with zeros The actual slot numbers do not include the zeros in the leading digits 3 Power off the PCI slot Confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for the target slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the slot number confirmed in step 2 is shown at lt slot number gt in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt To disable a slot and make it ready for the addition of a PCI card write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out echo 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power Note Be sure to manipulate the power suppl
126. 1 you will need to restart it after the hot maintenance of a hard disk is completed Start the smartd service by using the following operation sbin service smartd start 87 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks 4 2 Adding Removing and Replacing Hard Disks This section describes procedures using the disk management command to add remove and replace hard disks These descriptions use a SASU internal hard disk as an example In the device names displayed by the disk management command iocx represents a SGPIO controller and dev sdx represents a hard disk 4 2 1 Addition procedure Add a hard disk by using the following procedure 1 Insert the hard disk into an empty SASU slot 2 Confirm the location of the inserted hard disk by displaying the status with the disk management command opt FISVpsa bin diskctrl 1 ioc0 0 dev sda Faul ED Off 1 dev sdb Faul ED Off 3 dev sdc Faul ED Off dev sdd Faul ED Off Shortly after you insert the hard disk the disk becomes accessible Identify the slot that has the inserted hard disk in the next step 3 Cause the Fault LED to blink by executing the location display function of the disk management command opt FISVpsa bin diskctrl i ioc0 1 4 Check whether the Fault LED of the slot that has the inserted hard disk is blinking When the slot location is correct confirm that Fa
127. 1 a Example with two SBs set as Reserved SBs in two partitions SB 0 and SB 1 fail S Is 1a c 2 021 e eae eee ener errr nce er reE ree ner ree Teer rere rc rer eee eer er errr reer errre rece rere ere errr reer rere 52 FIGURE 3 6 Example 1 b Example with one SB set as the Reserved SB in two partitions SB 0 and SB 2 fail BMA MANNA ee ence eee saueck cone va sae ve he veipoee up ca na aucire os dane autstwes O S 52 FIGURE 3 7 Example 2 Example of multiple SBs failing in a partition 0 eee ce ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaees 52 FIGURE 3 8 Example 3 Example with multiple free SBs 2 and 3 set as Reserved SBs for Partition 0 53 FIGURE 3 9 Example 4 Example where the Reserved SBs 0 1 and 2 for Partition 0 belong to other E T o ccs ea ceed cnt A E E E A A E R AE V A A E A 53 FIGURE 3 10 Example 5 Example where the Reserved SBs 1 2 and 3 for Partition 0 belong to other PUNO ns A A E A A A Y A E E E A A 54 FIGURE 3 11 Example 6 Example with SB 0 set as a Reserved SB when the Home SB fails 0 000000000 55 FIGURE 3 12 Example 7 Example with SB 0 set as a Reserved SB when an SB other than the Home SB fails E A uns shapadsuayandesausnnybadcpaateebs omsaccauel souedusdensaqcqadaii hacen gccuayhanaccsu t daswsqdenastardeqaciebnense 55 FIGURE 3 13 Mirroring within CPU and Mirroring between CPUS o eee eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeeeeaees 59 FIGURE 5 1 Fibre Channel window example cccccccesscesenecec
128. 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Checking the power status of a PCI slot Using the PCI slot number confirmed in Confirming the slot number of a PCI slot confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for this slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the PCI slot number confirmed in Confirming the slot number of a PCI slot is shown at lt slot number gt location in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt Confirm that the PCI card in the slot is enabled or disabled by displaying the power file contents in this directory cat sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power When displayed 0 means disabled and 1 means enabled Powering on and off PCI slots You can power on and off a PCI slot through an operation on the file confirmed in Checking the power status of a PCI slot To disable a slot and make it ready for the addition of a PCI card write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out cho 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power ote Z Be sure to manipulate the power supply from the operating system After the PCI card is added to the target slot to enable the target slot and make it ready for use write 1 to the power file in the dire
129. 2 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Remarks If Part Number or Serial Number the content or information area in the MMB Web UI window displays Read Error contact a field engineer or your sales representative Before making contact confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the main unit LED display The following figure shows the LEDs located on the front panel of the device The Alarm LED indicates a problem inside the device If a problem occurs inside the device the Alarm LED goes on orange The Alarm LED stays off when the device is operating normally y power Alarm css Location MMB Read 1 PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 1800E FIGURE 11 7 Alarm LED on the front panel of the device As long as a problem remains inside the device the Alarm LED is on This indication does not change even if multiple problems have occurred Note that the front panel of the device also has the MMB Ready LED The MMB Ready LED stays on in green when the device is operating normally To start the MMB select System MMB on the Web UI when the MMB Ready LED is off Select Enable in Enable Disable MMB in the MMB window Then click the Apply button MMB Web UI window As shown in the following figure you can use the MMB Web UI window to check for any problems
130. 2 N A N A Z 1C3 N A N A N A N A N A N A 1D1 N A N A 1D2 N A 1D3 N A The figure in the column header is the number of DIMMs mounted on the SB N A Not applicable TABLE G 13 DIMM mounting pattern 4 DIMM slot number 16 24 32 4 4 345 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions DIMM slot number 16 24 32 N A mE The figure in the column header is the number of DIMMs mounted on the SB N A Not applicable 346 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions G 3 PCI Card Mounting Conditions and Available Internal I O This section describes the PCI card mounting criteria and available internal I O ports in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server Remarks Up to 16 devices can be allocated to the I O space Note that the PCI Express switch occupies one PCI to PCI bridge per slot For details on I O space allocation see 5 5 Device Manager Menu in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN G 3 1 Available internal I O ports The following table lists the number of available internal I O ports TABLE G 14 Available internal I O ports and the quantities Internal I O Remarks USB Home SB only SAS disk unit Internal HDD 4 SAS array disk unit GSPB The internal I O ports are hidden behind the front bezel Remove the front bezel to access
131. 20 address Read the output file path as shown below and confirm the PCI slot number sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt address Notes If the above file path is not output it indicates that the NIC is not mounted in a PCI slot e g GbE port in the GSPB 175 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 With the PCI slot number confirmed here see D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers to check the mounting location and see also B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to identify the physical mounting location corresponding to the PCI slot number You can confirm that it matches the mounting location of the operational target NIC 2 Confirm each interface on the same NIC If the NIC has multiple interfaces you need to remove all of them Confirm that all the interfaces that have the same bus address in a subsequent command t ls l sys class net device grep 0000 0b 01 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 09 26 sys class net eth0O device gt 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 09 26 sys class net eth1 device gt 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 1 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed As the above example shows when more than one interface is displayed they are on the same NIC 3 Execute t
132. 332 TABLE G 1 x2APIC support of each operating system PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeees 338 TABLE G 2 Numbers of SBs and CPUs per partition ccc c ac eves cuetieseeccteee tates daieneeuiecesdndeeeeeeeee 339 TABLE G 3 Relationship between DIMM size and mutual operability within an SB ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeerees 340 TABLE G 4 Relationship between DIMM size and mutual operability within a partition eee 340 TABLE G 5 Relationship between DIMM size and mutual operability within a cabinet ceeeeeeeees 341 TABLE G6 Identical DIMI Gres cciiecesctenseccce ited ep diatieeoteinh ds evs iaa a a aeaeaie 341 TABLE G 7 Mounting sequence of DIMMs where a single CPU is mounted on an SB sassen 342 TABLE G 8 Mounting sequence of DIMMs where two CPUs are mounted on an SB oseese 342 TABLE G9 DIMM mounting pat t 2 cccccesscc cc dceceetes cae eeseseasacesecsaczeausthncsdnect ov ssdeeataususedealivnevsezesaalad daueshaanees 342 TABLE S10 DIMM MOUNINO PANEM T scien ei haiti altel neonate dias 343 TABLE GTi DIMM Iieuinting Pattennt 2 2 ccceccseccceceecscbaicdenepeacencheneeeddecdaeesdasdecatanheesciessueedenstsdeeesdectedaunce 343 TABLE G12 DIMM mounino AGRI roisia aa Ea a oaia aaa aiai 344 TABLE G 13 DIMM mounting paten 4 ooec ccc cece ceisece cece scesscdeeeeacesecteceeddaeecnenscuadasiadsedeadasiabnegdecussennendecunnsies 345 TABLE G 14 Available internal I O ports and the quantities eeccceeecce
133. 4 Example where the Reserved SBs 0 1 and 2 for Partition 0 belong to other partitions 33 Example 5 Example where the Reserved SBs 1 2 and 3 for Partition 0 belong to other partitions 54 Example 6 Example with SB 0 set as a Reserved SB when the Home SB fails 00 csscescccsesececesssstecssrecseesessees 33 Example 7 Example with SB 0 set as a Reserved SB when an SB other than the Home SB fails cccceseeeeeees aS Example of entered values corresponding to the interface names before and after NIC replacement 0 00 158 Example of interface information about the replacement NIC 157 Example of operation where the SB in a test partition is a Reserved S Ba sirge iee aeaeaei Example of single NIC interface eeseeeeeeeeeee e 120 162 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Index Examples of partition configurations in the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 1800E insesi ee aaia 46 Expandability of components and addition conditions pe Explanation of partition status transitions cee 83 External MMB interfaces c cccsceesesteceteeeeeeeeeeeees 317 External Network Configuration ccesceseeeeeeeeeseereees 2 External network configuration seseeeesseesereeeseseesereeeeee 2 External network fUnctions ccccceeseceseeerseeereeeeeeeeees 3 External network names and functions cesce
134. 5 2 Hot Addition of POI Cards 06 ccc ceeceeecteeesceeees 122 5 3 Removing PCI Cards 0cccccececsseecessessccnsteecuenenee 132 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 5 1 Hot Replacement of PCI Cards This section describes the following methods of PCI card replacement with the PCI Hot Plug function Common replacement operations for all PCI cards such as power supply operations Specific operations added to procedures to use a specified card function or a driver for installation Remarks For details on the card replacement procedures not described in this chapter see the respective product manuals 1 1 Overview of common replacement procedures for all PCI cards This section provides an overview of common replacement procedures for all PCI cards Performing the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI card type Confirming the installation of the Hot Plug driver See Stopping the ServerView RAID service Powering off a PCI slot See Powering on and off PCI slots Replacing a PCI card Powering on a PCI slot See Powering on and off PCI slots Nn FW NY Performing the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI card type Note This chapter provides instructions e g commands configuration file editing for the operating system and subsystems Be sure to refer to the respective p
135. A For details on the confirmation procedure see How to confirm the FC card incorporation results using Web UI of PSA 10 Perform the necessary post processing If you stopped any other application in step 1 restart it too as needed Confirming the FC card incorporation results Confirm the incorporation results of the FC card and the corresponding driver in the following method Then take appropriate action 1 Check the log The following example shows a log of FC card hot plugging As shown below the output of an FC card incorporation message and device found message as the log output to var log messages after the PCI slot containing the mounted FC card is enabled means that the FC card was successfully incorporated 147 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 scsil0 Emulex LPel250 F8 8Gb PCIe Fibre Channel Adapter on PCI bus Of device 08 irq 59 a lpfc 0000 0d 00 0 0 1303 Link Up Event xl received Data xl x0 x10 x0 x0 x0 0 b scsi 2 0 0 0 Direct Access FUJITSU E4000 0000 PQ 1 ANSI 5 Teabe The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed If only the message in a is displayed but the next line is not displayed or if the message in a is not displayed the FC card replacement itself was unsuccessful See Note below In this case power off the slot once Then check the following po
136. AID SAS array controller is mounted at the same time click Controller Selection or Adapter Selection in the HOME window Then return to step 7 to confirm the firmware version of other MegaRAID SAS array controller with the same steps 372 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX K How to Confirm Firmware of SAS Array Controller Card K 2 How to confirm with ServerView RAID This section explains how to confirm the version with ServerView RAID Remarks The screens in the following procedure are examples The contents of the displayed screen such as a version number may be different from the contents of the actual screen 1 Start the system and log in to the OS 2 Start the ServiewView RAID Manager connect it to the target server and log in The account to be used for the login can be either administrator authority or user authority 3 From the tree view select the target array controller 4 The firmware version number is displayed in the General tab in the object window right pane in the window The part to be referred varies with the used array being used Check the part for the selected array controller Array controller El Rxso0ss aH LSI MegaRAID SAS 8880EM2 a HB LSI MegaRAID SAS 8344ELP 1 FTS RAID 5 6 SAS based on LSI MegaRAID S E SAS Port SEAGATE ST3146855SS 0 S AJE SAS Port 1 SEAGATE ST3146855SS 1 Vendor Fujitsu Technology S
137. APPENDIX J Systemwalker Centric Manager Linkage 1 Move from the Policy menu to the Distribute Policy window Select Apply Immediately Then click the OK button Remarks When the TestTrap function is used to confirm trap reception in the MMB Web UI the Test Trap message will appear on the Systemwalker console screen In this case the target MMB node enters the problem status on the console screen Return it to the normal status by using the following procedure 1 Select the TestTrap message in the event display portion of the Systemwalker console screen 2 Select Handle Monitor Event from the right click menu Then click Handle 3 Confirm that the target MMB node on the Systemwalker console screen returned to the normal status If modifying the filtering definition to output Info level messages Panic Stop Error see the following manual Systemwalker manual User s guide to the monitoring functions To display the TestTrap message on the console screen the event filtering definition described in J 2 3 Event monitoring linkage must be applied in advance For details on the TestTrap function see the following manuals 7 5 2 Configuring SNMP in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 1 5 6 SNMP Configuration menu in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 2 3 Event monitoring linkage This section provides an overview of event monitoring linkage and describes its modification
138. APTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 11 2 8 MMB related problems This section describes MMB related problems and how to correct the problems No connection to the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server can be established using the Web Ul Cause 1 The setting of the IP address subnet mask or gateway is wrong Corrective action Referring to 3 3 3 Setting up the connection environment for actual operation in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN set the correct value Cause 2 A failure occurred in the network between the MMB console PC and the MMB USER port Corrective action Replace the faulty network device or LAN cable Cause 3 A problem occurred in the internal network e g internal hub of the MMB Corrective action Switch the active MMB by using the following procedure 1 Log in to the standby MMB via telnet ssh 2 Execute the set active_mmb command to switch the active MMB For details on the set active_mmb command see 2 2 10 set active_mmb in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN The MMB windows do not appear Cause 1 The MMB LAN port is not enabled Corrective action Enable the LAN port Cause 2 The MMB console PC is not correctly connected to the MMB USER port Corrective action Connect them correctly Cause 3 The browser version is not supported Corrective action The MMB supports the following browsers Microsoft Internet E
139. B 342 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions SB No mirroring Pattern 3 Mirroring Pattern 4 The following tables list details of each pattern patterns 1 to 4 Each of the letters W X Y and Z in the table represents an identical DIMM The same type of DIMM must be mounted at locations with the same letter Either an identical DIMM or different DIMM can be mounted at a location with a different letter TABLE G 10 DIMM mounting pattern 1 The figure in the column header is the number of DIMMs mounted on the SB N A Not applicable TABLE G 11 DIMM mounting pattern 2 DIMM slot number 16 343 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions DIMM slot number 16 OA1 0A2 0A3 OBO OBI OB2 0B3 oco 0C1 0C2 The figure in the column header is the number of DIMMs mounted on the SB N A Not applicable TABLE G 12 DIMM mounting pattern 3 OAO OA1 0A2 0A3 OBO OBI OB2 OB3 oco 0C1 0C2 344 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions OD1 N A N A N A 0D3 N A N A N A N A N A 1Al N A N A N A N A 1A2 N A N A Z SOOO RRR NA 143 N A N A N A N A N A N A 1B0 Y Y Y Y 1B1 N A N A N A N A 1B2 N A N A Z 1B3 N A N A N A N A N A N A 1C0 Y Y Y Y 1C1 N A N A N A N A 1C
140. B device For this reason the DVD drive must be disconnected from all partitions before replacement oa 3 3 Replacement procedures in hot maintenance This section describes the procedures before and after replacement in hot maintenance Procedure before replacement Stop the relevant partition according to 8 1 2 Powering off a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN Procedure after replacement See 8 1 1 Powering on a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN eo 3 4 Replacement procedures in cold maintenance This section describes the procedures before and after replacement in cold maintenance Procedure before replacement Stop all partitions Procedure after replacement Start the relevant partition e KES Replacing the battery backup unit of an array controller card This section describes the procedure for replacing the BBU battery backup unit on an array controller card The array controller card BBU should be replaced regularly RAS Support Service monitors its life cycle RAS Support Service provides life cycle monitoring and sends messages for the following notification TABLE 3 6 Replacement notification messages of RAS Support Service BBU Start time for sending messages for advance notification of Message sending time for replacement replacement notification After about 2 years from the start of use or replacement of the After a
141. CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation To set up the management LAN in a redundant configuration select Network Configuration Network Interface from the MMB Web UI and then set Enable for Dualization of Maintenance LAN For details on how to set it up see 1 5 2 Network Interface window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN For the redundant configuration of the management LAN on the partition side duplicate the NIC by teaming with Linux Bonding driver GLS or Intel PROSet When the MMB is duplicated but the management LAN user port of the MMB is not duplicated if an error occurs on the management LAN MMB access is disabled Because the MMB does not recognize its error it does not automatically switch the active MMB and the virtual IP address of the MMB cannot be switched to the available MMB In such cases the active MMB must be switched manually The procedure is described below When MMB 0 is active and MMB 1 is standby an error occurs during an attempt by the management LAN to access the user port on the MMB O side and MMB 0 access is disabled 1 Connect to the physical IP address of the management LAN user port on MMB 1 with telnet ssh 2 Execute the following commend on MMB 1 and switch the active MMB to MMB 1 gt set active_mmb 1 3 The virtual IP address of the MMB is switched to MMB 1 and access is enabled with the virtual IP address 15 C122 E108 10EN P
142. CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows Port 2 Bus 0 Target 0 LUN 0 Volume path names E Legacy device name PhysicalDrive1 mpiosdisk amp ven_fujitsu amp prod_e2000 amp rev_000041 2 Configure Multipath IO MPIO To configure the MPIO policy for a selected device dick MPIO MPIO Device interface name Information On iSCSI Device Details FIGURE 7 29 Devices window 0 2 Disconnecting MPD This section describes the procedure for disconnecting MPD 1 Start ETERNUS Multipath Manager 2 Confirm the address value recorded in step 9 in 7 5 1 Confirming the incorporation of a card with MPD Then place the target device offline For a multifunction card it is necessary to place more than one device offline 212 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows ETERNUS Multipath Manager Ot x File Tools Help Fault list 0 Status Machine name Unit name S 10G Disk Number 2nd Path ard Path E2000 E205L40 001458 LUNO Disk1 Actie Standby SCSPort2 Bus0 TareetD 0 CAD 01 SCSPort2 Bus TargetID 1 CAD 02 SOLUS Auto Path CheckON Auto Path Recovery ON FIGURE 7 30 ETERNUS Multipath Manager window 3 Referring to 7 3 NIC Hot Plugging replace the NIC Remarks The error message Source FJSVpsa ID 25004 may be output to the event log during the rep
143. Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 The ifup command for activating single NIC interfaces also has the capability to assign interface names according to the interface configuration file ifcfg ethX file However the ifenslave command for activating bonding interfaces does not have this capability Therefore add a SLAVE interface by using the following procedure Temporarily start and stop the NIC that was added as a single NIC interface Reconfigure it as a SLAVE interface Incorporate it into the bonding configuration First temporarily configure the SLAVE interface of bonding alone Comment out the lines MASTER SLAVE related to bonding in the contents of the configuration file created in step 15 The corresponding lines in the following example are MASTER bondY and SLAVE YES EVICE ethX ASTER bondy SLAVE YES ONBOOT YES Omitted Execute the following command under the above described conditions sbin ifup ethx sbin ifdown ethX Now the correct name has been assigned Next edit the configuration file to restore the lines that were commented out The corresponding lines in the following example are MASTER bondY and SLAVE YES D E ethX M ER bondY S O ES NBOOT YES Omitted Finally execute the following command to incorporate the SLAVE interface into the bonding configuration Incorporate all the necessary interfaces in
144. Confirm the interface name that has this hardware address Example grep il 00 0e 0c 70 c3 41 etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg eth etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg ethl The above operations enable you to confirm that the interface existing on the same NIC as eth0 is eth 4 Deactivate the NIC Execute the following command to deactivate all the interfaces that you confirmed in step 3 The applicable command depends on whether the target interface is a single NIC interface or the SLAVE interface of a bonding device For a single NIC interface sbin ifdown ethX If the single NIC interface has a VLAN device you also need to remove the VLAN interface Perform the following operations sbin ifdown ethxX Y sbin vconfig rem ethX Y For the interface under bonding Confirm that the SLAVE interface is the interface currently being used for communication cat sys class net bondY bonding active_slave If the displayed interface matches the SLAVE interface being replaced execute the following command to switch the current communication interface to another SLAVE interface sbin ifenslave c bondY ethzZ ethZ bondY configured interface not subject to hot replacement Finally remove the SLAVE interface being replaced from the bonding configuration Immediately after being removed the interface is automatically no longer used sbin ifenslave d bondY ethX To remove the
145. E 7 18 Target Properties window 6 The Source Portal column in the Session Connections window displays IP addresses Check whether any IP address matches that recorded in step 2 If an IP address matches 192 168 3 150 in this example this is the target connected to the device to be replaced 203 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows Session Connections Ei xi Connections Load balance policy Round Robin z Description The round robin policy attempts to evenly distribute incoming requests to all processing paths This session has the following connections f192 168 3 150 9409 192 168 3 100 3260 Connected Active n a FIGURE 7 19 Session Connections window 7 If no IP address in step 6 matches repeat steps as follows 1 Click the Cancel button to return to the Target Properties window shown in step 5 2 Click the Cancel button again to return to the iSCSI Initiator Properties window shown in step 4 3 Select the next target and repeat the steps after step 4 If an IP address matches click the Cancel button to return to the Target Properties window shown in step 5 and proceed to step 8 8 Click the Devices tab in the Target Properties window and click the Advanced button 204 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows sessions DEW JPr
146. EF 0C 70 C3 40 Confirm the interface name that has this hardware address It is the name managed by the operating system Example grep il 00 0F 0C 70 C3 40 sys class net address sys class net eth0 address Now you have the interface name managed by the operating system Next confirm the bus address of the PCI slot that has this mounted interface Example ls 1l sys class net eth0 devic lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 09 26 sys class net eth0 devic devices pci0000 00 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 0 138 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Excluding the rest of the directory path check the part corresponding to the file name in the symbolic link destination file of the output results In the above example the underlined part shows the bus address 0000 0b 01 in the example Check the PCI slot number for this bus address Example grep il 0000 0b 01 sys bus pci slots address sys bus pci slots 0023_0020 address Read the output file path as shown below and confirm the PCI slot number sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt address Notes lt BUS number gt and lt slot number gt are both four digit decimal values Here lt BUS number gt is information added to the slot number for descriptive purposes If the above file path is not
147. EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 2 The existing file is overwritten by default You can change this setting to not overwrite the dump file However unlike the minimum memory dump no new dump file would be created in such cases Notes Be sure to reserve enough free space on the hard disk before acquiring a memory dump Select the optimum settings for system operation by taking the following into account The causes of some problems may not be identified because kernel memory dumps do not record user mode information The time taken to create a complete memory dump is proportional to the memory size and the down time before a system restart is longer Also the saved dump file requires more free disk space No dump files can be stored at the iSCSI connection destination during internal disk boot and SAN FC boot Memory dump configuration methods The methods of configuring memory dumps are described below lt For Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 2008 2008 R2 gt Configuring a complete memory dump You cannot configure a complete memory dump from the dump setting window of the system You need to change the following registry value to enable complete memory dumps HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE System CurrentControlSet Control CrashControl CrashDumpEnabled Type REG_DWORD Data 0x1 After changing the registry restart the system For detai
148. EQUEST 1000 series use the Fujitsu contact line Fujitsu contact line We accept Web inquiries For details visit our website https www s fujitsu com global contact computing PRMQST_feedback html Warranty If a component failure occurs during the warranty period we will repair it free of charge in accordance with the terms of the warranty agreement For details see the warranty Before requesting a repair If a problem occurs with the product confirm the problem by referring to 11 2 Troubleshooting in this manual If the error recurs contact your sales representative or a field engineer Confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the right front of the device and report it Also check any other required items beforehand according to 11 2 Troubleshooting The system settings saved by the customer will be used during maintenance Revision History 2 Incorporated differences in Errata and 0 2010 03 12 All pages Addenda C122 E119 01EN xiii C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Preface Incorporated differences in Errata and 2010 08 20 All pages Addenda C122 E119 02EN to C122 E119 10EN Added items about 1800E2 Incorporated differences in 04 2011 04 28 All pages Errata and Addenda C122 E119 11EN to C122 E119 18EN 07 10 Incorporated differences in Errata and 05 2011 05 31 All pages Addenda C122 E119 19EN Incorporated differences in Errata and
149. GURE 1 22 Connection configuration for remote storage To recognize and display the devices that can be connected remotely select Remote Storage from the Remote Storage menu in the Video Redirection window To recognize CD drives and DVD drives as devices that can be connected remotely the drives must already have media inserted in them 37 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation Bi Storace Devices Device Type Connect Remove FIGURE 1 23 Window with a remote storage list The following lists the buttons available in the remote storage list window TABLE 1 13 Buttons available in the remote storage list window Adds an ISO image file as a remote storage target The selected ISO image file will be recognized as a CD or DVD on the partition Connect Disconnect Connects the selected device to the server or disconnects it from the server Clears the selection of a device selected as a remote storage target If the selected device is connected with the server this button is grayed out and inoperable To disconnect the device and enable the button click the Disconnect button Scans and detects devices on the local machine again Remarks When the Video Redirection window closes all devices are disconnected from the server Also the devices are removed from the list Click the Add button to display the Add Storage
150. Home SB does not change Example 7 54 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal SB 3 SB 0 SBH1 SB 2 Partition 0 R p CHOME WU ol Ltt 1 __ Oi O Partition 0 Description 1 Switching to SB 0 or SB 2 in the configuration of Partition 0 Since SB 0 has the lowest number it becomes the Home SB FIGURE 3 11 Example 6 Example with SB 0 set as a Reserved SB when the Home SB fails SB 0 SB 1 Partition 0 R SB 2 SB 3 otio K o Lu Partition 0 O Description 1 An SB other than the Home SB fails The Home SB does not change FIGURE 3 12 Example 7 Example with SB 0 set as a Reserved SB when an SB other than the Home SB fails Switching policy The conditions triggers for switching to a Reserved SB are as follows The actual timing for switching to the Reserved SB is when the partition is started The descriptions here are conditions triggers for switching to a Reserved SB at the partition start time SB degradation CPU degradation including degradation of one CPU DIMM degradation including degradation of one pair of DIMMs Detection of a Memory Mirror collapse Detection of QPI lane degradation Detection of SMI lane switchover 55 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and
151. I error log Power control and factor information Network setting and log MMB operation log login record Firmware version Mounting unit information Partition configuration and setting Sensor information Various firmware log dumps PSA collected log PRIMEQUEST 1800E only Agent Log Syslog Configuration information Component Replacement target Replacement target we Paras Replacement target component indicated by SEL or LED component indication Hot Plug PCI card HDD 302 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series FRU management FRU management FRU information management for FRU management target components Serial No part No product name etc System information management and backup by FRU Log management Log collection Log collection and generation management by MMB Firmware Version display Overall version display management Firmware update Batch firmware update in Web UI CLI Version matching between SBs by MMB UEFI BMC SB version confirmation at power off Configuration i ee _ Configuration setting i 3 setting information Save and restoration of MMB UEFI REMCS information information save and restore management Maintenance i Component replacement procedure instructions on Web UI Maintenance wizard guidance used only by field engineer Failure cause Internal log trace MMB BMC
152. IN MIB txt Linux MIB information such as Linux operating system information PSA WIN MIB txt Windows MIB information such as Windows operating system information SA PSA ComTrap Monitoring Linux P MIB information for MIB txt Windows monitoring S M A R T events RAID battery life PSA SV AgentsTrap Linux MIB information for MIB txt Windows monitoring ServerView Agent events JX40 related only PSA Linux MIB information for LinIntelE1000Trap monitoring LAN card events MIB txt PSA Linux LinIntelE1000ETrap MIB txt PSA LinIntellgbTrap Linux MIB txt 356 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX H Tree Structure of the MIB Provided with the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Description Partition x A Information MIB file Purpose operating source system PSA LinIntelixgbeTrap MIB txt PSA LinEmulexTrap MIB txt PSA LinLsiLogicTrap MIB txt PSA LinScsiComTrap MIB txt PSA LinGrmpdTrap MIB txt PSA LinGdsTrap MIB txt PSA LinGlsTrap MIB txt PSA LinSvsRaidTrap MIB txt PSA WinIntelE1000expTra p MIB txt PSA WinIntelelexpressTra p MIB txt PSA WinIntelixgbnTrap MIB txt PSA WinEmulexTrap MIB txt PSA WinLsiLogicTrap MIB txt 357 MIB information for monitoring FC card events MIB information for monitoring SAS card events MIB information for monitoring SAS device disk tape unit etc events MIB information for monitorin
153. ION add DRIVERS ATTR address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 40 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME eth1 PCI device Ox 0x e1000 SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS ATTR address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 41 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAMI The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Example of descriptions in the file after editing eth1 the name after replacement has been corrected to ethO the name before replacement PCI device 0x 0x e1000 UBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS TTR address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 40 ATTR type 1 ERNEL eth NAME eth0 S A K PCI device 0x 0x e1000 S A K UBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS TTR address 00 0e 0cC 70 c3 41 ATTR type 1 ERNEL eth NAME ethi1 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed 3 Reflect the edited rules again Repeat the process done in step 9 to reflect the rules udevadm control reload rules 159 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 Power on the PCI slot Repeat the process done in step 10 to power on the PCI slot echo 1 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power The interfaces created for the replacement NIC may
154. L POWER SUPPLY CORDS VOLTAGE SERVICE ENGINEER BEFORE SERVICE TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK ONLY TOUCH THE INSIDE EXCEPT FOR ACTIVE MAINTENANCE ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Preface Notes on Handling the Product Adding optional products For stable operation of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server use only a Fujitsu certified optional product as an added option Note that the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server is not guaranteed to operate with any optional product not certified by Fujitsu Maintenance AWARNING Only Fujitsu certified service engineers should perform the following tasks on this product and the options provided by Fujitsu Customers must not perform these tasks under any circumstances Otherwise electric shock injury or fire may result Newly installing or moving equipment Removing the front rear and side covers Installing and removing built in options Connecting and disconnecting external interface cables Maintenance repair and periodic diagnosis and maintenance ACAUTION Only Fujitsu certified service engineers should perform the following tasks on this product and the options provided by Fujitsu Customers must not perform these tasks under any circumstances Otherwise product failure may result Unpacking an optional Fujitsu product such as an optional adapter delivered to the customer Modifying or recycling the pro
155. LE G 3 Relationship between DIMM size and mutual operability within an SB Supported Supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported Not supported 16 GB Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported 32 GB Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported TABLE G 4 Relationship between DIMM size and mutual operability within a partition Supported Supported Not supported Not supported Not supported 340 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions Supported Supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported Not supported 16 GB Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported 32 GB Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported TABLE G 5 Relationship between DIMM size and mutual operability within a cabinet Within each of the following DIMM groups identical DIMMs must be mounted TABLE G 6 Identical DIMM groups OAO OBO OCO ODO 0A1 OB1 0C1 OD1 1A0 1B0 1C0 1D0 1A1 1B1 1C1 1D1 DIMM mounting locations Among DIMMs with the same first and second digits in the DIMM slot numbers first mount the DIMMs whose third digit is 0 or 2 Example If you mount 0A1 0B1 0C1 and 0D1 DIMMs sequence 3 without mou
156. LEDs APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions Appendix G describes the mounting conditions of components for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series APPENDIX H Tree Structure of the MIB Provided with the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Appendix H describes the tree structure of the MIB provided with the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series APPENDIX I Windows Shutdown Settings Appendix I describes how to set Windows to shut down and some precautions about the settings APPENDIX J Systemwalker Centric Manager Linkage Appendix J describes linkage with Systemwalker Centric Manager APPENDIX K How to Confirm Firmware of SAS Array Controller Card Appendix K describes how to confirm the firmware of SAS array controller card including the one contained in the SAS array disk unit APPENDIX L Software Link Appendix L provides a link to Chapter 3 Software Configuration in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series General Description C122 B022EN APPENDIX M Failure Report Sheet Appendix M provides the failure report sheet Use the sheet when any failure occurs Index The index lists keywords and the pages that they refer to helping readers quickly find the necessary information in the manual Manuals for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series The following manuals have been prepared to provide you with the information necessary to use the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series You can access HTML versions of these manuals at the following sites Japanese language site http jp fujitsu com platform se
157. Locations and Port Numbers cccccceeesecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneneees 311 B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components 0 ccceeeeceeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeaaaeeseeaeeeseceeeeseeeeeeetaaeeeseaeeseees 312 E2 OE UMN IS tees hectic bec R ee eee tinea ida di epee depen reece 313 APPENDIX Lists 91 External Mera CES erisia airaa e iaasa eaves a aeeai aaiae adaa aaa aeaa 315 G 1 Listof External System Inienaceg rriei oninia aiia aa aaiae iaaa 316 G2 Osto Exiemal MMB Iieraees ocina iaa a aa aaa EEEE Aa a aaa Aa aaa daai 317 3 List of Other External Interfaces wi c c cccciccccescdecnsadccesacagenesaccanadczensazsdessnesaun iaaa anaa eaaa aaas 318 APPENDIX D Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Built in I O and PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot DRUGS ccna iecepsiese sah Waa isnt adiae Cie dase che sac uanaid cau ia aeea aea aaa aaiae aaia a aaa aak aads 319 D 1 Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Internal I O Controllers of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series 320 D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers cccccceseceeeeeeeeeeeees 321 APPENDIX E PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Cabinets Link 00 0 eccceeeeccseeeecceeeesnceeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeesaaeeesnaaeeeeeneees 323 APPENDS F alats Ghete WiN i cs secede ecards A vena EE svn dtd a RE TAa a eee 324 PILED Maan aes a be cain e E a a E A E 325 F 1 1 Power LED Alarmi LED dang Location LED scccccccsssscdescesassascatsieis sansevaatiesaascars
158. N vil C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Preface Font or Meaning Example symbol Window names as well as the names of buttons Click the OK button tabs and drop down menus in windows are enclosed in brackets Notation for the CLI command line interface The following notation is used for commands Command syntax Command syntax is represented as follows Variables requiring the entry of a value are enclosed in angle brackets lt gt Optional elements are enclosed in brackets Options for optional keywords are grouped in stroke separated lists enclosed in brackets Options for required keywords are grouped in stroke separated lists enclosed in braces Command syntax is written in a box Remarks The command output shown in the PDF manuals may include line feeds at places where there is no line feed symbol at the end of the line Notes on notations In this manual the Management Board and MMB firmware are abbreviated as MMB In this manual IOBs and GSPBs LIOBs and LGSPBs within partitions are collectively referred to as IO Units Screenshots contained in this manual may differ from the actual product screen displays The IP addresses configuration information and other such information contained in this manual are display examples and differ from that for actual operation Alert messages This manual uses the following alert messages to
159. NIC interface or a SLAVE interface of the bonding configuration For a single NIC interface Example EVICE ethl Specified interface name confirmed in step 7 CONTROLLED no BOOTPROTO static HWADDR 00 0E 0C 70 C3 40 ROADCAST 192 168 16 255 PADDR 192 168 16 1 MASK 255 255 255 0 RK 192 168 16 0 Example EVICE ethl Specified interface name confirmed in step 7 CONTROLLED no BOOTPROTO static HWADDR 00 0E 0C 70 C3 40 MASTER bondy SLAVE yes ONBOOT yes Note Adding the bonding interface itself also requires the MASTER interface configuration file of the bonding configuration 9 To add a bonding interface configure the bonding interface driver settings If the bonding interface has already been installed execute the following command to check the descriptions in the configuration file and confirm the setting corresponding to the bonding interface and driver Example Description in etc modprobe d bonding conf 170 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 10 grep 1 bonding etc modprobe d etc modprobe d bonding conf Note If the configuration file is not found or if you are performing an initial installation of the bonding interface create a configuration file with an arbitrary file name with the conf extension e g etc modprob
160. Note Windows does not support PCI card removal 186 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows 7 3 NIC Hot Plugging For NIC hot plugging replacement you need to especially consider other matters in addition to the procedure described in 7 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Cards This section describes NIC hot plugging combined with teaming For details on the fjpciswap command see 4 10 PCI Card Operation Command fjpciswap in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 3 1 Hot plugging a NIC incorporated into teaming This section describes the hot plugging procedure for a NIC incorporated into teaming Note Be sure to perform hot plugging after removing the card If the card is not removed the operating system may stop Network Interface Card There are some precautions on teaming with Intel PROSet R For details on the precautions see G 8 NIC 1 Confirm the physical location by using the display function of the fjpciswap command Here replace IOB PCIC 5 C gt fjpciswap 1 Replaceable PCI cards are UnitName IOB 1 PCIC 4 4 F unc FUNC 0 Storport Miniport IOB 1 PCIC Dual Port Server Adapter 15 1 PCIC Adapter 16 1 PCIC 1 PCIC Adapter 24 Cr gt 5 5 7 7 F F F F Driver UNC 0 UNC 1 UNC 0 1 Port Server Adapter 23 UNC 1
161. P addresses that are set from the MMB TABLE 1 3 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server set from the operating system in a partition lists the IP addresses that are set from the operating system The IP addresses in TABLE 1 2 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server IP addresses set from the MMB are assigned to the NICs network interface controllers on the MMBs Each NIC is connected to an SB or an external network port of the MMB through the switching hub on the MMB The MMB firmware uses the IP addresses The standard configuration has one MMB Fora dual MMB configuration which has two MMBs assign a common virtual IP address to both MMBs In addition to the virtual IP address assign one physical IP address to each MMB TABLE 1 2 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server IP addresses set from the MMB IP address setting Description method Management LAN IP address MMB Virtual Physical IP address This IP address is used for communication when the MMB is connected to the management LAN The physical IP address is assigned to the NIC of the user port of each MMB and the virtual IP address is assigned commonly to the duplicated MMBs The virtual IP address is used for access from a PC etc on the management LAN The virtual IP is inherited by an active MMB 4 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation IP address se
162. PSA internal log acquisition search Isolation of cause of communication failure between MMB and BMC Hardware log CPU chip set hardware log Remote REMCS maintenance Hardware failure information notification System configuration information notification Redundancy functions Management LAN a es jock en Management LAN duplication switching duplication Component and DIMM duplication module i Firmware storing memory FWH duplication duplication 303 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server has oscillator on each SB System clock Clock multiplexing Distribution fi n SB istribution from Home Other management software EMS linkage link Linkage with server management software of each company inkage Security functions Security setting External IF security setting Network security setting SSL SSH etc User management User authentication oe Nuh MMB login account management authentication Audit trail Operating log Records such as MMB operating log and login history etc For the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series only field engineers are permitted to operate the console with the front panel open 304 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series A 2 Correspondence between Functions and Interfaces The following shows t
163. PSU Indicates the on off status of each IO_PSU IO_PSU control CHECK Indicates whether there is an error in the PSU MMB FW control TABLE F 15 Power status and O_PSU LED display AC input to all IO_PSUs is off fe AC input to this IO_PSU is off and AC input to another IO_PSU is on AC input is on and the PSU is off 5 V standby being output AC input is on and the PSU is on 5 V standby being output On 12 V being output There is an IO_PSU output error 5 V standby being output On 12 V output error There is an IO_PSU output error 5 V standby output error 12 Off V being output There is an IO_PSU output error 5 V standby output error 12 Off V output error 330 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX F Status Checks with LEDs F 2 LED Mounting Locations This section describes the physical LED mounting locations on each component Components equipped with Power Alarm and Location LEDs have the LEDs mounted as follows The order of mounted LEDs arranged from left to right is as follows Power Alarm Location The order of mounted LEDs arranged from top to bottom is as follows Power Alarm Location From the standpoint of appearance components equipped with LAN ports have the Speed LED on the left and the Link Act LED on the right of each port Speed Link Act Speed Link Act FIGURE F 1 LED mounting locations on components equipped with LAN por
164. Properties window in Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 214 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows Targets Discovery Favorite Targets Volumes and Devices RADIUS Configuration M Quick Connect To discover and log on to a target using a basic connection type the IP address or DNS name of the target and then click Quick Connect Target Quick Connect m Discovered targets eternus2000 cm0 porti Connected eternus2000 cm1 port0 Connected To connect using advanced options select a target and then Connect dick Connect _ To completely disconnect a target select the target and Disconnect then dick Disconnect For target properties including configuration of sessions Properties select the target and click Properties For configuration of devices associated with a target select Devices the target and then dick Devices More about basic iSCSI connections and targets FIGURE 7 33 iSCSI Initiator Properties window in Windows Server 2008 R2 5 3 Incorporating a card with MPD This section describes the procedure for incorporating a card with MPD 1 Start ETERNUS Multipath Manager 2 Place the replacement device online For a multifunction card place all the devices online 215 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows
165. RAID service was stopped before the start of hot replacement work on a PCI card restart the service by using the following procedure after the hot replacement work 1 Log in as the system administrator root 2 Execute the following command to restart the ServerView RAID service sbin service aurad start 5 1 3 FC card Fibre Channel card replacement procedure The descriptions in this section assume that an FC card is being replaced Notes The FC card used for SAN boot does not support hot plugging This section does not cover configuration changes in peripherals e g UNIT addition or removal for a SAN disk device When replacing the FC card via hot plugging you need to consider matters in addition to the general hot plugging procedure Before replacing a card in a duplication environment with PRIMECLUSTER GDS if one of the cabinets cannot be accessed because a path duplication failure occurred you need to disconnect the disk connected to the card from mirroring After replacing the card incorporate the disk connected to the card again into mirroring again For details on how to disconnect a disk from and reincorporate it into mirroring see D 8 sdxswap Swap disk in the PRIMECLUSTER Global Disk Services Linux Configuration and Administration Guide 4 3 J2UZ 7781 The system restart after the failure addition removal or replacement of an FC card may change the device name dev sdX assigned to each disk of th
166. RIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 4 Maintenance LAN REMCS LAN The MMB provides the following LAN ports for maintenance purposes TABLE 1 6 Maintenance LAN REMCS LAN CE LAN FST CE terminal port for use in maintenance work 100Base TX RJ45 REMCS LAN For a connection with the REMCS Center 100Base TX RJ45 For REMCS connection without using the management LAN The port based VLAN function of the switching hub on the MMB blocks communication between the CE port and REMCS port The following shows an outline of the maintenance LAN and REMCS LAN of the MMB Switching Switching Switching hub hub hub NIC NIC NIC Processor NIC PCI bus Port based VLAN Switching K hub RS232 l COM USER USER REMCS CE port port port port FIGURE 1 4 Maintenance LAN and REMCS LAN of the MMB The maintenance LAN is configured with Web UI or CLI of the MMB The subnet of the maintenance LAN must be separated from the other subnets such as one for the management LAN the production LAN etc When the MMB is duplicated the maintenance LAN can only access to the MMB on the active side The NIC on the standby MMB is disabled Remarks The active and standby MMBs in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server each have a CE terminal port used in maintenance and a LAN port for REMCS notification Communication through the ports is enabled only on the active MMB and d
167. RIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Connection I O information mount information type detailed information System information Operating system operating system type version revision Disk information file system configuration etc Network information interface name IPv4 or IPv6 IP address IPv4 or IPv6 network type MAC address interface speed and current status up down link down packet size etc Other I O information Remarks The MMB Web UI supports the following browsers Other browsers may incorrectly display the MMB Web UI window Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6 Service Pack 1 or later Mozilla FireFox version 3 or later Maintenance is performed with the Maintenance Wizard on the MMB Web UI from a terminal such as a PC connected to the MMB in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server The MMB provides a dedicated Maintenance LAN port for field engineers To perform maintenance using the Maintenance Wizard a field engineer connects an FST PC used by the field engineer to the Maintenance LAN port of the MMB of the maintenance target system Note Field engineers perform the maintenance on the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series has several maintenance modes The maintenance modes prevent persons other than the field engineer from manipulating the power supply and suppress error repo
168. RIMEQUEST 1000 series server IP addresses set from the MMB IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server IP addresses set from the MMB are in the same subnet An IP address must be assigned to each partition 6 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation IP address setting Description method GbE port in GSPB Set it from the OS in This depends on the partition configuration The number of each partition LGSPBs 0 to 4 in the configuration is multiplied by 4 Network card Set it from the OS in Each port is connected to a network outside the cabinet The mounted in PCI each partition ports in the relevant partition must have IP addresses Express slot in IOB or Assign IP addresses to the ports used for actual operation PCI_Box xT The default IP address 172 30 0 partition number 2 is assigned during installation of PSA SVS on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E or SVS on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 The default IP address can be used unless it is in conflict with the one in the other subnet For details on the partition number see 1 3 4 Partition Configuration window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN If it is in conflict with the one in the other subnet change it manually For details on the setting procedure see the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN Remarks For NIC on the partition side
169. RO 1000 PT Dual The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Emulex LightPulse LPe1250 F8 P Confirm that the NIC was normally replaced by using the display function of the fjpciswap command PCI Slot 4 Port Server Port Server RO 1000 PT Port Server 8 After completing the replacement open the Device Manager and open the properties dialog box of the NIC to be incorporated into teaming sal Device Manager File Action View Help e9 mB ge x86 jE Computer Ec Disk drives H E Display adapters gM Emulex PLUS R Human Interface Devices gt Keyboards 9 Mice and other pointing devices f Monitors E a Network adapters a Intel R 82567LF 2 Gigabit Network Connection gt Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 9 big Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapta Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapte Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapt TEAM Team 0 gt TEAM Team 0 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual lb Other devices i oO Processors lt gt Storage controllers E System devices ql System management devices l Universal Serial Bus controllers Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 10 Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 11 a Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 12 Disable i Uninstall Update Driver Software Scan for hardware changes Properties Open
170. Removal Detection of PCI Express lane speed degradation IOH lt gt IOB Remarks Switching to the Reserved SB takes place even when the partition is automatically restarted To automatically restart the partition enter a value other than 0 for Number of Restart Tries on the ASR Control screen For details on the ASR Control screen see 9 4 1 Setting automatic partition restart conditions Switching to the Reserved SB set in a partition The process for switching to the Reserved SB set in a partition is as follows When the partition containing the Reserved SB is powered off the SB is disconnected When the partition containing the Reserved SB is powered on firmware instructs the partition to power off However after the firmware instructs the partition to power off if 10 minutes elapse without the partition being powered off it is assumed that the partition cannot be powered off Then the Force Power Off command is issued to forcibly power off the partition and to disconnect the SB Notes on Reserved SB function If an I O device is connected to a USB port or VGA port of the Home SB the connected I O device needs to be reconnected manually after the Home SB is switched to a Reserved SB After switching to a Reserved SB the system is automatically restarted When setting Reserved SBs consider the priority of setting works to avoid a conflicting configuration Do not set mutual dependence and loops although such set
171. Select Cancer to remain inview onl mode a FIGURE 1 10 Case where another user has already established a video redirection connection 27 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 4 If the user who established the later connection selects Full control mode the already connected PC is switched to View only mode Then a pop up dialog box will appear for selecting Full control mode or View only mode To return to Full control mode click the OK button in the dialog box To set View only mode click the Cancel button Server a Bi AVR Client To take full control select OK This will cause the primary user s session to become view onty if one ts already signed in To remain in view onty mode select Cancef Lox cancer FIGURE 1 11 Case where the user who established the later connection selects Full control mode Text console redirection The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series provides text console redirection to route serial output from partitions via a LAN Text console redirection conforms to the specifications of IPMI v2 0 SOL Serial Over LAN Console output to the COM port on the partition is redirected by this function to the terminal connected via a LAN Japanese display is not supported Input from the terminal is reported to the COM port on the partition The connection methods are categorized into three types and Java
172. Select Configuration Service From the service list right click Windows Time and select Properties For Startup type in the General tab specify Auto Delay Start Click OK to close the dialog box Nn FW N When using VMware use the NTP function in the guest operating system Windows or Linux When using the NTP function on the guest operating system Windows or Linux comply with the above rules 56 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal Home SB switching method Note the following specific connections in switching to a Reserved SB after a Home SB failure Note After the switch to the Reserved SB you may be asked for authentication of your license in the following cases You are using a volume license or package product The SB being used is not an SB that was purchased together with the enable kit TABLE 3 2 Notes on specific connections in switching to a Reserved SB Operational restriction USB port Any connection to a USB port of the Home SB must be manually reconnected to a USB port of the switched Reserved SB VGA port Any connection to the VGA port of the Home SB must be manually reconnected to the VGA port of the switched Reserved SB Time setting If NTP is not used a time difference may arise after the switch to a Reserved SB so the time must be checked and set from the OS Remarks T
173. T 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 2 Confirm that all the information of the disk incorporated in the FC card is displayed in Information about devices connected to controller and that n a or hyphen is not displayed for any item in the disk information 3 Follow this step for a server in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series If any item is not properly displayed Serial No in FIGURE5S 1 Fibre Channel window example restart PSA or execute the following PSA command manually opt FISVpsa sh force_search sh a Nadel POOMEYLEXT Lee Arme Mith p Par Sater Mati jason son FIGURE 5 1 Fibre Channel window example 4 Click the Refresh button to update the window and confirm that the information is displayed correctly It takes up to three minutes to update the window 1 4 Network card replacement procedure NIC network card replacement using hot plugging needs specific processing before and after PCI slot power on or power off Its procedure also includes to the common PCI card replacement procedure 108 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 The procedure describes operations where a single NIC is configured as one interface It also describes cases where multiple NICs are bonded together to configure one interface bonding configuration Single NIC interface Bonding configuration interface MASTER SLAVE i
174. TER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation For details on the environmental settings of ServerView Suite for Linux see the ServerView Suite ServerView Installation Manager Creating and managing server groups For details on how to create and manage server groups for individual users see the ServerView Suite ServerView Operations Manager Server Management 42 C122 E108 10EN CHAPTER 2 Operating System Installation Link For details on how to install an operating system on a partition see Chapter 4 Installing the Operating System and Bundled Software in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal This chapter describes the component configuration and how to replace components for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series 3A Pariton Gonfiguraton asso fester cee iiiu aasi 45 3 2 High availability Configuration s es 48 3 3 Replacing Components suiisiniissiiisdiirnnniiinanrinaiiias 61 3 4 Adding Components cccccccccecesssseeesesceeeveccneaeeseress 72 3 5 Removing Componen S 2 cccccicsevaeeeseanteeetessieaeeess 77 3 6 Processes after Reserved SB Switching and an Automatic Partion PEDOO eis sescevecuebeesceen tet ceaevcnnnavestevessieevevees 80 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal 3 1 Partition Configuration The partition configuration
175. TTR address 00 0e 0cC 70 c3 40 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME eth10 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Do this editing for all the interfaces confirmed in step 2 Reflect the udev function rules Since rules are not automatically reflected in udev at the removal time take action to reflect the new rules in udev udevadm control reload rules If the removed interface includes any bonding interface delete the driver setting of the interface When removing a bonding interface be sure to delete the setting corresponding to the bonding interface and driver Execute the following command to check the descriptions in the configuration file and confirm the setting corresponding to the bonding interface and driver Example Description in etc modprobe d bonding conf 178 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 11 grep 1 bonding etc modprobe d etc modprobe d bonding conf Edit the file that describes the setting and delete the setting of the removed bonding interface alias bondY bonding lt Delete bondY Name of the removed bonding interface Note There are no means to dynamically remove the MASTER interface bondY of the bonding configuration If you want to remove the entire bonding interface you can disable the bonding configuration and remove all
176. The window displays the IP address of the user who took over text console redirection If the connection uses a proxy the displayed IP address may not be correct If the IP address is unknown the message with the IP address does not appear 4 Press any key to return to the Main Menu window Note If a user is using text console redirection of the MMB from a Java applet when another user attempts access from terminal software via telnet or SSH the same message Console Redirection already in use appears If the other user disconnects the Java applet user the Java applet user cannot use text console redirection of the Java applet but is not notified of the disconnection Remote storage The remote storage function enables a partition to share the CD DVD drives ISO images CD DVD floppy disk drives and USB devices of terminals as storage devices ISO images and files on the terminal appear as emulated drives on the partition side Up to two devices can be used at the same time When two devices are connected one device uses USB 2 0 and the other uses USB 1 1 When only one device is connected that device uses USB 2 0 Notes For a terminal whose operating system is Windows Vista or Windows 7 set UAP User Account Protection to Disable 36 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation If the operation terminal is accessing the USB memory such
177. UI For details on the functions in TABLE 10 1 Functions provided by the MMB Web UI see the reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN The PSA windows in the MMB Web UI are provided only with the PRIMEQUEST 1800E TABLE 10 1 Functions provided by the MMB Web UI Function Reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Displays the status of the whole system 1 2 1 System Status window Displays the events stored in the SEL System Event Log 1 2 2 System Event Log window of the MMB Displays logs related to Web UI and CLI settings and 1 2 3 Operation Log window operations Displays hardware problem information REMCS 1 2 4 Partition Event Log window notification target message Displays this message on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 Displays information related to the PRIMEQUEST 1000 1 2 5 System Information window series system Sets the name of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series system cabinet Sets an Asset Tag asset management number Displays a firmware version 1 2 6 Firmware Information window Sets a system configuration 1 2 7 System Setup window Controls the system power 1 2 8 System Power Control window Displays the LED status 1 2 9 LEDs window Displays the PSU status 1 2 10 Power Supply window Displays the action taken in response to a PSU failure Displays the fan status 1 2 11 Fans window Displays the reaction response to a
178. Windows 7 1 Overview of Hot Maintenance The hot plugging procedure includes the common steps for all PCI cards and the additional steps required for a card function or driver This section describes both the operations required for all cards and the operations required for combinations with a specific card and specific software Overview of hot plugging You can add and replace cards by using the hot plugging supported by Windows Server 2008 This chapter describes the operating system commands required for card replacement together with the actual hardware operations For details on the overall flow see 7 1 1 Overall flow Common hot plugging procedure for PCI cards This chapter concretely describes the required tasks in the common replacement procedure for all PCI cards For details on the common hot plugging procedure for PCI cards see 7 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Cards Hot plugging procedure for each type of card This chapter describes procedures with the required additional steps for certain cards The section contain procedures for NICs network cards and FC cards Fibre Channel cards For details on NIC hot plugging see 7 3 NIC Hot Plugging For details on FC card hot plugging see 7 4 FC Card Hot Plugging For the respective procedures required for cards other than the above cards see the related hardware and software manuals as well as this chapter Usually these cards NICs and FC cards are used in a combinatio
179. X packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 1000 RXbytes 0 0 0 b TX bytes 0 0 0 b Link encap Local Loopback inet addr 127 0 0 1 Mask 255 0 0 0 UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MTU 16436 Metric 1 RX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 0 RXbytes 0 0 0 b TX bytes 0 0 0 b 8 Create an interface configuration file Create an interface configuration file etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg ethX for the newly created interface as follows In HWADDR set the hardware address confirmed in step 7 If multiple NICs are added or if a NIC where multiple interfaces exist is added create a file for all the interfaces The explanation here assumes as an example that a name automatically assigned by the system is used 169 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 To install a new interface you can use a new interface name different from the one automatically assigned by the system Normally there is no requirement on the name specified for a new interface To use an interface name other than the one automatically assigned by the system follow the instructions in step 14 of the NIC replacement procedure The contents differ slightly depending on whether the interface is a single
180. a NIC For hot plugging the interface must be assigned a fixed interface name The contents of this procedure are the same as those in the NIC card replacement procedure See 5 1 5 Assigning a fixed interface name to a NIC Corrective action for the kudzu utility when adding a NIC card The utility kudzu for checking for hardware changes may be executed in the system reboot after NIC addition Take corrective action by using the following procedure Ina window displayed by kudzu select whether to add the device information for the added interface to the system Confirm the displayed contents The device information is added to the system when an interface is added The choices are Configure Ignore and Do Nothing Select Ignore 131 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 5 3 Removing PCI Cards This section describes the PCI card removal procedure with the PCI Hot Plug function The procedure includes common steps for all PCI cards and the additional steps required for a specific card function or driver Thus the descriptions cover both the common operations required for all cards e g power supply operations and the specific procedures required for certain types of card For details on removal of the cards not described in this section see the respective product manuals 3 1 Common removal procedures for all PCI cards P
181. a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 3 Replace the faulty PCI card 4 Power on the partition For details on powering on partitions see 8 1 1 Powering on a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 5 Format the replacement PCI card Use the following procedure Execute commands from the command prompt 1 fio detach Disconnecting the device from the operating system 2 fio format Low level formatting of the device 3 fio attach Making the device available on the operating system e fio detach dev fctl e fio format dev fctl e fio attach dev fctl Remarks For details on each command see the ioMemory Product Family User Guide Microsoft Windows for Driver Release x x x x x x is the version number at the following website http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest download e an Add the device Select the appropriate volume from Disk Management in Windows and execute Add Mirror Remarks The work of adding the device will trigger the rebuild operation In a SWAP configuration Linux configuration 1 Delete the swap entry for the faulty PCI card Example swapoff dev fioal 2 Confirm the serial number of the faulty PCI card For the procedure to confirm the serial number see the ioMemory Product Family User Guide Linux for Driver Release x x x x x X is the version number at the following
182. a partition specified as a raw or swap device take action as follows If the hard disk contains a raw device If the hard disk to be replaced contains a partition operating as a raw device terminate all the applications that may access this partition as the raw device Then replace the hard disk If the hard disk contains a swap device The target hard disk contains a partition specified as a swap device Stop the system Then replace the hard disk 2 Take action as follows The action depends on whether the target hard disk has the Mirror configuration in PRIMECLUSTER GDS In the Mirror configuration in PRIMECLUSTER GDS From PRIMECLUSTER GDS select the disk to be removed and remove it For details on the removal procedure see the PRIMECLUSTER GDS manual Not in the Mirror configuration in PRIMECLUSTER GDS Unmount all the disk partitions mounted on the disk to be replaced umount dev sdcl umount dev sdc2 Remarks You need not unmount any partition operating as a raw or swap device 3 Use the disk management command to stop the disk rotation Execute the disk management command to perform the following processes Stop the disk rotation The Fault LED amber goes on Instruct the operating system to remove the target disk opt FUSVpsa bin diskctrl e dev sdc Remove the hard disk at the location indicated by the Fault LED amber that is on 4 Display the status by executing the disk manage
183. a single SB configuration Furthermore the Reserved SB is either SB 2 or SB 3 the partition has a 1 CPU 1 SB configuration 57 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal and the Reserved SB is switched with a faulty SB In this case Memory Mirror is suspended irrespective of the number of DIMMs mounted For the PRIMEQUEST1800E2 1800E Memory Mirror can be used with a single CPU configuration only for SB 0and SB 1 not for SB 2 and SB 3 Memory Mirror operations Memory Mirror is valid only for the memory modules on the same SB Memory Mirror cannot be used between memory modules on different SBs There are two types of Memory Mirror operation Mirroring within CPU and Mirroring between CPUs The operation modes are automatically set in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series models Mirroring within CPU is set on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 1800E SB 0 and SB 1 It takes effect for an SB with one mounted CPU Mirroring between CPUs is set on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 1800E The mirroring operation is between the DIMMs controlled by two CPUs on the same SB If only one CPU is mounted on the SB Memory Mirror cannot be set MBA MB 0B m J J MB 1B A BL cer I S MB C mBroc a MB 1D _BMC a b Mirroring within CPU 58 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement A
184. addresses of all the created interfaces In the following example dev32084 and eth0 are respectively assigned as the dummy interface name Example sbin ifconfig a dev32084 HWaddr 00 0E 0C 70 C3 MTU 1500 41 Ethernet ULTICAST Link encap BROADCAST M Metric 1 RX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 1000 RX bytes 0 0 0 b TX bytes 0 Memory 8ab20000 8ab40000 0 0 b HWaddr 00 0E 0C 70 C3 MTU 1500 40 Ethernet ULTICAST Link encap BROADCAST M RX packets Metric 1 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 1000 RX bytes 0 0 0 b TX bytes 0 Memory 8ab00000 0 0 b Create an interface configuration file Set the interface configuration file etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg ethX as follows In HWADDR set the hardware address confirmed in step 8 If multiple NICs are added or if a NIC where multiple interfaces exist is added create a file for all the interfaces The contents differ slightly depending on whether the interface is a single NIC interface or a SLAVE interface of the bonding configuration For a single NIC interface Example DEVICE eth0O ROTO static R 00 0E 0C 70 C3 40 nam Specified interfac confirmed in step 7 BOOTP HWADD BROADCAST 192 168 16
185. aeeseeeeseeetaaeeeees 201 FIGURE 7 16 Staring SCSI itato esi tecvcis ese neces ni iaa a i i eet 201 FIGURE 7 17 iSCSI Initiator Properties window in Windows Server 2008 cccceeeeseseeeeeteeeteneeeeeees 202 FIGURE 7 18 Target Properties WINGO 0 5 ccciis ci nteede misdeeds ee a A aai aa aiia 203 FIGURE 7 19 Session Connections Window ccceccceceseceeescceeeeeceeeaaeeeeeeaeeeaeeseeaaaeseaaeseeaaaeseeaeeeeaeaeeeaes 204 FIGURE 7 20 Target Propenmies WNGOW 6 4 oisce ie iene ot dain oie din 205 FIGURE 7 21 Device Details WINOOW or ie esse ccc eeeesce cen eetiensaaad edsecdhedsctediecasstet capnesedaced aaveenseasaleepeiniann ae 206 FIGURE 7 22 POI Devices WINTON 3 a ciici cialis eh A ee AEE 206 FIGURE 7 23 Ethernet Controler WinQow cccccccecccccteciscectaeersastecccesesscbalagenebeadessaeceesdaleseeneeaaeesdunvendecesiecne 207 FIGURE 7 24 HSC O VUE acs cass een eda cade casthainedec aa a a a a a E vie a eaii 207 FIGURE 7 25 iSCSI Initiator Properties window in Windows Server 2008 R2 asssssssssssssrrssrrrrssrressss 208 FIGURE 7 26 Frope ries WNGON ocara aaea eNe aA n a aa ede 209 FIGURE 7 27 Multiple Connected Session MCS WindOW sssssssessssssssesssrrsssssssssennsssrnnsrnnnsssrnnnsrnnnnsrnnnsenn 210 FIGURE 7 28 iSCSI Initiator Properties window in Windows Server 2008 R2 cccssceeesseeeeeeeetteeeeeees 211 FIGURE 7 29 Devices WII serisinin tenaren deia aaraa scien aes idian
186. ake on LAN support conditions of operating systems see the respective operating system manuals and restrictions For remote power control in an operating system that does not support WOL perform operations from the MMB Web UI 352 C122 E108 10EN APPENDIX H Tree Structure of the MIB Provided with the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series This appendix describes the tree structure of the MIB provided with the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series For details on the MIB tree of SVS see the MIB file of SVS H 1 MIB Tree Structure wo cece eeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees H 2 MIB File GOnte nts oorsien aani aaa 356 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX H Tree Structure of the MIB Provided with the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series H 1 MIB Tree Structure MIB information under mmb 1 is provided by the MMB firmware You can acquire it by accessing the MMB You can also acquire the standard MIB information from the MMB In contrast MIB information under partition 2 is provided by PSA You can acquire it via the MMB by accessing the MMB or you can acquire it directly from SNMP Service on the partition The MIB information in partition 2 is provided for each partition If you acquired the MIB via the MMB you can acquire information for each partition To do so request the OID after replacing the partitionCommon 100 values with each partition ID Note The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series uses the SNMP function of the MMB to recognize changes in the
187. al Contact your sales representative for inquiries about this manual The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series rack grouping function automatically registers PRIMEQUEST nodes For details on operation of this function see the Systemwalker Centric Manager PRIMERGY PRIMEQUEST Administration Guide 2 6 Linkage with ServerView In the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server ServerView Agent SV Agent is installed on each partition and SVOM ServerView Operation Manager can handle configuration management and problem monitoring Systemwalker works together with ServerView to transmit the monitoring results from ServerView to the integrated management server of Systemwalker as well as start the ServerView console from Systemwalker For details on the linkage procedure see the ServerView Operations Manager User s Guide 368 C122 E108 10EN APPENDIX K How to Confirm Firmware of SAS Array Controller Card This section explains how to confirm the firmware of SAS array controller card including the one contained in the SAS array disk unit K 1 How to Confirm Firmware Version of WebBIOS 370 K 2 How to confirm with ServerView RAID 373 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX K How to Confirm Firmware of SAS Array Controller Card K 1 How to Confirm Firmware Version of WebBIOS Use the following procedure to confirm the version of the firmware that is currently running Remarks The screens in the following procedure are e
188. al CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Next check the PCI slot number for this bus address grep il 0000 0b 01 sys bus pci slots address sys bus pci slots 20 address Read the output file path as shown below and confirm the PCI slot number sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt address Notes If the above file path is not output it indicates that the NIC is not mounted in a PCI slot e g GbE port in the GSPB With the PCI slot number confirmed here see D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers to check the mounting location and see also B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to identify the physical mounting location corresponding to the PCI slot number You can confirm that it matches the mounting location of the operational target NIC 2 Collect information about interfaces on the same NIC For a NIC that has more than one interface you will need to deactivate all the interfaces on the NIC Use the following procedure to check each interface that has the same bus address as that confirmed in step 1 Then make a table with information including the interface name hardware address and bus address Note Collect the following information even if the NIC has only one interface 1 Confirm the correspondence between the bus address and interface name Execute the following command and confirm the correspondence between the bus address and inter
189. anager amDaemon is stopped 109 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 3 If the ServerView RAID service is running execute the following command to stop the service sbin service aurad stop 2 Confirm that the PCI Hot Plug driver is installed Execute the lsmod command Confirm that the PCI Hot Plug driver module is installed sbin lsmod grep pciehp pciehp 20698 4 0 If not installed incorporate the PCI Hot Plug driver module into the system by executing the modprobe command sbin modprobe pciehp 3 Confirm the slot number of the PCI slot that has the mounted interface Confirm the interface mounting location through the configuration file information and the operating system information This is because the interface name used by the user may differ from that managed by the operating system First confirm the hardware address of the interface to be deleted HWADDR 00 0E 0C 70 C3 38 Example grep HWADDR etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg eth0 Confirm the interface name that has this hardware address It is the name managed by the operating system Example grep il 00 0 B 0C 70 C3 38 sys class net address sys class net eth0 address Now you have the interface name managed by the operating system Next confirm the bus address of the PCI slot that has
190. and memory dump collection 278 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 223 System status display cece eeeeeseceseeeseeeeeeesseeees 269 System status display in the MMB Web UI window 267 Systemwalker Centric Manager Linkage 0 361 T Target Properties windoW esseeessereeereerreeeee 203 205 TCP IP deletion message ee ee eeeeesseeeseeeeeeesseeeeees 213 Teaming tab s scccc aessaet 188 191 telnet connection for text console redirection 33 telnet connection for text console redirection connection StaD ISN sss saceecesabies seses EE ETa 34 Text console redirection authentication window 33 Text Console Redirection window cccscccceeeeees 31 Tree Structure of the MIB Provided with the PRIMEQUEST WOOO S eres 2 5 c 5c2e ies scsteseeeciaeertassecaiiea eran ea eieciaes 353 Troubleshooting sessies evenness ressesie 263 Troubleshooting OVervieW esesseerssssreerereererreresresrsesee 263 U UEFE e E 248 USB 2 0 USB 1 1 selection dialog boX eee 41 V Video redirection fUNCtiONS c cccesssececessseeeseseeeeeeees 26 Video Redirection window buttons cccccssseeeeeees 25 Video Redirection window in SA11071 or earlier and SB11062 or earller ci cccsiissssiniecaseuvicdieictbetseiacsaocsectents 22 Video Redirection window in SA11081 or later and SBIVO7 1 OF later isscc esse ctiscascetaiicad cis tan
191. anges H Universal Serial Bus controllers Opens property sheet for the current selection FIGURE 7 1 Device Manager window 3 Click the Teaming tab uncheck the Team this adapter with other adapters check box and click the OK button TEAM Team 0 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Ada FA ES General Link Speed Advanced Power Management Teaming Boot Options Driver Details Resources int D Adapter Teaming Team 0 X Properties Team with other adapters Allows you to specify whether a network connection will participate in a team For an overview of teaming click here If not checked this adapter is not part of a team FIGURE 7 2 Teaming tab 4 The following message appears Click the Yes button 188 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows Adapter Teaming Property Removing this adapter will leave just one adapter in the team Do you want to continue FIGURE 7 3 Adapter Teaming properties Confirm DeviceName by using the display function of the fjpciswap command Confirm that the NIC is not incorporated into teaming C gt fjpciswap 1 Replaceable PCI cards are displayed UnitName Func DeviceName IOB 1 PCIC 4 FUNC 0 Emulex LightPulse LPel250 F8 PCI Slot 4 Storport Miniport Driver IOB 1 PCIC 5 FUNC 0 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Ada
192. applet telnet SSH Connection period of text console redirection Text console redirection via telnet and SSH is automatically disconnected after a certain idle time This automatic disconnection is intended to enhance security The automatic disconnection time varies depending on the terminal software settings For text console redirection connected via telnet you can disable automatic disconnection by using the keep alive function of the terminal software e g Tera Term To disable automatic disconnection set an interval less than 10 minutes as the interval for sending a keep alive packet However for text console redirection connected via SSH you cannot disable automatic disconnection TABLE 1 11 Connection persistence time How text console redirection is Idle time after which connection is Idle time after which connection is connected automatically disconnected automatically disconnected Without keep alive function With keep alive function used C idioms Default ID and password values for text console redirection The default for both ID and Password for text console redirection is admin Changing the password for text console redirection To change the password for text console redirection use the following procedure 28 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation The number of characters and the available characters for the passwor
193. ard Disk Hot Replacement 0000000 86 Overview of Hot Maintenance eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 182 P Partition Configuration ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 45 Partition configuration rules components e 45 Partition Configuration WindOW e cceeseeceeeeeeeeee 271 Partition Event Log window cceesceeseeeereeeeteeeee 212 Partition settings after switching eeseeeerereerereee 83 Partition settings before switching eee eeeeeeees 82 Partition status transitions cece eseeeeeeeeeeenseeeees 83 Parts of the management LAN configuration 11 PCI_Box LED mounting locations eeeeeeeeeeeees 331 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 99 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 143 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows eee 181 PCI Card Mounting Conditions and Available Internal I O 347 PCI Devices WindOW c csccceeeesstteeeeees 195 200 206 PCI Express card slot LEDS cece eeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeees 327 PCI Express card status and LED display 0 0 0 327 Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Built in I O and PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers 319 Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Internal I O Controllers of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series 320 Physical Mounting Locations and Port Numbers 311 Physical mounting locations in the PCI_Box
194. ard XX to the replacement date Stop RAS Support Service For details on how to start ServerView RAID Manager or BBU life cycle management and other task settings see the ServerView RAID Management User Manual Remarks If the replacement battery level is considerably low the following two events may occur at the same time and the battery may remain undetected In this case keep the system operating continuously for at least 60 minutes to charge the battery After the battery is charged it is normally detected at the next restart 65 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal TABLE 3 8 Event log when the battery level is low 1 ServerView RAID RAID_Card xx BBU present TABLE 3 9 Event log when the battery level is low 2 ServerView RAID RAID_Card xx BBU removed 3 3 6 Replacing the battery unit of a UPS uninterruptible power supply This section describes the procedure for replacing the UPS battery unit The UPS battery unit should be replaced regularly RAS Support Service monitors its life cycle RAS Support Service provides life cycle monitoring and sends messages for the following notification TABLE 3 10 Replacement notification messages of RAS Support Service UPS Start time for sending messages for advance notification of replacement Message sending time for replacement notification About 1 year a
195. ard and slot of the PCI card to be added 2 Obtain the slot number of the mounting location Check the table in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers and obtain the slot number that is unique in the cabinet and assigned to the confirmed mounting location This slot number is identification information for operating the slot of the PCI card to be added Note The four digit decimal numbers shown in lt Slot number gt in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers have the leading digits filled with zeros The actual slot numbers do not include the zeros in the leading digits 2 Power off the PCI slot Confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for the target slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the slot number confirmed in step 1 is shown at lt slot number gt in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt To disable a slot and make it ready for the addition of a PCI card write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out echo 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power Note Be sure to manipulate the power supply from the operating system 3 Physically add the target card 4 Reconfigure the peripheral according to its manual For example suppose that the storage d
196. ard at a time will be replaced Asingle NIC is configured as one interface FIGURE 5 5 Example of single NIC interface Work to be performed before NIC replacement For iSCSI NIC hot replacement be sure to follow the procedure below immediately before performing Step 4 of the NIC replacement procedure in 5 1 4 Network card replacement procedure 120 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 1 Perform the work for suppressing access to the iSCSI connection interface 1 Use the iscsiadm command to log out from the path iqn through which the iSCSI card to be replaced is routed and disconnect the session 2 Use the iscsiadm command to confirm that the target session has been disconnected You can confirm the disconnection of sessions on multipath products using DM MP 1 or ETERNUS multidriver 2 1 Write down the DM MP display contents at the session disconnection 2 See the ETERNUS Multipath Driver User s Guide For Linux Work to be performed after NIC replacement For iSCSI NIC hot replacement be sure to follow the procedure below immediately before performing Step 18 of the NIC replacement procedure in 5 1 4 Network card replacement procedure 1 To restore access to the iSCSI connection interface perform the following 1 Use the iscsiadm command to log in to the path iqn through which the replacement iSCSI card is routed and reconn
197. at uses a PCI slot cccccccccessssseeeeeeeeeessenenaeeeeeeeesesssatess 67 SPACIOUS cronain a eaae aeea A aa aa a a a aaa aa a a 72 3 4 1 Addition procedures in hot maintenance ooo eee cece eeeeeeeee cee e eee eeee cate eee eeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeneaaees 74 3 4 2 Addition procedures in cold MANTnanCe 3 eee ccccl sca ae ecceeeeel nthaceeveteesdianeedeceess Grantees uses KEEA NRE 74 3 4 3 Adding an internal solid state drive that uses a PCI slot cccceccesssseeeeeeeeessnneeeeeeesssensaeeeeessesnnaaees 75 To Remo NE CIGNA occ accede Aa araea ninaa ETES EE E NEE aA E Aa AE E RA E A a 77 3 5 1 Removable componens cnrs r ENAA EE EERE EENEN ENTEN E 77 3 5 2 Removing an internal solid state drive that uses a PCI slot ccc cccssccceeeseseeneeeeeesesenneeeeeessesnanes 78 3 6 Processes after Reserved SB Switching and an Automatic Partition Reboot ssssccccseeeeeeeseeeessnees 80 3 6 1 Checking the status after Reserved SB switching and an automatic partition reboot 0e 80 3 6 2 Processing after replacement of a faulty SB ooo ee eeecceeceneeeeeaeeeeeaaaeeeeaeeseteeeeeeeaaeeeesaaaeeeneeeeseeaees 80 3 6 3 Checking the partition setting information at the Reserved SB switching time cccccccccceeeeeeees 81 CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks ccececceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaaeesaeeseegneeeeseaaaeeeeaaeenee 85 4 1 Overview of Hard Disk Hot Replacement 0 c
198. ating system and software operations depending on the PCI card type Notes This section describes instructions for the operating system and subsystems e g commands configuration file editing Be sure to refer to the respective product manuals to confirm the command syntax and impact on the system before performing tasks with those instructions For hot replacement of a PCI card the ServerView RAID service need not be temporarily stopped The following sections describe card addition with the required instructions e g commands configuration file editing for the operating system and subsystems together with the actual hardware operations 5 2 2 PCI card addition procedure in detail This section describes operations that must be performed in the PCI card addition procedure Confirming the installation of the PCI Hot Plug driver The Hot Plug driver must be installed on the system before you Hot Plug individual cards Hot plug driver module for PCI Express cards pciehp Confirm the installation of the Hot Plug driver by using the following procedure 1 Execute the Ismod command Confirm that the PCI Hot Plug driver module is installed sbin lsmod grep pciehp pciehp 206984 0 2 If not installed incorporate the PCI Hot Plug driver module into the system by executing the modprobe command 122 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise L
199. ays a list of CPU information on a partition 3 4 CPUs Window Displays a list of DIMM information on a partition 3 5 DIMMs Window Displays information on the PCI devices connected in each 3 6 PCI Devices Window partition Displays the network status in a partition 3 7 Network Menu Displays a list of hard disks in a partition 3 8 Hard Disks Window Displays a list of hardware components SB IOB CPU 3 9 Hardware Inventory Window DIMM PCI device GSPB SAS disk unit PCI_Box Displays a history of the various actions e g log output 3 10 Agent Log Window REMCS transmission SNMP trap transmission executed by PSA Outputs a snapshot of information retained by PSA in CSV 3 11 Export List Window format Collectively downloads the log information e g agent 3 12 PSA Logs Download Window log export data PSA internal log system log event log retained by a partition 246 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 10 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures 10 4 PSA CLI The following lists the functions provided by the PSA CLI For details on the functions in TABLE 10 4 Functions provided by the PSA CLI see the reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN TABLE 10 4 Functions provided by the PSA CLI Function Reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Operates an HDD
200. be active because power is on to the PCI slot At this stage since we recommend proceeding with the work with the interface on the replaced NIC deactivated repeat the operation in step 12 Collect the information about interfaces on the NIC again and create a table Use the same procedure as in step 2 to update the interface name information in the table from step 13 showing the correspondence of the interface before and after NIC replacement Note Confirm that each specified interface name is the same as before the NIC replacement TABLE 6 5 Confirmation of interface names Interface name Hardware address Slot number eth0O 00 0e 0c 70 c3 40 0000 0b 01 0 20 eth 00 0e 0c 70 c3 41 0000 0b 01 1 20 15 Edit the saved interface configuration file Write a new hardware address to replace the old one In HWADDR set the hardware address of the 16 replacement NIC in TABLE 6 4 Example of entered values corresponding to the interface names before and after NIC replacement or TABLE 6 5 Confirmation of interface names Also for SLAVE under bonding the file contents are partly different but the lines to be set are the same Example EVICE eth0 M_CONTROLLED no BOOTPROTO static HWADDR 00 0E 0C 70 C3 40 B I N N O T ROADCAST 192 168 16 255 PADDR 192 168 16 1 ETMASK 255 255 255 0 ETWORK 192 168 16 0 NBOOT yes YPE Ethernet Do this editing for all the saved interfaces Resto
201. ble Orange Blinking Fast Location indicated Slow Array rebuild in progress RAID 332 C122 E108 10EN re Of On Of On PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX F Status Checks with LEDs PCI_Box PCI Express Pow Green PCI Express slot power off card slot Pow er er PCI Express hot replacement in progress or IOB PCI Express o Green o PCI Express slot power off caret PCI Express hot replacement in progress lon PCI Express slot power on Alarm Orange or PCI Express slot normal Blinking PCI Express slot location ee e Error at PCI Express slot Power off in all partitions Power on in all partitions PSU on 12V feed Error occurrence in cabinet Not Active DVDB DVD drive Access Orange Ready Green or MMB not initialized MMB initialization in progress MMB initialization complete normal MMB operating status Active Green Blinking in Active MMB location green 333 C122 E108 10EN B B B B B B B Off linking On Off linking On Off linking On Off linking On DVDB Off On o CSS Yellow On System Blue On or Blinking Cabinet location Location ID A MMB initialization complete normal MMB operating status O fea Off linking On PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX F Status Checks with LEDs Location Blue Error occurrence in component location PSU Power Alarm Green Orange Off PSU AC input off Blinking in PSU AC input on PSU off PSU AC
202. bout two years battery 64 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal For details on the RAS Support Service see the RAS Support Service User s Guide Replacing the BBU The BBU replacement workflow is described below 1 10 Start ServerView RAID Manager ServerView RAID Manager checks the hard disks for any failure If a hard disk is faulty replace it Power off the partition Then ask a field engineer to take over the procedure A field engineer performs the following steps 4 and 5 Remove the array controller card from the SAS array disk unit Replace the array controller card BBU Then attach the array controller card onto the SAS array disk unit Take over the procedure from the field engineer Start the partition Then start the operating system BBU recalibration automatically begins Confirm that the following event is logged In Windows the event is logged in the event log SYSTEM In Linux it is logged in the system log TABLE 3 7 Event log at recalibration Source ServerView RAID Event ID 10304 Description RAID_Card xx BBU relearn started Display the GUI of RAS Support Service On the list of service life components check for the name of the array controller card whose BBU was replaced as shown in e mail or the PSA Agent log Then update the mounting date of the battery RAID_C
203. box appears 4 Click the Close button in the Download completed dialog box The display returns to the Agent Log window Extracting entries from the agent log by using filtering conditions 1 Click the Filter button The Agent Log Filtering Condition window appears 2 To continue with setting filtering conditions specify the conditions in the Agent Log Filtering Condition window and click the Apply button This sets the specified conditions Then the display returns to the Agent Log window 284 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures For details on the Web UI operations see the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 11 4 3 Collecting data for investigation Windows If a problem occurs in Windows data on the situation is required for ensuring a prompt and correct investigation This section describes frequently required investigation data and how to acquire the data For an investigation you need a separate SupportDesk agreement Software Support Guide and DSNAP SSG and DSNAP are support tools for collecting the data necessary for investigation of software problems If a problem occurs in your system SSG and DSNAP enable your Fujitsu certified service engineer to correctly determine the system software configuration This leads to a smooth investigation The engineer uses this information to det
204. built in options Configuration information BIOS setup utility settings OS used LAN WAN system configuration Symptoms e g what happened at the time message displayed Sample messages System event log See FIGURE 11 11 System event log display PSA agent log See FIGURE 11 14 Agent Log window Occurrence date and time Server installation environment Status of various lamps 11 2 3 Sales representative contact Contact your sales representative in the following cases For a repair not under any support service e g SupportDesk contract For a repair under warranty during the warranty period Fora 11 2 4 repair not under any support service e g SupportDesk contract after expiration of the warranty period Our authorized service engineer will repair the product on site The service engineer will go to your premises on the next business day after the contact date The service charge including the technical fee parts costs and transportation expenses for each request depends on the product and work time Note that some products are outside the service range Confirm that we will be able to repair your product when you contact us Finding out about abnormal conditions Ifa problem occurs in the system use the LEDs on the front of the device any report on the MMB Web UI windows and any e mail notification to understand the situation E mail notification requires settings made in advance 265 C12
205. button Export CSR button using FireFox 4 or later flashes a save confirmation dialog box resulting in the secret key not being downloadable Therefore use Internet Explorer during Export Key Export CSR window manipulation Import Certificate Imports a signed electronic certificate sent from a certificate authority To import a file specify the file and click the Import button Create Selfsigned Certificate Creates a self signed certificate 12 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation SSL certificate status Displays the current status of self signed certificate installation Term Specifies the term of validity number of days of the self signed certificate The other settings are the same as on the Create CSR window Create Selfsigned Certificate button Creates a self signed certificate SSH SSH settings Create SSH Server Key Creates an SSH server private key SSH Server Key Status Displays the status of SSH server key installation Create SSH Server Key button Creates a private key After creation is completed a confirmation dialog box appears Clicking OK installs the created key Clicking Cancel discards it Remote Server Management User settings for remote control of the MMB via RMCP Use the Edit User button to select the user to be edited The default settings for all users is No Access and Disable
206. c cceteeeeesecceetedleeecccnetveececgedeateabesaesenendaeneasaeeeeteeneetes 86 4 2 Adding Removing and Replacing Hard Disks 0 ccceceeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaeeeeeaaeeee 88 AT PIRI olke e olt i e etseceeehtetastaeeen terested E eee 88 42 2 Removal PrOGEdUNE iriiria nerina naaede aaa aara vaedesiass neupasaideaescctadtedesagaae nee 89 4 2 3 Replacement procedure for hard disk failures not causing non responsiveness s 90 4 2 4 Replacement procedure for hard disk failures causing NON reSPONSIVENESS ceeeeeeeeeetteeeeee 92 XV C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Contents 4 3 Replacing Hard Disks in a Hardware RAID Configuration cceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeenaaeeee 95 4 3 1 Hotreplacement of a faulty hard disk 02 c e cec cee aeeeceeecteeelee ctagteeeuecdaesuaedeeslotaveee stvciieereseteneuie dened 95 4 3 2 Hard disk preventive replacement ececccececceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeecaaeeseceeeeeseaaesegeeeeeseaaeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeees 95 4 3 3 Hard Disk Replacement at Multiple Deadlock Occurrence c cc eeeeeeeeeeee tects eeeeeeeceaaeeeseaeeteeeeeeeaaeeees 97 CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 o eeecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeee 99 5 1 Hot Replacement of POI CROS fois ccccedesteeck cieceehececdvecdsstnsaas ceeds dasenenctbeeusliseedeceendasasseedgedaenuati wade sanes 100 5 1 1 Overview
207. cO FUJITSU FUJITSU Server PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Preface Preface This manual describes how to use tools and software for system administration of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series system and how to maintain the system component replacement and error notification The manual is intended for system administrators For details on the regulatory compliance statements and safety precautions see the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Safety and Regulatory Information C122 E115XA Errata and addenda for the manual The PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Errata and Addenda C122 E119EN provides errata and addenda for the manual Read the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Errata and Addenda C122 E119EN thoroughly in reference to the manual For Safe Operation How to use this manual This manual contains important information about the safe use of this product Read the manual thoroughly to understand the information in it before using this product Be sure to keep this manual in a safe and convenient location for quick reference Fujitsu makes every effort to prevent users and bystanders from being injured and to prevent property damage Be sure to use the product according to the instructions in the manual About this product This product is designed and manufactured for standard applications Such applications include but are not limited to general office work personal and home use an
208. can store only one dump at a time The new file will overwrite an existing dump file at the specified storage location Minimum memory dump A minimum memory dump records the minimum required data to identify the problem It requires 64 or 128 KB of free space With this option the dump function creates a new file each time the system stops unexpectedly Automatic memory dump This type of dump is available beginning with Windows Server 2012 Automatic memory dump is the default setting in Windows Server 2012 An automatic memory dump records the same information as a kernel memory dump It differs from a kernel memory dump as follows The default setting of the paging file size is a smaller value If all kernel space information could not be recorded the paging file size is automatically expanded at the next start time However if all kernel space information could not be recorded memory dump acquisition may fail TABLE 11 10 Memory dump types and sizes Memory dump type Memory dump file size Complete memory dump Physical memory size 1 MB 1 Overwrite 2 Kernel memory dump Depends on memory space during system Overwrite 2 operation about 150 MB to 2 GB Minimum memory dump 64 or 128 KB Automatic memory dump Depends on memory space during system Overwrite 2 operation about 150 MB to 2 GB In a system using the Memory Mirror function it is half the size of the mounted physical memory 286 C122 E108 10
209. cards This section provides an overview of common replacement procedures for all PCI cards Performing the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI card type Powering off a PCI slot See Powering on and off PCI slots Replacing a PCI card Powering on a PCI slot See Powering on and off PCI slots n Ae U N e Performing the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI card type Note This chapter provides instructions e g commands configuration file editing for the operating system and subsystems Be sure to refer to the respective product manuals to confirm the command syntax and impact on the system before performing tasks with those instructions The following sections describe card addition removal and replacement with the required instructions e g commands configuration file editing for the operating system and subsystems together with the actual hardware operations 6 1 2 PCI card replacement procedure in detail This section describes how to replace a PCI card Preparing the software using a PCI card When a PCI card is replaced there must be no software using the PCI card For this reason before replacing the PCI card stop the software using the PCI card or make the software operations inapplicable Confirming the slot number of a PCI slot When replacing a PCI card you need to manipulate the power supply to the appropriate slot through the opera
210. cceeeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaaeeeseeaeeeeennees 347 TABLE H1 MIB TIE contente sas have dee chase Fresed es bisike inina Eaa aiaiai 356 TABLE J1 Files and T001 16 Grenahe iriiria eiaa ele neni a aaa a aaa Eiaa 362 XX V C122 E108 10EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation This chapter describes the external network environment and management tool installation for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series For an overview of the management tools used for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series see Chapter 8 Operations Management Tools in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series General Description C122 B022EN 1 1 External Network Configuration eeens 2 1 2 How to Configure the External Networks Management LAN Maintenance LAN Production LAN 4 1 3 Management LAN c cccccctececscescceeecteeeeeaesseeeeereetebane 8 1 4 Maintenance LAN REMCS LAN nesen 16 1 5 Producton LAN ccccccccssdsceececccerscstececetcrvetetveccczeaaavsuvanes 17 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use 18 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 1 External Network Configuration The following diagram shows the external network configuration for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series Onboard GbE E LAN LAN card card PRIMEQUEST IOB GSPB Onboard GbE MMB o0 Active USER USER REMCS CE port port port port E Onboard LAN LAN A Managem
211. ce mode functions Item Operation Hot System Hot Warm Cold Cold Partition System System System breaker breaker on off Power supply Administrat Permitted Permitted Suppressed Suppressed Suppresse Suppresse d d Field Suppresse Suppressed Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted engineer d 1 1 d Wake On LAN Permitted Permitted Suppressed Suppressed Suppresse Suppresse WOL d Calendar function Permitted Suppressed Suppressed Suppresse d d Permitted Permitted Suppressed Suppressed Suppresse Suppresse Stops at Stops at d d BIOS BIOS Stops at Stops at 1 1 BIOS BIOS REMCS report Permitted Suppressed Suppressed Suppressed Suppresse Suppresse 2 1 CA Jd d This pertains only to the maintenance target partition 2 Suppresses the REMCS report upon system failure but reports partition failures 259 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 11 1 5 Maintenance of the IOB and GSPB This section provides notes on maintenance related to IOB and GSPB failures If a failure occurs in either of two partitions sharing an IOB both partitions must be stopped for maintenance The IOB maintenance procedure is as follows 1 The system administrator stops all the partitions belonging to the maintenance target 2 After confirming that all the partitions have been stoppe
212. cify the drive on which to create the paging file an Select the system installation drive in Drive Drive in Paging file size for selected drive displays the selected drive N Select a value in Custom size Enter a value in Initial size To correctly acquire a memory dump the specified size must be equivalent to the size of mounted memory plus 1 MB or more About 1 5 times the size of the mounted memory is recommended 8 Enter a value in Maximum size Be sure to specify a value larger than or equal to Initial size The same size as Initial size is recommended 9 Save the settings Click Set in Paging file size for selected drive This saves the settings Paging file size in Drive displays the entered values 10 Click the OK button to close the Virtual Memory dialog box 11 Click the OK button to close the Performance Options dialog box 12 Click the OK button to close the System Properties dialog box 292 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 13 Restart the partition After the partition restart the settings take effect Note In Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2003 R2 with the paging file specified to be created on a partition other than the system partition normally Drive C the dump function will not create a dump file if a STOP error occurs Do not move the pagin
213. ctory corresponding to the target slot cho 1 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power This also installs the device associated with the relevant adapter on the system Note After power on you need to confirm that the card and driver are correctly installed The procedures vary depending on the card and driver specifications For the appropriate procedures see the respective manuals 6 2 3 FC card Fibre Channel card addition procedure The descriptions in this section assume that an FC card is being added For the PRIMEQUEST 1800E perform operations from the PSA Web UI Notes The FC card used for SAN boot does not support hot plugging This section does not cover configuration changes in peripherals e g UNIT addition or removal for a SAN disk device To prevent a device name mismatch due to the failure addition removal or replacement of an FC card access the SAN disk unit by using the by id name dev disk by id of the device name FC card addition procedure 165 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 The procedure for adding new FC cards and peripherals is as follows 1 Confirm the slot number of the PCI slot by using the following procedure 1 Identify the mounting location of the PCI card to be added See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to check the mounting location bo
214. ctory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt Note lt BUS number gt and lt slot number gt are both four digit decimal values Here lt BUS number gt is information added to the slot number for descriptive purposes The operational target directory is defined uniquely with lt slot number gt Confirm that the PCI card in the slot is enabled or disabled by displaying the power file contents in this directory cat sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power When displayed 0 means disabled and 1 means enabled Powering on and off PCI slots You can power on and off a PCI slot through an operation on the file confirmed in Checking the power status of a PCI slot To disable a slot and make it ready for the addition of a PCI card write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out cho 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power 123 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Note Be sure to manipulate the power supply from the operating system After the PCI card is added to the target slot to enable the target slot and make it ready for use write 1 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot cho 1 gt sys bus pci slots lt BUS numb
215. ctual connection format Fabric connection or Arbitrated Loop connection were made Eliminate the problem power on the slot again and check the log If the messages in a and b are displayed but the messages in c 1 and c 2 are not displayed the storage is not yet found Check the following points again These are not card problems so you need not power off the slot for work Review FC Switch zoning settings 106 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Review storage zoning settings Review storage LUN Mapping settings Also confirm that the storage can be correctly viewed from LUNO Eliminate the problem Then confirm the settings and recognize the system by using the following procedure 1 Confirm the host number of the incorporated FC card from the message at a XX in scsixx Xx is a numerical value in the message at a is a host number In the above example the host number is 10 2 Scan the device by executing the following command _ gt sys class scsi_host hostxx scan is command prompt xx in hostxx is the host number entered in step 1 The command for the above example is as follows echo _ gt sys class scsi_host host10 scan 3 Confirm that the messages in c 1 and c 2 were output to var log messages If this message was not output confirm the settings again
216. ctwe MAIR Past Nussber MEDIACII Fujitsu Seria Number 14303400 Stare ww sd Power Control Seton woj Selact a Power Coats opos tor car oe more parsons than chek de Apply batten te take effect Le a FIGURE 9 3 Power Control window For details on the contents and setting items of the Power Control window see 1 3 1 Power Control window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 9 2 8 Checking the partition power status by using the MMB This section describes how to check the partition power status 1 Log in to the MMB Web UI The MMB Web UI window appears 2 From the Web UI menu click Partition Partition x Information The Information window appears 229 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control PRIME QUEST LS Active DIMER MCDIACILE base 00 co 4 FIGURE 9 4 Information window Power Status displays the partition power status For details on the contents and setting items of the Information window see 1 3 7 Partition x menu in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 9 2 9 Powering off a partition by using the MMB This section describes the power off procedure using the MMB Web UI window 1 Log in to the MMB Web UI The MMB Web UI window appears 2 From the Web UI menu click Partition Power Control The Power Contr
217. d Virtual keyboard This displays the virtual keyboard which can be used for operations Java client logging The user can refer to the log This saves the log in a file The workflow for selecting View only mode or Full control mode of the video redirection function is described below 1 Establish a connection with video redirection Do so in View only mode gt gt A pop up dialog box appears on the user s PC to ask whether to use Full control mode or View only mode 2 To set Full control mode click the OK button To set View only mode click the Cancel button Ej AVR Client x xj To take full control select OK This will cause the primary user s session to become view only if one is already signed in To remain in view only mode select Cancel Cancel FIGURE 1 9 Selecting Full control mode View only mode 3 After another PC establishes a connection with video redirection a pop up dialog box about the other user s video redirection connection appears Another dialog box will also appear for selecting Full control mode or View only mode Any other PC with an established video redirection connection will also display a pop up dialog box about the connection from the other PC E AVR Client R f E avecient Fulano Another user has connected f Another user has connected Would you like to take contro of the remate keyboard and mouse Select OK to take full control
218. d a field engineer replaces the IOB Remarks The GSPB procedure is the same as the IOB procedure You can use the Maintenance Wizard to confirm that all the partitions belonging to the IOB are stopped We recommend you use the Maintenance Wizard when replacing the IOB only done by a field engineer After replacing the GSPB set WOL for a new NIC from the operating system For PXE boot after replacing the GSPB the boot order must be reconfigured For details on how to reconfigure it see 5 4 2 Overview of UEFI boot specifications in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 11 1 6 Maintenance policy preventive maintenance For details on the maintenance policy preventive maintenance for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series see 9 1 Maintenance Policy Preventive Maintenance in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series General Description C122 B022EN 11 1 7 REMCS service overview REMCS Remote Customer Support System connects your server to the REMCS Center through the Internet to enable the system to send server configuration information and automatically report failures when they occur REMCS is thus intended to facilitate prompt responses and solutions to problems The REMCS function of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series are implemented by the following components MMB Collects hardware configuration information of the entire server monitors the server for problems and reports thereon to the REMCS Center PSA PRIMEQUEST 1800E or SVS
219. d are as follows Number of characters 1 to 20 characters Available characters Numeric characters 0 to 9 Alphabetic characters a to z A to Z Symbols amp gt 4 2 lt gt _ 1 Use terminal software such as Tera Term to connect to the IP for text console redirection via telnet 2 When the Main Menu window is displayed press the c key Welcome to PRIMEQUEST Remote Manager Firmware Revision 1 16A 1 16 Firmware built Feb 12 2010 20 14 52 Main Menu c Change password r Console Redirection EMS SAC nter selection or 0 to quit FIGURE 1 12 Changing the password for text console redirection telnet connection 3 Enter the current password old passphrase and a new password new passphrase 29 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation SERS RRR RRR RRR ROK Welcome to PRIMEQUEST Remote Manager Firmware Revision 1 16A 1 16 Firmware built Feb 12 2010 20 14 52 teak kok oR oR oR RR ROR RRR Main Menu ic Change password I r Console Redirection EMS SAC ter selection or 0 to quit lease enter user mame admin Enter old pass phrase i kikiki Enter new pass phrase i sheik Repeat new pass phrase tteok FIGURE 1 13 Changing the password for text console redirection input Text console redirection via a Java applet When the user starts text console redirecti
220. d general industrial use The product is not intended for applications that require extremely high levels of safety to be guaranteed referred to below as safety critical applications Use of the product for a safety critical application may present a significant risk of personal injury and or death Such applications include but are not limited to nuclear reactor control aircraft flight control air traffic control mass transit control medical life support and missile launch control Customers shall not use the product for a safety critical application without guaranteeing the required level of safety Customers who plan to use the product in a safety critical system are requested to consult the Fujitsu sales representatives in charge Storage of accessories Keep the accessories in a safe place because they are required for server operation Organization and Notation of This Manual This section describes the following topics Organization of this manual Manuals for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series Related manuals Abbreviations Notation Notation for the CLI command line interface Notes on notations Alert messages i C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Preface Product operating environment Trademarks Organization of this manual This manual is organized as follows CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation Chapter describes the external network environment and
221. d network adapter CNA or a 785 GB 1 2 TB internal solid state drive that uses a PCI slot is not possible Stop the partition before the replacement Remarks VMware does not support hot replacement of HDD and PCI cards 62 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal 3 3 2 Component replacement conditions This section describes the replacement conditions of each component PSU The PSU can be replaced while the system continues operating PSU replacement in a non redundant configuration requires the system to be stopped Fan unit The fan unit can be replaced while the system continues operating SB The SB can be replaced while the power is off to the partition containing the SB Remarks Each DIMM CPU battery internal USB and VRM module mounted on the SB can be replaced after the SB is physically removed Note If NTP is not used set the time from the operating system because a time difference may arise after the Home SB is replaced IOB The IOB can be replaced while the power is off to all partitions to which the IOB and the GSPB connected to the IOB belong GSPB The GSPB can be replaced while the power is off to all partitions to which it belongs Remarks After replacing the GSPB set WOL for a new NIC from the operating system In Linux after replacing the GSPB set the hardware address MAC address again For detai
222. d on the screen follow the instructions to restart the system 6 After the Windows restart is completed shut down the system 7 Remove the SB incorporated as the Reserved SB in step 3 from the partition by using the MMB Web UI 8 Add the SB removed once in step 2 to the partition Notes on VMware At the first startup after an SB is switched to the Reserved SB in a partition running VMware the guest operating system may not start Set the guest operating system to automatically restart and the BlueScreen Timeout item in the settings of the Reserved SB in the partition running VMware For example to reset the ESX host 20 seconds after a panic occurs set 20 for BlueScreenTimeout Remarks To not reset the ESX host after a panic occurs set 0 for BlueScreenTimeout How to set BlueScreenTimeout Set BlueScreenTimeout from vSphere Client 1 Open the Configuration tab of the host in vSphere Client Click Advanced Settings in the Software pane 50 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal Tarek FIGURE 3 3 BlueScreenTimeout setting Configuration tab 2 The Advanced window opens Click Misc in the left pane 3 The right frame displays parameters Set the BlueScreenTimeout value in Misc BlueScreenTimeout 4 Advanced Settings BufferCache CBRC Config Time bound on
223. ddition and Removal b Mirroring between CPUs FIGURE 3 13 Mirroring within CPU and Mirroring between CPUs The following lists the supported mirroring operations by model and configuration TABLE 3 3 Mirroring operations by model and configuration 1 CPU SB 2 3 partition 2 CPU SB partition Memory Mirror conditions The following lists Memory Mirror conditions TABLE 3 4 Memory Mirror conditions Mirroring within CPU Mount DIMMs according to G 2 1 DIMM mounting sequence Mirroring between CPUs Mount DIMMs according to G 2 1 DIMM mounting sequence In partitions configured with multiple SBs the memory modules must be configured independently on the SBs added by SB Also about the hardware the DIMM groups used for mirroring must have the same capacity Note On the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 1800E the DIMM mounting locations for Memory Mirror with one CPU are different from those for Memory Mirror with two CPUs For details on the DIMM mounting conditions see G 2 DIMM 3 2 3 Hardware RAID The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series supports Hardware RAID Hardware RAID is handled by a dedicated RAID controller chip and firmware The PCI Express card serves to control the array faulty HDD disconnection installation and LEDs Hardware RAID for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series supports RAID 0 1 1E 5 6 and 10 59 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacemen
224. duct ACAUTION Modifying this product or recycling a secondhand product by overhauling it without prior approval may result in personal injury to users and or bystanders or damage to the product and or other property Note on erasing data from hard disks when disposing of the product or transferring it Disposing of this product or transferring it as is may enable third parties to access the data on the hard disk and use it for unforeseen purposes To prevent the leakage of confidential information and important data all of the data on the hard disk must be erased before disposal or transfer of the product However it can be difficult to completely erase all of the data from the hard disk Simply initializing reformatting the hard disk or deleting files on the operating system is insufficient to erase the data even though the data appears at a glance to have been erased This type of operation only makes it impossible to access the data from the operating system Malicious third parties can restore this data If you save your confidential information or other important data on the hard disk you should completely erase the data instead of simply carrying out the aforementioned operation to prevent the data from being restored xii C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Preface To prevent important data on the hard disk from being leaked when the product is disposed of or transferred you will need to take care to
225. dware RAID configuration Monitor HardRAID with ServerView RAID For details on how to replace hard disks in a Hardware RAID configuration see the MegaRAID SAS Software the MegaRAID SAS Device Driver Installation and the Modular RAID Controller Installation Guide 4 3 1 Hot replacement of a faulty hard disk This section describes the workflow for replacing a faulty hard disk For the PRIMEQUEST 1800E perform PSA window operations from the MMB Web UI 1 Start ServerView RAID Manager 2 In the ServerView RAID Manager tree view confirm the mounting location of the faulty hard disk A field engineer performs steps 4 to 6 as the hard disk recovery procedure 3 Confirm that the Alarm LED of the hard disk on the main unit is on 4 Replace the hard disk whose Alarm LED is on 5 Follow this step for the PRIMEQUEST 1800E In the MMB Web UL open the PSA window for the partition Select PCI Devices from the left menu The window displays Error or Warning at Status for the array controller card that manages the faulty hard disk Select the card Then click the Status Clear button 6 After replacing the hard disk confirm that hard disk replacement was completed properly by using the following steps depending on whether the disk is a spare disk If not set as a spare disk ServerView RAID Manager automatically performs a rebuild Then the Alarm LED of the hard disk starts blinking Wait until the rebuild is complete in the Serv
226. e The label is affixed at either location Warning label location PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 1800E rear x C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Preface zenke deh siren PoP C3 a fi JO oO 7 ey 2 gt 2 a O i ooo J o O 7 1 p li LLL i a iora n ral Ib Ht ESI Fake fal fa o h 3 o gt Oe cs S O o aaia LIM Io e T L ue I J E mie 2 m a E 2 S 6 B ak B le fo O r cme b fh a J m d T T gt Hi o i f g o eJ oy o C 71 a C gt gt ho C Oo i R i o A as ai le a o o P o o Dg o ELE r A CAUTION FRRTEMI DM MLA 7 VERTCIERU WA DFU SEF AZ J PEAT LAB IN EE SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE INSTALLING THIS UNIT Warning label location PCI_Box xi WEBI KEMIT CSU OM TIAL a ae amr EAR semen numeric ERSA ZA REAM DISCONNECT AL
227. e Operations in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN For details on TABLE 10 2 Functions provided by the MMB CLI see the reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN TABLE 10 2 Functions provided by the MMB CLI Function Reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Sets information 2 2 Setting Commands Displays information 2 3 Display Commands Updates firmware 2 4 1 update ALL Displays the version and update status of firmware 2 4 2 show update_status 245 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 10 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures 10 3 PSA Web Ul The PSA Web UI displays the status in and operates each partition of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series system The following lists the functions provided by the PSA Web UI For details on TABLE 10 3 Functions provided by the PSA Web UL see the reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Remarks The PSA Web UI is provided only for the PRIMEQUEST 1800E In the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 SVS provides the management function of PSA For details on the SVS function see the SVS manual TABLE 10 3 Functions provided by the PSA Web UI Function Reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Displays a partition overview and OS information 3 Partition Information Window Displ
228. e Name Emulex LPe1250 F8 FV1 11A5 DVS 2 10A7 WIN PO7LGTIXKOQO Supported Class of Service Class 3 Supported FC4 Types 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Port atus Unk Status Operations Link Speed 2 GBt second Loop Map lt lt lt FIGURE 7 11 HBAnyware 4 Start ETERNUS Multipath Manager and place all the devices to be replaced offline 196 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows i ETERNUS Multipath Manager ioi x File Tools Help Fault list 0 Status Machine name Unit name W508X86 Disk Number 2nd Path _ 3rd Path E3000 E340511A 230004 4 SCSPort2 BusO TargetID 0 Q LUNO Disk1 Active Active LUNI Disk2 Active Active LUN2 Disk3 Active Active SCSPort3 BusO TargetID 0 offie wi Auto Path Check ON Auto Path Recovery ON FIGURE 7 12 ETERNUS Multipath Manager 5 Replace the FC card by executing the following command Exit ETERNUS Multipath Manager and HBAnywhere Replace the relevant card by using the replacement function of the fjpciswap command C gt fjpciswap r IOB 1 PCIC 4 Selected card name is Emulex LightPulse LPel250 F8 PCI Slot 4 Storport Miniport Driver Please delete all settings about this card Do you want to remove this card y n y Removing the card The card has rem
229. e SAN disk unit To prevent a device name mismatch of the disk of a SAN disk unit managed by PRIMECLUSTER GDS a preventive measure has been implemented To prevent a device name mismatch when directly accessing the disk of a SAN disk unit not registered with PRIMECLUSTER GDS use the by id name dev disk by id The by id name is not affected by FC card configuration changes If all the paths in a mounted disk become hidden when an FC card is hot replaced unmount the disk Then execute PHP After PHP has been executed a device name mismatch may occur FC card replacement procedure The procedure for replacing only a faulty FC card without replacing other peripherals is as follows For the PRIMEQUEST 1800E perform operations from the PSA Web UI 1 Make the necessary preparations Stop access to the faulty FC card by stopping applications or by other such means 1 Log in as the system administrator root 103 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 2 Execute the following command to check the running status of the ServerView RAID service sbin service aurad status Display example when the service is running Checking for ServerView RAID Manager amDaemon pid XXX is running XXX indicates the process ID Display example when the service is stopped Checking for ServerView RAID Manager amDaemon is stopped 3 If
230. e SVS function see the SVS manual 1 6 3 Remote operation BMC Supported Web browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6 Service Pack 1 or later Mozilla FireFox version 3 or later Required Java Runtime Environment JRE 1 4 2 10 or later Notes For a terminal whose operating system is Windows Vista or Windows 7 set UAP User Account Protection to Disable For video redirection text console redirection or remote storage a connection may not be established if the network is connected via a proxy In such cases change the browser setting to avoid network connection via the proxy To start the video direction or text console redirection function with Internet Explorer click the mouse while holding down the Control key Even if the following message is displayed click the mouse while holding down the Control key Message displayed on the status bar of Internet Explorer Pop up blocked To allow the pop up window to open click the mouse while holding down the Ctrl key With FireFox you can establish a connection simply by clicking the mouse If java net SocketException Malformed reply from SOCKS server occurs when you attempt to establish a video redirection connection make the following browser setting For Internet Explorer 1 Select Tools Internet Options Connection tab LAN Settings Proxy Server Advanced 2 Uncheck Use the same proxy server for all protocols 3 Clear the Socks fi
231. e Supported ee Text console redirection Supported a S o o Display of partition configuration information and partition status Partition status display number of Supported CPUs memory size power status Partition information display OS Supported information Configuration hardware list Supported hardware inventory Download of PSA acquisition Supported configuration and PSA status Export Batch download of PSA logs ee o o Supported MMB user account control MMB user account setting and Supported Supported display MMB login user display Supported Supported Server management network settings Setting of MMB date time and time Supported Supported ae zone 307 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Function MMB MMBCLI UEFI PSA Web PSA CLI Web UI SVS CLI MMB time synchronization NTP Supported setting MMB management LAN setting Supported Supported Supported LAN oor between PSA and Supported a cee elem Co nine Sos i revor occore sere sorra _ ST S N sd or Remote Server Psst ooo user Supported a RMCP Access control Access control setting Supported supported fT Alarm E Mail setting Supported MMB network status display Supported command Maintenance Batch firmware update Supported Supported o a MMB configuration information Supported save and restore
232. e Systemwalker Centric Manager PRIMERGY PRIMEQUEST Administration Guide Remarks 363 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX J Systemwalker Centric Manager Linkage For an operations management server PRIMERGY whose operating system is Windows the Solaris OS or Linux the MMB icon will not appear though there is no problem with monitoring When the MMB node has been registered through detection the following phenomena may occur The virtual IP address of the MMB is recognized as an independent node and registered as a separate node from the physical IP address The representative interface of the node is registered not with the physical IP address of the MMB but with its virtual IP address The node icon represents a general computer not the MMB In these cases delete the node and or change the properties to change the machine type to MMB and the representative interface to the physical IP address Then select Policy Distribute Policy In the Distribute Policy window select Apply Immediately Then click the OK button For a single MMB configuration After registering an MMB node on the Systemwalker console you can monitor problem events SNMP traps from the MMB of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series hardware Since only one MMB is used register one MMB node to monitor the MMB The MMB node registration procedure is as follows 1 In the Systemwalker console window select Edit from the fu
233. e attempt will be rejected Console redirection already in use The PRIMEQUEST 1800E with integrated firmware version SA11031 or later displays the following message for any attempt to establish a text console redirection connection that would exceed the maximum number The PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 irrespective of the integrated firmware version would display the following message Console redirection already in use User xx xx xx xx is currently connected If needed the current user can be disconnected Do you really want to force disconnect current user yes no XX XX XX Xx IP address of the current connection If yes is entered the currently connected user is switched and the display goes to the Text Console Redirection window If no is entered the display returns to the Main Menu window The operating conditions for BMC installation of individual BMC functions is described below 20 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation Operating environment settings You need to make the appropriate settings for video redirection remote storage and text console redirection for your network environment In the Console Redirection Setup window of the MMB set the IP address and subnet mask and set enable or disable for video redirection remote storage and text console redirection For details on how to configure the MMB see 1 3 6 Console Redirection Set
234. e d bonding conf in the etc modprobe d directory After specifying the target configuration file add the setting for the newly created bonding interface alias bondY bonding lt Add bondY Name of the newly added bonding interface You can specify options of the bonding driver in this file Normally the BONDING_OPTS line in each ifcfg bondY file is used Options can be specified to the bonding driver Activate the added interface Execute the following command to activate the interface Activate all the necessary interfaces The activation method depends on the configuration For a single NIC interface Execute the following command to activate the interface Activate all the necessary interfaces sbin ifup ethx For the bonding configuration For a SLAVE interface added to an existing bonding configuration execute the following command to incorporate it into the bonding configuration Example bondY is the bonding interface name and ethX is the name of the interface to be incorporated sbin ifenslave bondY ethX For a newly added bonding interface with a SLAVE interface execute the following command to activate the interfaces You need not execute the ifenslave command individually for the SLAVE interface sbin ifup bondy 171 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 6 3 Removing PCI Cards This section describes
235. e getopsa see 4 4 Command for Collecting PSA Data for Investigation getopsa in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN In VMware Use the command for collecting PSA data for investigation getopsa to collect the PSA investigation data You can also use the vm support command to collect OS investigation data For details on how to use getopsa see 4 4 Command for Collecting PSA Data for Investigation getopsa in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Tool Reference C122 E110EN Use the vm support command to execute the following command with root privileges lt Example gt vm support Remarks In VMware the core file which is output in var core is not automatically deleted We recommend deleting the core file after executing the vm support command as appropriate 11 2 10 SVmco related problems If a problem occurs in SVmco you can collect the SVmco data for investigation by using the following procedure Remarks SVimco is provided with the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 Use Primecollect hardware software information collection command for SVS to collect the system information along with the SVmco data for investigation For details on how to use Primecollect see the ServerView Suite PrimeCollect User Guide Note that if you need to collect only the SVmco data for investigation such as when instructed by SupportDesk use the command for collecting SVmco data for investigation getosvmco instead Fo
236. e power off of all partitions or power off in units of partitions 3 Powering off a partition by a scheduled operation You can power off partitions by a scheduled operation automatic operation function Registering the power off time in advance by using the scheduled operation function enables automatic power off in units of partitions 9 2 4 Partition power off unit The possible power off units depend on how a partition is powered off as shown below For details on operation permissions i e privileges for the partition power off operation see 1 1 Web UI Menus in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN TABLE 9 2 Power off methods and units Power off method Power off unit Power off unit Remarks All partitions Single a Note In the following cases confirm the details according to 11 2 Troubleshooting If the error recurs contact your sales representative or a field engineer Before making contact confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the main unit Until the problem is solved do not execute Reset or Force Power Off on the partition 226 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control When Power Off Reset or Force Power Off is executed on the partition or when the partition is shut down from the operating system Status on the MMB Web UI information area changes to Error
237. e text console redirection After terminating the WebBIOS or after rebooting or powering on off the partition make the connection and then use text console redirection For details on how to use the WebBIOS see the MegaRAID SAS Software the MegaRAID SAS Device Driver Installation and the Modular RAID Controller Installation Guide 351 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions G 8 NIC Network Interface Card Note the following precautions on mounting of a NIC network interface card Notes We recommend specifying the members of teaming between LANs of the same type We recommend teaming between cards of the same type in the onboard LAN If the teaming is specified with different types of LAN the scaling function on the receive side may be off because of differences in the scaling function Consequently the balance of receive traffic may not be optimized but this is not a problem for normal operation Depending on the Intel PROSet version used at the time of teaming configuration a warning may be output about scaling on the receive side being disabled for the above described reasons In this event simply click the OK button For details on the scaling function on the receive side or other precautions see the help for Intel PROSet or check the information at Device Manager Properties of the target LAN Details Receive Side Scaling For the WOL W
238. e the leading digits filled with zeros The actual slot numbers do not include the zeros in the leading digits 3 Power off the PCI slot Confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for the target slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the slot number confirmed in step 2 is shown at lt slot number gt in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt To disable a PCI card and make it ready for removal write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out echo 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power This concurrently removes the device associated with the relevant adapter from the system Note Be sure to manipulate the power supply from the operating system 4 Physically remove the target card 5 Perform the necessary post processing If you stopped any other application in step 1 restart it too as needed 6 3 4 Network card removal procedure Network card referred to below as NIC removal using hot plugging needs specific processing before and after PCI slot power on or power off Its procedure also includes the common PCI card removal procedure The procedure describes operations where a single NIC is configured as one interface It also describes cases where multiple NICs are bonded together to configure one interface bonding
239. eb User Interface Operations in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN NTP client function setting on the MMB In the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series the MMB acts as an NTP client to ensure synchronization with external NTP servers For details on time synchronization with external NTP servers see 7 2 Configuring NTP in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN For details on how to synchronize the time on each partition operating system see the operating system manual For details on management using MMBs see 4 2 Management by the MMB in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series General Description C122 B022EN For details on how to use MMBs see 3 3 4 Logging in to the MMB in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 18 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation For details on management using PSAs see 4 3 Management by PSA in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series General Description C122 B022EN For details on the PSA operating conditions and use see the section about PSA settings in Chapter 5 Work after Operating System Installation PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 or Chapter 6 Work after Operating System Installation PRIMEQUEST 1800E in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN Note PSA is provided only with the PRIMEQUEST 1800E In the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 SVS provides the management function of PSA For details on th
240. eceseeeeeseeeseeereees 268 Alarm LED on the front panel of the device 266 ASR Automatic Server Restart Control window 239 Automatic Partition Restart Conditions eeeeee 203 Available internal I O ports and the quantities 347 B Backing Up and Restoring Configuration Information 218 Backup Restore MMB Configuration window 221 Backup and ReStore seesceeececseceeececeeeeeeeceneeenaeeesees 217 Backup BIOS Configuration window see 219 BlueScreenTimeout setting Configuration tab 51 BlueScreenTimeout setting Misc settings 51 Buttons available in the remote storage list window 38 Buttons in the USB 2 0 USB 1 1 selection dialog box 41 C Case where another user has already established a video redirection COMNECTION seeeceeececsseceeeeecseceeeeecenaeeeeees ae Case where the user who established the later connection selects Full control Mode eee eeseceeeesseceneeceseeeneeeenes 28 Changing the password for text console redirection input 30 Changing the password for text console redirection telnet COTMECHION ccceceeeeececeessececsneeeceaeeeceeeeeecseceeceesseeeenenaes 29 Collecting Maintenance Data 0 0 ee eee eee eeeeeeeees 278 Command pull down Menu cceceeeeeeeseeeceteeeeeneers 32 Commands in the Text Console Redirection window 32 Common Hot Plugging Proc
241. ect the session 2 Use the iscsiadm command to confirm that the target session has been activated You can confirm the activation of sessions on multipath products using DM MP 1 or ETERNUS multidriver 2 1 Write down the DM MP display contents at the session activation 2 See the ETERNUS Multipath Driver User s Guide For Linux 121 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 5 2 Hot Addition of PCI Cards This section describes the PCI card addition procedure with the PCI Hot Plug function The procedure includes common steps for all PCI cards and the additional steps required for a specific card function or driver Thus the descriptions cover both the common operations required for all cards e g power supply operations and the specific procedures required for certain types of card For details on addition of the cards not described in this section see the respective product manuals 2 1 Common addition procedures for all PCI cards Performing the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI card type Confirming the installation of the Hot Plug driver See Confirming the installation of the PCI Hot Plug driver Confirming that the PCI slot power is off See Powering on and off PCI slots Adding a PCI card Powering on a PCI slot See Powering on and off PCI slots nn BP WN Performing the required oper
242. ection window Menus cccsccccecceseecteeeeencasdecttdee snes shecsneeeseesdaeetnneeseshsieetieeeseerseectens 23 TABLE 1 9 Video Redirection window DURONS c2cfcectiaccecdeecctestivecdevectiaen eecdceeut sata vbedevectiaan cence eeit data veedeeesttaan tee 25 TABLE 1 10 Video redirection MWWCTIONS icc cecccccsesseccsczcneeedsccexcsaehebesccnecvabsdeneadessvadbeeecuaanestonsctecauedeesnsdensvrsieeens 26 TABLE 1 11 Comection persistence TNS ssrin iernii kaii aeaiia aN aaae baba cdesueh aaa Eaa AEE Ra 28 TABLE 1 12 Commands in the Text Console Redirection WINdOW ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeesteeeeeeeeaaeees 32 TABLE 1 13 Buttons available in the remote storage list WINGOW sssssssssssssssissssssrnnsssssnnnnssrnnnnnsininnnnnnnnnnnnnnnt 38 TABLE 1 14 Items in the remote storage selection WINKOW ccceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeneeeees 39 TABLE 1 15 Supporied storage YPES sirrini saait radies saka iaia aai ia a aaa aa a aiaa aE a naa 40 TABLE 1 16 Buttons in the USB 2 0 USB 1 1 selection dialog bOX sssssesssssesossnssssnsessensssnnnosssnnssnnnssennnerennn 41 TABLE 3 1 Par tion configuration riles C0MPEnerntE icccececfescccceenedessccetecs adika anai a aana aana 45 TABLE 3 2 Notes on specific connections in switching to a Reserved SB asssssssesssrreesssrissrrrnessreessrrssrrenes 57 TABLE 3 3 Mirroring operations by model and configuration ssssseeeeessrrnneeersrsrnnnnusereenuneenennnnn
243. ectory for this slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the slot number is shown at lt slot number gt location in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt Note lt BUS number gt and lt slot number gt are both four digit decimal values Here lt BUS number gt is information added to the slot number for descriptive purposes The operational target directory is defined uniquely with lt slot number gt Confirm that the PCI card in the slot is enabled or disabled by displaying the power file contents in this directory cat sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power When displayed 0 means disabled and 1 means enabled Powering off a PCI slot You can power off a PCI slot through an operation on the file confirmed in Checking the power status of a PCI slot To disable a PCI card and make it ready for removal write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out cho 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power This concurrently removes the device associated with the relevant adapter from the system Note Be sure to manipulate the power supply from the operating system Restarting the ServerView RAID service If the ServerView RAID service was stopped before the start of h
244. edawhs ciseeoediwaeees 185 Ftd PACU G SIO N E nected E niece eet eee eee erent 186 TANG HO PIROGO acest x cscisat cates cn she cus eectsa a E a E E aa 187 7 31 Hot plugging a NIC incorporated into tearing seiiissiisitsiaiissuninaniiiinasiarsaaniaiii annaia 187 782 Hot plugging a nonmredundani NIG ox cccccetcccsocceesscsceasceseesseeseasuceeesacecasecseeegeceesiecnevsecssanaccneesaecteasncnees 192 Taa NG addition Moce cro aaaea bocce tas cede deepened a a A aaa nti Aaaa a AEE 194 TA FOG OR Hor PRIDNI rosenn a a a as 195 7 4 1 Hot plugging an FC card incorporated with the ETERNUS multipath driver neeese 195 FB FO earo addon CON seca cecal eh eaten rade saaien iaa iaaa aaa aaa iiano 199 7 5 Hot Replacement Frocedure for SCSI irian anaid aa naaa EEKAN E AVRA a TRASTE RE TEANAS RAG 200 7 5 1 Confirming the incorporation of a card with MPD sssssssssssessssssssrnnssrnssssnssrensssrnsosnnnernnsssnnssnennsennnens 200 xvi C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Contents 752 Disgonnectng PU as cicsscs faze ele aatite sneak svn vave leaded eyencensate iadaa daada eaaa iadaaa iania aeania 212 S52 Wicorporating a card wih MPD cso eae ile ia endian na aaa 215 CHAPTER 8 Backup ahd RGSIONe i 0essinde evince elisa Hated letters 217 8 1 Backing Up and Restoring Configuration Information ccccceceeceeeeneeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeneeess 218 8 1 1 Backing up and restoring UEFI configuration information cccecec
245. edure for PCI Cards 184 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and REMOVall n e r E a a ede 44 Component Mounting Conditions eens 337 Component removal conditions ee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees TI Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and IPFOCECULES lt kitece verses fesievncvess ars EEE TEE es 241 Configuring and Checking Log Information 296 Configuring Systemwalker Centric Manager linkage 363 Confirmation of interface NAMES cece eeeeeeeeeeeetees 160 Connection configuration for remote storage 0 37 Connection configuration for video redirection 21 Connection diagram of text console redirection 30 Connection persistence tiMe cee eeceeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeteee 28 Controller Properties window in the WebBIOG ate Correspondence between bus addresses and interface names 153 379 Correspondence between functions and interfaces 305 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot NUMBERS 25 sssi cise ssteisctevteessee edhe cenliasteseeeeticeeseacte 32l Correspondence between physical locations of SB internal I O controllers and BUS numbets eceeeceeereeeseeeeeees 320 PW re sac E E E EE E ET 338 D Device Details WIndOW cccccceesseeessececeeseeeeeseeeees 206 Device Manager window 188 190 191 192 194 Devices WiIndOW neiise reinen 212
246. eeeaaeeseeeeeeteaeenteaees 278 TABLE 11 8 Setting and display items in the System Event Log Filtering Condition window 006 280 TABLE 11 9 Setting and display items in the System Event Log Detail window 00 cceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteees 282 TABLE 11 10 Memory dump types and SIZ S uo eeeeeeeeceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeaaaeseaaeeesaaeseeeaeeesaaeesseeeeessaaeeesnes 286 TABLE AT FUNGINE arinari aiaia N cabinet esis dali aan ca Miia 300 TABLE A 2 Correspondence between functions and interfaces ccccecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeesenaeeetennees 305 TABLE A 3 Management network specifications eccceeeccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaaeceeeneeeseaaaeseeaeeeeeeaaeeessaeeeeeees 309 TABLE 1 External systemi merate nce caec hese cee cet etieeccsdeneectensadensitedabenetvendiadsassepsdaadaaeeiedabdalaeatsdiadecaseeataaece 316 TABLE C2 External MMB INBMAGES vtec cinch iets ected Sees aiak aE Eaa aaa a aa aaa 317 TABLE C 3 Other extemal interfaces ccc c ccccccecccecsscccecsteceedeceeesccneceseeeeseccesencsbestedecssedenssabancceeenassdesneaenniareds 318 TABLE D 1 Correspondence between physical locations of SB internal I O controllers and BUS numbers 320 TABLE D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers cccceeeeees 321 TABLE F 1 Power LED Alarm LED and Location LED oo icecccecccceeccesceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseesaeaeeeaegeeeeseueeeeees 325 TORR F2 oe Ore LED 2 erctess e
247. eeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeees 175 FIGURE 7 1 Device Manager wihhOw 50 2 0ccccecceeecsessctcceetsccsetengeedtessnneneenslesdecsscendeseeeneadecabaensanestinnniees 188 FIGURE 22 RAMIng 1a 220th tithes ei hee ee adden ae dee 188 FIGURE 7 3 Adapter Teaming properties ececeeccceeeecceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeaeeeeeaaaeseaeeeeeaaeesesaeeeseaaaeseeeeeseaaaeee 189 FIGURE 7 4 Device Manager WINdOW 00 0 0 cea ctu ee abe and dtd aged ai aie needs 190 FIGURE Fa reaming taD sae nce aces cpa cees satsitc eioen eda saan eika iiaiai naan iii a aia iea 191 FIGURE 7 6 Device Manager WNQOW aiiora nanena annaia aan ale het ea ee edie 191 FIGURE 7 7 Device Manager WindOW niriisrcsiiiicecsniiiiniiniairinaeeinienindiia nieis iiiad niidid ndiii 192 FIGURE 7 8 Device Manager Window si ecid e cc ccteiee ceva aE a E aaa aaa aiai 194 FIGURE 7 9 PCI Devices WINGOW o cesroiiieceniidpdniiieniai eradan iaaii iaai iaaiiai edk 195 FIGURE 7 10 Fibre Channel WOW iisisti a a a a ae iaaa Taai 196 FIGURE A11 AAS occi nornaneesina d wabtsedasnneeai ts ice it efeaas ladleydaanzons Kaea iaiaeiaeiaa 196 FIGURE 7 12 ETERNUS Mulipath Manager ociscene aaa aa a eaa iva 197 FIGURE 7 13 ETERNUS Multipath Manager cciiiiiiistiisiorisiniisdirakiniiididaasiirsniiidananaeini idaan iniii iaiia 199 FIGURE 714 PCI Devices VInNdOW 2 2 62 ea Anita ee ee AAA EAEE 200 FIGURE 7 15 Ethernet Controller Window cccccccceeeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeaaeesegeeeeeeeaaaeesee
248. eeeeeeeeneeeseaaeeeneeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseseeeeseaaaeeee 108 FIGURE 5 2 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface cccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeaeeeee 109 FIGURE 5 3 Required interface recovery example 1 o ccceeecccecsseceeeeceeeeaeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeaaeeenaeeseeaaaesseeeeseaaaeenaaes 115 FIGURE 5 4 Required interface recovery example 2 oo eecceeccececsseeeeeeceeeeaeeseeneeeeaeeeeeaaeeseaeeseeaaeesseneeseaaaeeneaes 115 FIGURE 5 5 Example of single NIG interface ci ccc cde cies ceccces snes cx eesdenvas se neniani aaen naaid iaaii iiaa 120 FIGURE 5 6 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface ccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeeee 126 FIGURE 5 7 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee 137 FIGURE 6 1 Fibre Channel window example cit sesce coc ts acecerss vaasceuecenvaseegeens seecareeesseeedeant aai aanpak aeai 150 XX C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Figures FIGURE 6 2 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface eeeccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 151 FIGURE 6 3 Example of single NIC interlace soeieto aaia aiaa aa aaan aaia 162 FIGURE 6 4 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface sssssseeeseeesesreeeesresssrrrnereresrnssees 167 FIGURE 6 5 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface cceeccceeeeeeeeee
249. eeees 2 External system interfaces 316 F Failure Report Sheet essisisesresireeereisicensrossss 376 377 FC Card Hot Plugging eee eee cee ceecesecesecsseesseeaes 195 Fibre Channel window ccccccccsssccecesseeessneeceeseeeees 196 Fibre Channel window example 06 108 150 Files and tools to prepare ee ceseeeeeeseecsseeeeeeeaes 362 Firmware Updates i i cs5scsesciseascssessvecsscssabsasnbsteossoantens 297 Forced disconnection of text console redirection 1 33 Forced disconnection of text console redirection 2 36 Function List sessen aria Eana e is 300 FUNCIONS eerte eaa eae an a E EEEE EE EERE E 300 Functions provided by the MMB CLI 245 Functions provided by the MMB Web UL 242 Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series 299 Functions provided by the PSA CLI eee 247 Functions provided by the PSA Web UL ee 246 G General tab in the ServiewView RAID Managet 373 GSPB port numbeTS eee ee eee cess ceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeensees 313 H Hardware address description examples 154 PIBADY Wale isc sede ne EE E 196 MID DBDs E E E tines cota 326 HDD status and LED display eee eee eee eeeeeeeees 326 High availability Configuration 48 Home window in the WebBIOS eeeesceeeeeeeseceeeees sal Hot Addition of PCI Cards cccceceeseceseeeeeeees 122 164 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks ee eee eeeeeeeeeee 85 Ho
250. eeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 218 8 1 2 Backing up and restoring MMB configuration information cccccceseeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 221 8 1 3 Saving PSA management information eeeeceecceceeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeseaaeeseeaaaeeeeeaaaeeeeaaeeeeenaaeeneeas 222 CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control ccesessscececeeesseseeceeeeeeeessseeaaaeeeesesssseaaaeess 223 9 7 Powering OWOT ihe Whole Systemi ccccics ccheceecctsseecgensntssssecedswesestececsegsssnedastenssdeceesulsiseadecsevashdeeededeneets 224 9 2 Powering Onand ON PONE siisii naie aaa aaa Aa aaae Aa E EARE SARA NAASE anaes 225 9 2 1 Fowarmg on A pam 0 eens tree eee cerer ere recer Pere cre PrP er ee ceer eres errr rer erecerreree cree ere rcerrrrer tree 225 se FE NUN ONT NE a acceded A E ne eee teats ceeded eee 225 9 23 UR MICE OU a ve ANON 2c dacs Saree cesta a R REE A E a 226 924 PARLIN power oi UME iaia ace eaaa doen aaa AAE an ends a a A AAE AAAA aa aa EEEE 226 9 2 5 Partition power on and power off procedures ssssssssssssssrnossrnsssrnssstnnsorrnnsrtensstnnnesnnntnnensetnnent 227 9 2 6 Powering on a parition by using the MMB ce cect ce ee cece heme kinenan enana A hanes KARERE 227 9 2 7 Controlling partition startup by using the MMB ssssssssssssseesssesssssssssssssnsssnnsssnnnsnnsssnssnnnnsnnnssennernnnens 228 9 2 8 Checking the partition power status by using the MMB ccccceecssseceeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeee
251. eees 21 FIGURE 1 7 Video Redirection window in SA11071 or earlier and SB11062 or earlier oo eeeeeeeeeeneteees 22 FIGURE 1 8 Video Redirection window in SA11081 or later and SB11071 or later cc csssseeeeeeeeeeeeenneees 23 FIGURE 1 9 Selecting Full control mode View only mode cccceseccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaaeeseeeeeeaaaeseeeeeeeaaeeeenaees 27 FIGURE 1 10 Case where another user has already established a video redirection connection 06 27 FIGURE 1 11 Case where the user who established the later connection selects Full control mode 28 FIGURE 1 12 Changing the password for text console redirection telnet CONNECTION cceeeeessseeeeeeeeenees 29 FIGURE 1 13 Changing the password for text console redirection input cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetenees 30 FIGURE 1 14 Connection diagram of text console redirection ccccescceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaaeeesseeeeeeeees 30 FIGURE 1 15 Text Consoles Redirection wnat ciiai iisisti aiaa naaa aana Eaa extends 31 FIGURE 1 16 Command pulkdown mMenu seaseccecsaccdcncececceedeicesassaeceeeiunshiestsence duis xi sasce uaaa aiaiai aea 32 FIGURE 1 17 Text console redirection authentication WINdOW 0 cccceceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeaeeseeeeeeessaaeeesaaes 33 FIGURE 1 18 telnet connection for text console redirection cceeecceeeescceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaaeeseeeeeeeeaaeeeseaeeeeeaees 33 FIGURE 1 19 telnet connection f
252. eeetaaeeeess 229 9 2 9 Powering off a partition by using the MMB c ccc cccccseceteeeceesnsessceeeesnsesateceesteessseesesedensdessessbensiess 230 ga Scheduled CIPS orliaka iann raat iea aaa dada ia nega aen ana a tin aE ERENER 232 9 3 1 Powering on a partition by a scheduled operation esssssssseeeseeernnneeeennnnnnnnnnenrnennnneenennnnnnnnnnnnenen 232 9 3 2 Powering off a partition by a scheduled operation eessssssseeeseesrnnneneennnnnnnnnueurrennnnennnnnnnnnnnnnneeen 232 9 3 3 Relationship between scheduled operations and the power recovery function ssessessesseesse 232 9 3 4 Scheduled Operation support condone eccccc cscaccccccceavane cee scctbabesacececchs teaancdecesthbaanetensaceeseaecteaetensiaas 233 9 4 Automatic Partition Restart Conditions 0 0 0 ccececceeecceeeesceeeeeeceeeesaeeseaeeeeseaaeeseaaeeeseaaaeeeaaaeseeeeaeeseaaeeeses 235 9 4 1 Setting automatic partition restart conditons 2c cc2c ccc ssceeetcccceced see caeeececekbisaeeseeversensteaaseeeeueievinsdes 235 9 5 Power Failure and Power ROCOVORY so i occccc sascecceceecsaseccccecesaveencceeseaseeeseuesuvsdacseccede aueensceervnenedeccenevesese 237 9 5 1 Seitings M EG Of POWEr IAE racie te eticcsten secede aa ecee ees aaie aaia aa EEKE EE E D 237 9 5 2 Settings for power WACO OIG reiris iinei dy sy sececsucigs ohagencesdectaesacesanneneessacuasnereees 237 9 Remote SRUidown WIndows iscstiisrairaie aeaa Gece cet aaaea AEE aAA aa TARERE 238 9 6 1 Pre
253. eeneeeseaeeeseaees 236 TABLE SF Power eCOvory pOIGY orea R EEEE EEEE REE EE A ESS 237 TABLE 10 1 Functions provided by the MMB Web UI cece ceeeeceeenceceeeeneeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeseeaeeeeeessennseeenensenaaees 242 TABLE 10 2 Functions provided Dy the MMB OLI piirasid aiaa aaa ei aa Eaa needa 245 TABLE 10 3 Functions provided by the PSA Web Ul ssssssssssesssssssssrsssrnnessnnsssessstnssssnnstsnnnnnnntsnnnssnnnsecnnnens 246 TABLE 104 Functions provided by the PSA GL sicir tennata aneian ien Haveecenesanctuaeeeseecnein AEKA anaa 247 TABLE 10 5 Monus provided by tho UEF eccscsicccccscssseide ceveecavenccenenssien ianea ERRERA ANARA EENEN EARRAK ERS 248 TABLE hi Logfile mMOaUOI iiis riea ana aaaea TRARA EARNE EE RAAE Aa eae es 255 TABLE 11 2 Operations that can be performed from the GUI of the partition seseesesessessssrneessernssseseessens 257 TABLE 11 3 Information managed by paiho sssini saa devcnceavsaceeescueteastecenensln seedatcus based enn baaa 257 xxiii C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Tables TABLE 114 Maintenance MORES oiii cs ccesccusadecinwececeans Koirieni ii iiidid aaae adani aroa iiia 259 TABLE 11 5 Maintenance mode MINCHONG onin se no ee alee aai nde eines 259 TABLE 11 6 Icons indicating the systemi status ccccceeeseceeecceeeeceeeeeaee senses ceeeaaeesaaeseeeaaeeseaaeseeneeeessaaeeesnes 267 TABLE 11 7 System problems and memory dump collection eee ee cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
254. efore the NIC replacement Also confirm that the relevant entries in the above described table were automatically added to the udev function rule file etc edev rules d 70 persistent net rules Note 157 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 12 13 14 The correspondence between the bus address and interface name may be different from that before NIC replacement In such cases just proceed with the work This is explained in step 13 Deactivate each newly created interface The interfaces created for the replacement NIC may be active because power is on to the PCI slot In such cases you need to deactivate them before changing the interface configuration file Execute the following command for all the interface names confirmed in step 11 Example ethO sbin ifconfig eth0 down Confirm the correspondence between the interface names before and after the NIC replacement From the interface information created before and after the NIC replacement in steps 2 and 11 confirm the correspondence between the interface names before replacement and the new interface names 1 Confirm the correspondence between the bus address and interface name on each line in the table created in step 2 2 Likewise confirm the correspondence between the bus addresses and interface names in the table created in step 11 3 Match the interface names to
255. eld For FireFox 1 Select Tools Options Network tab Connection Settings 2 Check Manual proxy configuration 3 Uncheck Use this proxy server for all protocols 19 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 4 Clear the SOCKS field When starting the WebBIOS of the RAID controller with an SAS array disk unit you cannot use text console redirection After terminating the WebBIOS or after rebooting or powering on off the partition make the connection and then use text console redirection For details on how to use the WebBIOS see the MegaRAID SAS Software the MegaRAID SAS Device Driver Installation and the Modular RAID Controller Installation Guide Maximum number of connections The following lists the maximum number of connections using the remote operation BMC function TABLE 1 7 Maximum number of connections using the remote operation function Video redirection Up to 2 users can be connected concurrently However only 1 user can perform operations The other user can only refer to information Text console redirection Only 1 user can be connected at any time Remote storage Up to 2 devices can be shared The PRIMEQUEST 1800E with an integrated firmware version earlier than SA11031 displays the following message for any attempt to establish a text console redirection connection that would exceed the maximum number Th
256. emoved Therefore the user can determine that SB c was removed from operating Partition R 84 C122 E108 10EN CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks This chapter describes hot replacement of hard disks This operation is supported only in Red Hat However the tasks described in 4 3 Replacing Hard Disks in a Hardware RAID Configuration are also supported in Windows The chapter describes only the procedures for the PRIMEQUEST 1800E For the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 contact the distributor where you purchased your product or your sales representative 4 1 Overview of Hard Disk Hot Replacement 86 4 2 Adding Removing and Replacing Hard Disks 88 4 3 Replacing Hard Disks in a Hardware RAID Configuration E eerre rn emer eer ree rete 95 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks 4 1 Overview of Hard Disk Hot Replacement PSA PRIMEQUEST 1800E has helpful functions for hot replacement of hard disks in partitions If you conclude a system maintenance agreement a certified service engineer will be responsible for replacing the hard disks PSA PRIMEQUEST 1800E provides functions that control disk LEDs and display the disk status when a hardware failure is detected a disk is replaced or a disk is added Notes This operation does not apply to RAID devices For details on how to replace a hard disk of an array controller card see 4 3 Replacing Hard Disks in a
257. en eee ee a a E dete inated cides 326 TABLE eS acca es ect etie tanss oe connie sana adatsyatanscecSeh va dna haetnnasdaeeesaetilegeiaded ieveeisd tnedsinlaceonsianl Geleaada 326 TABLE F HDD LEDS crinii nonien i AT E A A ie sh eee Line ane Aad 326 TABLE FS HDD status and LED Gis lay scciiiieirecirrisiceunnoriniietaniiinn carrie nida iiaeiai iaia raai in aaaea aiii 326 TABLE FO POILExpress card slot LEDS occrnciccrmisnia andaan ney deeded 327 TABLE F 7 PCI Express card status and LED display 2 2 c ceecccceecceesceeessneedeeeceegattenevensessqeeeenaderdecedieseerees 327 TABLE FO DYDE LEDS canciata A ET E A AA R AER 327 TABLE F 9 DVDB device status and LED display 20 s cccccccececcccscteceesscctenceesseccceseessstencteenuistedcaseensiiees 328 TABLE Pet MME LEDS iiini ees eaves E A ase E a O AE een 328 TABLE F 11 MMB device status and LED display cceccecceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaaeseeeaeeeteeneeeeeeaaes 329 TABLE hs IIB OS Per pene ete eee geet acer peer a a eaaa a A 329 TABLE F 73 Power status and PSU LED display cccccccc c cccssccccseecdesteceeeeaueced exsueedesaastendened devseedenasssivaedeeeesaacee 329 TPR PITIT FPU asa cata n ade ieee Seat acs Honea aches toned eed ate ese date E mite eure 330 TABLE F 15 Power status and IO_PSU LED display 2 cc cccccccsccessscseceeessessanccceeeeasedsactecesadecsnereeeeaeeniinee 330 TEELE FAP EEDE eect csecerietleet aeeis doe adnate aati iets oaen id nerd aided aade
258. en set for one partition and allocated to other partitions the Reserved SB with the highest SB number in a partition that is powered off takes priority for 51 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal switching Example 4 If all the partitions are powered on the Reserved SB with the highest SB number takes priority for switching Example 5 SB 0 SB 1 SB 3 Partition 0 Partition 1 FIGURE 3 5 Example 1 a Example with two SBs set as Reserved SBs in two partitions SB 0 and SB 1 fail simultaneously i it SB 0 SB 1 SB 2 SB 3 Partition 0 Partition 1 Pt i e i see aa 1 itchi No switching to the Reserved SB FIGURE 3 6 Example 1 b Example with one SB set as the Reserved SB in two partitions SB 0 and SB 2 fail simultaneously SB SB 1 SB 3 Partitions C X 1 No switching to the Reserved SB FIGURE 3 7 Example 2 Example of multiple SBs failing in a partition 52 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal SB 0 SB 1 SB 3 Partition o Partition 1 i et ke SB 0 SB 2 SB 3 Partition 0 Partition 1 il o a tl K ebl a Q C JJ m w e gt m x D 3 gez e 3 Example with multiple free SBs 2 and 3 set as Reserved SBs for Partition 0 SB 3 Partition 0 Pon
259. eneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeeenenaeeeenaas 371 FIGURE K S Home window ii The WebBIOS 2 cccic0 nae nna aa aai aii aa 371 FIGURE K 6 Controller Properties window in the WeDBIOS 00 0 ececeeeeseeeceeneeeececeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeaaeeeesaaeeeeaas 372 FIGURE K 7 General tab in the ServiewView RAID Manager cccceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeseaeeeesiaaeeeeaas 373 xxii C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Tables Tables TABLE 1 1 External network names and functions ocsiscccccccccsscceceseecceecenedesecseasesasauezenceconegateezsceqnesussdeenseneaiensenstie 2 TABLE 1 2 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server IP addresses set from the MMB 4 TABLE 1 3 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server set from the operating system in a partition sid naaieaaevenahaeeaitets A tie sictedsntdeta N AE Safe Saba E E T N E vase ae eeatees 6 TABLE 1 4 Restrictions on the management LAN ccceeeeeeeeceeeeee cere eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeseseaeeeeeeseeseneeenee 9 TABLE 1 5 Parts of the management LAN configuration s s ccccteteees cccecsesacecicivisceedneees tie deverexeeditenacecr inne ate 11 TABLE 1 6 Maintenance LANIAEMCS LAN ceicicecscccissccesececnsnsadectesnsnteeseccensvssenesccaneysieseqsauesapeadecesatideaearsevtatenees 16 TABLE 1 7 Maximum number of connections using the remote operation function cceeeeeeetteeeeeetteeeees 20 TABLE 1 8 Video Redir
260. ent LAN ZE cardjcard B Maintenance LAN 10B C Operation LAN GSPB 1 Onboard 2 GbE SB _ Partition 3 ret 3 MMBi 1 Standby USER USER REMCS CE port port port port FST osc Operations management server SW redundancy Redundancy by teaming GLS or equivalent Disabled on the standby side FIGURE 1 1 External network configuration The following table lists the external networks The letters A B and C correspond to those in FIGURE 1 1 External network configuration TABLE 1 1 External network names and functions A Management LAN MMB Web UI CLI operations Operations management server Text console redirection Video redirection PRIMECLUSTER linkage 2 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation Systemwalker linkage ServerView linkage REMCS connection Maintenance LAN FST CE terminal connection REMCS connection c Operation LAN production LAN For job operations The following diagram shows the functions of external networks for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series gt o Bpm Integrated management software Server integration linkage e g Systemwalker management SVS baa a Dial up BE Sy BST Switch Web browser terete software PRIMEQUEST 1000 series a CON Serial BIOS firmware FST Web browser terminal software
261. enu in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 236 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 9 5 Power Failure and Power Recovery In the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server you can set the system operations during a power failure and power recovery in units of cabinets Make these settings from the MMB Web UI 9 5 1 Settings in case of power failure For use together with a UPS you can instruct the partitions that are powered on to shut down after the detection of a power failure For that instruction you can set Shutdown Delay after UPS detects AC Failure 0 to 9999 seconds 9 5 2 Settings for power recovery For use together with a UPS you can make the following settings for the power recovery detected after a power failure The default is Restore TABLE 9 7 Power recovery policy Always Off Continues the power off status after a power recovery Always On Powers on the partition after a power recovery irrespective of the power failure status Restore Returns to the state at the power failure occurrence time This powers on the partitions that were on when the power failure occurred It keeps the power off status for the partitions that were off when the power failure occurred Schedule Sync Automatically powers on the partition if the power failure occurred during working hours according to the partition time and scheduled operation setting
262. eplaced have been replaced remove the save directory created in step 6 by executing the following command rmdir etc sysconfig network scripts temp 19 Execute the higher level application processing required after NIC replacement Perform the necessary post processing such as starting an application or restoring changed settings for the operations performed for the higher level applications in step 3 6 1 5 Hot replacement procedure for iSCSI NIC When performing hot replacement of NICs used for iSCSI connection use the following procedures 6 1 1 Overview of common replacement procedures for all PCI cards 161 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 6 1 2 PCI card replacement procedure in detail 6 1 4 Network card replacement procedure A supplementary explanation of the procedure follows Prerequisites for iSCSI NIC hot replacement The prerequisites for iSCSI NIC hot replacement are as follows The storage connection is established on a multipath using DM MP Device Mapper Multipath or ETERNUS multidriver EMPD To replace more than one iSCSI card one card at a time will be replaced A single NIC is configured as one interface FIGURE 6 3 Example of single NIC interface Work to be performed before NIC replacement For iSCSI NIC hot replacement be sure to follow the procedure below when performing Step 3 of the NIC
263. er 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Enabled for SP1 and later 1 Windows Server 2012 RHELS5 Disabled RHEL6 for Intel64 Enabled REELS or ine 1 In Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 x2APIC must be Disable if Hyper V is used 2 x2APIC must be Enable if SVIM V10 11 08 or later is used CPU mounting criteria Ina partition configured with one SB only one CPU can be mounted on the SB Ina partition configured with multiple SBs two CPUs must be mounted on the SB CPUs must be mounted starting from CPU 0 on the SB 338 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions An SB with no CPU mounted on it will cause an error 1800E2 1800E only The following lists the number of SBs and CPUs per partition for each model In a partition with only one SB installed the SB can have one or two CPUs mounted TABLE G 2 Numbers of SBs and CPUs per partition Partition configuration PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 1800E 1SB 2 SB 2 SB 3 SB 4SB Only supported for degraded CPUs in a configuration with 2 SBs 4 CPUs or more N A Not applicable An SB with only one CPU mounted is protected by the MMB firmware Web UI such that the SB cannot configure a partition that uses multiple SBs The protection function only works with the number of CPUs and takes into account unsupported CPUs and CPUs degraded by a hardware failure 339 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Admini
264. er gt _ lt slot number gt power This also installs the device associated with the relevant adapter on the system Note After power on you need to confirm that the card and driver are correctly installed The procedures vary depending on the card and driver specifications For the appropriate procedures see the respective manuals 5 2 3 FC card Fibre Channel card addition procedure The descriptions in this section assume that an FC card is being added Notes The FC card used for SAN boot does not support hot plugging This section does not cover configuration changes in peripherals e g UNIT addition or removal for a SAN disk device When adding the FC card via hot plugging you need to consider other matters in addition to the general hot plugging procedure The system restart after the failure addition removal or replacement of an FC card may change the device name dev sdX assigned to each disk of the SAN disk unit To prevent a device name mismatch of the disk of a SAN disk unit managed by PRIMECLUSTER GDS a preventive measure has been implemented To prevent a device name mismatch when directly accessing the disk of a SAN disk unit not registered with PRIMECLUSTER GDS use the by id name dev disk by id The by id name is not affected by FC card configuration changes FC card addition procedure The procedure for adding new FC cards and peripherals is as follows 1 Confirm that the PCI Hot Plug driver
265. erView RAID Manager window Confirm that Status for the hard disk is Operational If set as a spare disk The replacement hard disk automatically becomes a spare disk Then the Alarm LED of the hard disk goes out In the ServerView RAID Manager window confirm that Status for the hard disk is Global Hot Spare or Dedicated Hot Spare After the rebuild is complete a copyback operation may be performed 7 Exit ServerView RAID Manager 4 3 2 Hard disk preventive replacement This section describes the workflow for preventive replacement of a hard disk S M A R T predicted to fail For the RAID 0 configuration cold partition replacement 95 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks To replace a hard disk in the RAID 0 configuration apply cold partition maintenance The workflow is described below 1 Back up data in all the hard disks under the array controller card that are subject to preventive replacement 2 Start ServerView RAID Manager 3 In ServerView RAID Manager confirm the mounting location by selecting the hard disk that S M A R T predicted to fail 4 Check whether other hard disks are faulty If a hard disk is faulty replace it 5 Restart the partition Then start WebBIOS from the Boot Manager front page 6 In WebBIOS select the array controller card connected to the hard disk subject to preventive replacement Then execute Clear Config
266. erase all the data recorded on the hard disk on your own responsibility Furthermore if a software license agreement restricts the transfer of the software operating system and application software on the hard disk in the server or other product to a third party transferring the product without deleting the software from the hard disk may violate the agreement Adequate verification from this point of view is also necessary Support and service SupportDesk available only in Japan for a fee For stable system operation we recommend concluding our SupportDesk agreement which provides a maintenance and operation support service SupportDesk agreement customers receive a same day response service for hardware problems They are eligible for regular checkups remote notification of potential failure predictions and information on system problems Moreover they can avail themselves of other services such as troubleshooting support by phone for hardware and software problems and access to operation support information from a dedicated website for our customers For details see Product support on the SupportDesk webpage http jp fujitsu com solutions support sdk index html Product and service inquiries For all product use and technical inquiries contact the distributor where you purchased your product or a Fujitsu sales representative or systems engineer SE If you do not know the appropriate contact address for inquiries about the PRIM
267. erations from the Video Redirection window by using the keyboard and mouse 4 You can perform partition operations through the Java applet for video redirection 5 Exit video redirection The following shows an example of the Video Redirection window 0 x Extras Remote Storage Languages Preferences Help 1 ese ye or a oe arr erea e ee 2 a Computer s Recycle Bin pe esi FIGURE 1 7 Video Redirection window in SA11071 or earlier and SB11062 or earlier 22 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation a nr Ss Lae Fore ee r E This mimiis siil dirai Uke apime tu Cosel Lees ta big FIGURE 1 8 Video Redirection window in SA11081 or later and SB11071 or later The following lists the menus available in the Video Redirection window TABLE 1 8 Video Redirection window menus Virtual Keyboard Displays the virtual keyboard Refresh Screen Reloads the Partition pane Take Full Control Sets Full Control mode This item is enabled only in View Only mode Disconnects other users remote connections You can use this item in both Disconnect Session Full Control mode and View Only mode 23 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation Forcibly turns off and on the power irrespective of the
268. erforming the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI card type Confirming the installation of the Hot Plug driver See Confirming the installation of the PCI Hot Plug driver Confirming that the PCI slot power is off See Powering off a PCI slot Removing a PCI card a BW N eR Performing the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI card type Note This section describes instructions for the operating system and subsystems e g commands configuration file editing Be sure to refer to the respective product manuals to confirm the command syntax and impact on the system before performing tasks with those instructions The following sections describe card removal with the required instructions e g commands configuration file editing for the operating system and subsystems together with the actual hardware operations 5 3 2 PCI card removal procedure in detail This section describes operations that must be performed in the PCI card removal procedure Stopping the ServerView RAID service When hot removal of a PCI card is performed while the ServerView RAID service is running a system panic may occur For this reason before starting hot removal temporarily stop the ServerView RAID service by using the following procedure Note that this work is not required if you are using any of the following versions Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 8 or later Red Hat Enterprise L
269. ermine how the system is configured and deployed It includes a list of installed software programs operating system settings and event logs SSG and DSNAP are executed from the administrator command prompt For details on how to use them see the following references DSNAP README__JP TXT file in the operating system installation drive DSNAP folder SSG QSS acquisition tool Help for SSG Memory dump A memory dump is an exact copy of the memory contents at time of occurrence of a problem A memory dump is very useful in following cases The desktop screen is frozen Windows itself hangs during system operation For example the desktop screen freezes or you cannot operate the mouse or keyboard The responsiveness of the mouse or keyboard is too slow Performance deteriorates during system operation when the responsiveness of the mouse or keyboard is too slow For details on memory dump file settings see 11 4 4 Setting up the dump environment Windows To acquire memory dump select Partition and then the Power Control window of the MMB Web UI Specify NMI for the target partition Remarks Forced acquisition of a memory dump causes the server to stop Collection of a memory dump may take a long time depending on the environment 11 4 4 Setting up the dump environment Windows Memory dump is a standard operating system function in Windows However before you can acquire dumps you need to allocate an area for the
270. ersassaacdvadeaateascareatoe vias 325 Fie pomo LED oinen a Eea E ER EE e a aE Eara Eaa 325 PD E E E N E 326 FIANDO orecrioneidcnenp orin E a aaa ES 326 ALS OECS saig SOl auina ien aiai eaea iad a a iaa i Eee addaa rag 327 Fd DOB rconoir na a E a aa aa a a Eai 327 mara E e E E E E E taashes dawns eatnwnte deaadestagteais dane 328 aE e E A EE A E T 329 PASO POU sa aa Laie nevis Lest dena a A EE ae Na 329 FLED MENS LOCIS seriene ARE A 331 PACED IB iiis a aa aa aE a aran Se Aaa EE a eaea aaa ae SARA RASENE RAAE 332 APPENDIX G Component Mounting Gondilgns sscsiiss eisai aaka eaaa AEE 337 ENEP a E A E E A E E a A E 338 G2 TAA a E N E E E 340 G21 DIMM Moun ng SOCMIGNN irnia mionna aaa ia aaa iaaa iaaa EkarN 341 Gea DMN meuning AMINE Aricie nanne ananin iaa aaan Aaaa Ria EA ARANEAE RE AAAS ERAAN KE 342 G 3 PCI Card Mounting Conditions and Available Internal I O sssssssssssessseesssssssrnsssrnsssessrrnsssrnnssennssnnns 347 xviii C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Contents Cd Avdlable internal VO PONS ce sae ce dace cen sone bdseens sated dassildegedeceeteseedeaatladecdhsassieecesaateeensabecteheuaiareeyenteanea 347 Ga Legacy BIOS Compatibilty Coil c 0 nana aae date isan eee aai aaia 348 Coy PCI UMAR A A wh ened E E E E EE 349 GO instalation EMIONNENE icce anniina ania a a a eau aaia ii 350 ENEE UE CASI E E EE A E EE 351 G8 NIC N twork Interface Cald iiinn innii aa ees n aa dai aaa Waa A aaan 352 APPENDIX H Tree Str
271. eseeeeeeeaee 341 Relationship between DIMM size and mutual operability Within an SB ceeecesesseceesseececeeseneeecsseeeeeesseeeeeeeaee 340 Relationship between DIMM size and mutual operability WITHIN A P rt tOn ssrin ae eene ai 340 Relationship between scheduled operations and power TECOvVery MOdE is desiit ines seror rake ieee iee Rr a resorni ES 232 REMCS linkage cinencis e 262 Remote Shutdown Windows cccssssscceeessseteeeeees 238 Remote storage selection WindOW eeeeeseeeseeeeeees 39 Removing COMponents ssseseseeesserreesrerrerrrsrrreeresrrere 77 Removing PCI Cards ceeeceseeesesseeseeeseeeseeaes 132 172 Replaceable components and replacement conditions 61 Replacement notification messages of RAS Support Service 64 66 Replacing Components eee eeeeeeseecseeeeeeeeseeneeeees 61 Replacing Hard Disks in a Hardware RAID Configuration 95 Required interface recovery example 1 0 0 0 eee 115 Required interface recovery example 2 1 0 0 cee 115 Reserved SB settings after switching 84 Reserved SB settings before switching ceseeeee 82 Restore BIOS Configuration window c0c 220 Restore BIOS Configuration window partition selection Ppor sea eeoa nE rE PEE EE EEK EE REE EEE Er ERE EERE E EEI RE nre ER 220 Restore confirmation dialog bOX seeseeseeeereerereerereerees 222 Restrictions on the management LAN eee 9 S SB Home LBD ves ccc ie
272. ether the MMB is the active or standby MMB Location ID Indicates the MMB location 328 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX F Status Checks with LEDs The following table lists the LED indications for each status of the MMB device However it shows only the LED indications to be noted for each status A blank space indicates that the LED can be on or blinking TABLE F 11 MMB device status and LED display MMB status device status Location ID Alarm MMB startup is in progress Blinking The MMB has started normally On Ready status The MMB is the standby MMB LL The MMB is the active MMB ae The MMB is being located On or blinking The PSU comes equipped with the following LED TABLE F 12 PSU LED Power Alarm Green Orange Indicates whether there is AC input to each PSU whether there is an error in the PSU and the PSU on off status TABLE F 13 Power status and PSU LED display Power Alarm AC input is on and the PSU is off Blinking in green AC input is on and the PSU is on On green There is a PSU output error and the PSU FAN stopped On orange The AC input of the PSU is on and the PSU is disconnected The IO_PSU comes equipped with the following LEDs 329 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX F Status Checks with LEDs TABLE F 14 IO_PSU LEDs AC Green Indicates whether there is AC input to IO_PSU control the individual
273. ethods and Procedures 11 3 Notes on Troubleshooting This section provides notes on troubleshooting Inthe PRIMEQUEST 1000 series if you unplug all the AC power cables while the device is in standby mode the system event log records AC Lost Severity Info This is neither a problem nor a failure It is a normal situation The following example shows this type of message Item Severity Unit Source EventID Description Display Info PSU Power Supply input lost during the cabinet power off In the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 when SR IOV is set to Disabled for Firmware version SB12011 or Firmware version SB11121 the following message is recorded in dmesg when RHEL 5 6 starts It does not indicate a fault or error The message is recorded because this device does not support SR IOV which is a virtualization support function The following shows a dmesg record example PCI Failed to allocate mem resource RRR fior 4k kk kk k 277 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 11 4 Collecting Maintenance Data System problems include cases where the partition abnormally stops and cases where the partition is running but hangs In all such cases you need to collect data for investigation to troubleshoot the problem Be sure to configure the memory dump before starting to use the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server F
274. etting Operation privilege setting for each user account Account synchronization between duplicate MMBs via LDAP Web user interface CLI MMB command line interface PSA SVS command line interface External interface Local VGA USB used only by field engineer DVD switching between internal partitions Remote console Text console redirection Serial console over LAN Video redirection Function that uses PC connected to management LAN as graphical console Remote storage Function that uses drive of PC connected to management LAN as partition drive UEFI interface UEFI shell Boot Manager Operation functions System Management LAN setting MMB management LAN setting consirugHon Maintenance LAN REMCS CE port setting Network setting between PSA and MMB Operating privilege range User account management setting Partition configuration 300 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Boot contro Boot device selection in Web UI Diagnosis mode selection at boot Boot device selection by UEFI Boot Manager boot option setting Scheduled operation Automatic power on off at specified date and time specification Continuous Continuous operation operation Recovery by MMB or BMC reset continuous partition operation Power consumption Cabinet power consumption monitoring notification to management higher level software PSU power on count contr
275. evice by using the Device Manager mi Device Manager E Of x Fie Action Vi e9 mH Elgh WS08K86 m Computer Ec Disk drives Ry Display adapters fq Emulex PLUS Ej t Human Interface Devices H Keyboards E A Mice and other pointing devices E Monitors E a Network adapters a Intel R 82567LF 2 Gigabit Network Connection Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 10 Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 11 Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 12 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 9 Update Driver Software Disable j a Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter a Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter _ Uninstall fl Other devices Goan foc horduare ch E Processors j 9 al E K Storage controllers Properties EE System devices a EE System management devices fl Universal Serial Bus controllers Disables the selected device FIGURE 7 7 Device Manager window 3 Replace the corresponding NIC by using the fjpciswap command 192 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows C gt fjpciswap r IOB 1 PCIC 5 Selected card name is Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 15 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 16 Please delete all settings about this card Do you want to remove this card y n Yy Removing the card
276. evice used is ETERNUS and that the host affinity function is used to set the access right for each server Their settings would need to be changed as a result of FC card replacement 5 Connect the FC card cable 6 Power on the PCI slot To enable the target slot and make it ready for use write 1 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the slot of the added PCI card echo 1 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power 166 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 This also installs the device associated with the relevant adapter on the system 7 Confirm the incorporation results The contents of this confirmation method are the same as those of the confirmation method in the FC card replacement procedure See Confirming the FC card incorporation results 8 Confirm the incorporation results using Web UI of PSA The confirmation procedure is the same as the procedure performed for the replacement of the FC card See How to confirm the FC card incorporation results using Web UI of PSA 6 2 4 Network card addition procedure NIC network card addition using hot plugging needs specific processing before and after PCI slot power on or power off Its procedure also includes the common PCI card addition procedure The procedure describes operations where a single NIC is configured as one interface It also describes cases where
277. face name Example The bus address is 0000 0b 01 ls l sys class net device grep 0000 0b 01 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 10 17 sys class net eth0 devic gt 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 10 17 sys class net ethi devic gt 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 1 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed The following table shows the correspondence between the bus addresses and interface names from the above output example 152 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 TABLE 6 1 Correspondence between bus addresses and interface names Interface name Hardware address Slot number ano o i ooo o ani oo ooo o Note When recording a bus address include the function number number after the period 2 Confirm the correspondence between the interface name and hardware address Execute the following command and confirm the correspondence between the interface name and hardware address Example ethO For a single interface cat sys class net eth0 address 00 0e 0cC 70 c3 38 For a bonding interface The bonding driver rewrites the values for the slave interface of the bonding device Confirm the hardware address by executing the following command cat proc net bonding bondy Ethernet Channel Bonding D
278. fer only in the part after FUNC in the Unit name Also some differ only in the Func number at Seg Bus Dev Func Perform the following steps 2 to 9 for each of these multifunction cards Select the Unit name of the NIC to be replaced to open the Ethernet Controller window Record the IP Address and IP Subnet Mask values under IP v4 Interfaces in order to search for the device to be replaced or set these values again after replacement 200 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows gt Pattition gt Partition 3 gt PSA gt PCI Devices Ethernet Controller Refresh Hele Select a status check box and click the Status Clear button to clear status PCI Device Information IOB 0 PCIC 7 FUNCAI m OK Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 6 020000 o5 8086 105E 06 _ 00 15 177B D5D5 1000Mbps yi IP Subnet Mask ___IhterfaceName J IPAddress Local Area Connection 10 192 168 3 150 255 255 255 0 IPv6 Interfaces F Tterface Name L Tv6 Address al Scope Local Area Connection 10 FE80 DDF0 74A0 20A8 FOE2 64 Link MAC Statistics Status Clear_ Return FIGURE 7 15 Ethernet Controller window 3 Start iSCSI Initiator FIGURE 7 16 Starting iSCSI Initiator The following steps 4 to 9 vary depending on the version Windows Server 2008
279. fg bondYfiles 8 Edit the settings in the udev function rule file 177 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 10 The entries of the interface assigned to the removed NIC still remain in the udev function rule file etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules Leaving the entries will affect the determination of interface names for replacement cards or added cards in the future For this reason delete or comment out those entries The following example shows editing of the udev function rule file etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules In this example the file is edited when the eth10 interface is removed Example of descriptions in the file before editing UBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS ATTR address 00 0e 0cC 70 c3 38 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME eth0 UBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS ATTR address 00 0e 0cC 70 c3 40 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME eth10 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Example of descriptions in the file after editing The entries for the eth10 interface are commented out SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS ATTR address 00 0e 0cC 70 c3 38 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME eth0 SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS A
280. fication and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 11 6 Firmware Updates The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server is configured with BIOS BMC and MMB firmware Each firmware is managed as a total version integrating different versions The firmware is updated from the MMB in batch applying to all the firmware at all locations within the system For details on firmware updates see 1 6 1 Firmware Update menu in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 11 6 1 Notes on updating firmware If the MMB or SB fails perform maintenance on it before updating the firmware Do not update the firmware in a configuration containing a faulty MMB or SB 297 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 298 C122 E108 10EN APPENDIX A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series This appendix lists the functions provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series It also lists management network specifications AI PUIG NB ero enana a EE 300 A 2 Correspondence between Functions and Interfaces 305 A 3 Management Network Specifications 2 0 309 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series A 1 Function List The following lists the functions provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series TABLE A 1 Functions Operation functions User operation User operation s
281. form the Windows license authentication procedure If you use a separately purchased SB as the Home SB you need to perform the license authentication procedure even if you use the Windows Server 2008 R2 2012 Enable Kit Perform license authentication by following the on screen Windows instructions Windows license authentication 1 When starting Windows click the balloon for license authentication that is displayed in the task tray 2 Click Input Product Key and input the product key found on the COA label that comes with the Enable Kit 3 You can perform license authentication via the Internet or by making a phone call to a Microsoft customer service center Hot expansion procedure for hard disks For the hot expansion procedure for hard disks see CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks 73 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal Changing firmware at a component expansion When a component is expanded it may be required to change the firmware In a partition use the same firmware version of the SAS SAS array controller card including the ones contained in the SAS disk unit and the SAS array disk unit and the FC card Fibre Channel card SAS SAS array controller card Update it to the latest supported version before use FC card PCI Express card Use the same version of it as the version of the firmware that is currently used
282. from a failure degradation The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series allows an SB in an active partition to be set as a Reserved SB The function enables effective use of Reserved SBs The following shows an example of operation in which the SB in a test partition is employed as a Reserved SB Here an SB failure occurs in the partition that is the system for actual operation Then firmware issues a shutdown command to the test partition After the shutdown sequence is completed the SB in the test partition is incorporated into the system for actual operation However this configuration can be applied only if permitted within the test partition shutdown period Partition o System for actual operation Partition 1 Test system Partition o System for actual operation Reserved SB for Partition 0 Partition 1 shutdown LIOB LIOB LIOB LIOB LIOB LGSPB LGSPB LGSPB LGSPB LGSPB Test system inoperative FIGURE 3 2 Example of operation where the SB in a test partition is a Reserved SB Remarks Reserved SBs are intended for use in a hardware failure Information from a memory dump is not intended for an investigation of the cause of a switch to a Reserved SB To find the reason for a switch to a Reserved SB reference the MMB system event log Information from a memory dump is useful for an investigation of a software failure At the first startup after switchover to a Reserved SB in a partition where Windows is installed t
283. function as shown in the following figure PSA on each partition has the operations management GUI function which consists of WebGate and HTML templates When the WebGate CGI receives a request from the user it communicates with WebGate via TCP IP and distributes the requested HTML template WebGate acquires information from the source of data corresponding to the request e g configuration information and embeds the acquired information in the HTML template PSA thus provides the Web UI functions for managing partition operation 253 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures PRIMEQUEST 1800E Partition Configuration information log MMB HTML templates Web server WebGate WebGate CGI snmpd Configuration information MMB firmware management SISP OSC System administrator FIGURE 11 1 Web UI functions The following functions provided with the CLI command line interface enable command line operations and script operations from the operating system console Disk management command used by Fujitsu certified service engineers for hot replacement of disks PSA start stop command Command for collecting PSA data for investigation Filter definition update commands Local partition number acquisition command Serial number acquisition command SNMP security setting command Firmware i
284. g EEEE PPF Ruset a G o G gt G o G o a a 9 o a l EEIE FF Power On la Progeer FF Powe Of PF Power O le Progress Operating nme Adwa Fit part d Led errr er teata Oat OOTFE Sytem tare ISIS Uisg Lanse d BODOOJEF Opecstza naien pacefd sbtdows Operating yerr tect 13 Jan 2001 AE E LL a FIGURE 11 15 System Event Log window 2 Confirm the displayed contents Click the Download button to download the event data stored in the SEL Alternatively click the Filter button to filter the events to display Click the Detail button of an event to display details of the event Click the Cancel button to clear settings and restore their previous values Note Be sure to check with a field engineer before clearing events stored in the SEL Remarks Ifa problem occurs during operation e mail notification is sent For details on how to specify whether to use e mail notification and how to set the error level and e mail destination for e mail notification see 1 5 11 Alarm E Mail window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Foranexplanation of display items in the System Event Log window see 1 2 2 System Event Log window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Downloading the event data stored in the SEL A Fujitsu certified service engineer needs the event data stored in the SEL to a
285. g MPD detection events MIB information for monitoring GDS detection events MIB information for monitoring GLS detection events MIB information for monitoring ServerView RAID events MIB information for monitoring LAN card events MIB information for monitoring FC card events MIB information for monitoring SAS card events C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX H Tree Structure of the MIB Provided with the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Partition gt A Information sae MIB file Purpose operating Description source system Windows MIB information for monitoring disk events PSA WinDiskTrap i MIB txt PSA WinMpdTrap Windows MIB information for MIB txt monitoring MPD detection events PSA WinGlsTrap Windows MIB information for MIB txt monitoring GLS detection events PSA Windows MIB information for WinSvsRaidTrap monitoring ServerView RAID MIB txt events 358 C122 E108 10EN APPENDIX Windows Shutdown Settings This appendix describes how to set arbitrarily Windows to shut down 1 1 Shutdown from MMB Web UI eee eee 360 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX I Windows Shutdown Settings 1 1 Shutdown from MMB Web UI Windows shutdown from the MMB Web UI requires ServerView Agent For details on how to set ServerView Agent contact the distributor where you purchased your product or your sales representative 360 C122 E108 1
286. g file unless instructed to do so by SupportDesk lt For Windows Server 2012 gt Configure the paging file in the following procedure 1 Log in to the server with Administrator privileges 2 Click Control Panel System and Security System Advanced system settings 3 Click Settings under Performance on the Advanced tab The Performance Options dialog box appears 4 Click the Advanced tab Visual Effects Advanced Data Execution Prevention Processor scheduling Choose how to allocate processor resources Adjust for best performance of Programs Background services Virtual memory A paging file is an area on the hard disk that Windows uses as if it were RAM Total paging file size for all drives 16384 MB FIGURE 11 23 Advanced tab of the dialog box 293 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 5 Click Change under Virtual memory The Virtual Memory dialog box appears V Automatically manage paging file size for all drives Paging file size for each drive fe olurne Label Paging File Size MB e available e avalaDpie ustom size Total paging file size for all drives Minimum allowed 16 MB Recommended 5586 MB Currently allocated 16384 MB FIGURE 11 24 Virtual Memory dialog box 6 Uncheck Automatically manage paging file size f
287. g for ServerView RAID Manager amDaemon pid XXX is running XXX indicates the process ID So Display example when the service is stopped Checking for ServerView RAID Manager amDaemon is stopped 3 If the ServerView RAID service is running execute the following command to stop the service sbin service aurad stop Confirming the installation of the PCI Hot Plug driver The Hot Plug driver must be installed on the system before you hot plug individual cards Hot plug driver module for PCI Express cards pciehp Confirm the installation of the Hot Plug driver by using the following procedure 1 Execute the lsmod command Confirm that the PCI Hot Plug driver module is installed sbin lsmod grep pciehp pciehp 206984 0 2 If it is not installed incorporate the PCI Hot Plug driver module into the system by executing the modprobe command sbin modprobe pciehp Executing the modprobe command automatically incorporates all relevant modules into the kernel Confirming the slot number of a PCI slot When replacing a PCI card you need to manipulate the power supply to the appropriate slot through the operating system First use the following procedure to obtain the slot number from the mounting location of the PCI slot for the card It will be used to manipulate the power supply 1 Identify the mounting location of the PCI card to be replaced See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components t
288. g system status operation time number of login users Hardware problem monitoring PSA monitors errors output by PCI card drivers or other drivers on the partition PSA also monitors proactive monitoring results returned from the M A R T Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology function of hard disks After detecting an error PSA analyzes the error to identify the unit records it in log information and notifies the MMB and higher level management software Log collection analysis and display These functions collect analyze and display logs related to the hardware problem monitoring function PSA keeps a log of events and messages reported from firmware drivers or the operating system PSA records each one in a log file and takes the specified action e mail notification REMCS notification or log output for it To reduce the amount of log displayed all recorded logs can be filtered before display The possible filters include message notification time and target message type The following lists the log file information collected by PSA TABLE 11 1 Log file information Agent log The agent log records events handled by PSA e g recording to the operating system log SNMP traps However the events do not include those with event IDs 00000 to 09999 detected internally by PSA You can display this log and download it as a CSV format file from the GUI Maintenance operations This function supports hot replaceme
289. ge network settings Partition Console The video redirection remote storage network relays traffic through the MMB Redirection Setup menu so the BMC IP address is not seen by users Users access the system via the management LAN of the MMB Here specify the IP address used for access by the video redirection client Java applet The MMB handles address conversion between the specified address and BMC IP address The settings of the management LAN on the partition side are made on the operating system These are required to access PSA SVS etc from a management PC etc on the management LAN PSA on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E or SVS on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 also communicates with the MMB via the management LAN to monitor and to switch cluster nodes in the PRIMECLUSTER linkage To the NIC to be used for the management LAN the GbE port on GSPB the IOB or the network card mounted in the PCI_Box is assigned The subnet of the management LAN shares the virtual IP address and the physical address of the MMB which are specified by Web UI CLI on the MMB The management LAN and production LAN can be configured in the same subnet In such case an IP address is assigned to both the management LAN and the production LAN on the partition connected to the subnet of the LAN to which the MMB User Port is connected 1 3 3 Redundant configuration of the management LAN For the MMB only MMB 0 is mounted as standard By mounting MMB 1 the MMB can be
290. hard disks managed by the controllers Turning off a hard disk location LED or causing it to blink Delete the configuration information cache file of the file system Red Hat Enterprise Linux After hot replacement addition or removal of a hard disk execute the following command to delete the configuration information cache file of the file system Likewise delete the file before static replacement addition or removal of a hard disk rm etc blkid blkid tab If the cache file exists with etc blkid blkid tab retaining the file system configuration Red Hat Enterprise Linux uses the information in the file as it checks the file system with the fsck command The system status will not match the etc blkid blkid tab contents during hot replacement hot addition or hot removal of disks For this reason the check at the next execution of the fsck command will be incorrect which may damage the file system Once created this file is not updated That is why the cache file must be deleted after hot replacement addition or removal of a hard disk as well as before static replacement addition or removal of a hard disk 86 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks Deleting the cache file does not cause any problems because it will be re created as needed Stop the smartd service Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 During hot maintenance of a hard disk hot replacement addition
291. he 3 The LGSPB LIOB and LPCI_Box in a partition share physical hardware Therefore the partition using the components needs to be shut down Before IOB replacement the partitions using the GSPB must be shut down 4 The PCI Hot Plug function is required In a system running Windows it cannot be removed Be One SAS disk unit or SAS array disk unit and one SAS card or SAS array controller card make one set of maintenance parts Replacing only the card is not possible 6 This is supported only in Linux For details on Xen KVM or VMware support in Linux contact the distributor where you purchased your product or a Fujitsu sales representative or systems engineer SE 7 Hot maintenance of a 785 GB 1 2 TB internal solid state drive that uses a PCI slot is not possible Stop the partition before the replacement Hard disk removal procedure in hot maintenance For the hard disk removal procedure in hot maintenance see CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks 3 5 2 Removing an internal solid state drive that uses a PCI slot This section describes the procedure for removing an internal solid state drive that uses a PCI slot a 785 GB 1 2 TB internal solid state drive Note Hot replacement of an internal solid state drive that uses a PCI slot is not supported Stop the partition before the deletion In a RAID configuration LINUX software RAID Windows software RAID 1 Cancel the environmental settings of the PCI card in
292. he MMB begins The following window appears when the file transfer is completed Model PRIMEQUEST Active MMB0 Part Number MCDSACI11 FUjiTSU Serial Number 1480935001 Status Normal A dimane gt Maimtenance gt Backup Restore Configuration gt Restore BIOS Configuration Restore BIOS Configuration Select partition s then click the Restore buton Configuration File Information Partitions 0 Patioa Nase WOS_HS_138 Saved Date 2009 11 02 BIOS Version 0 63 O Select Al defined pastiion s Restore Cancet lt gt FIGURE 8 3 Restore BIOS Configuration window partition selection 220 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 8 Backup and Restore 2 Select the partition to restore Then click the Restore button 8 1 2 Backing up and restoring MMB configuration information From the Backup Restore MMB Configuration window you can back up and restore MMB configuration information The procedure is as follows Bledel PRIME QUEST 190E Arnve MAIR p Past Nussbrr MCD3ACIL Fu iTSU Serial Nianber TIET Strates dswd 2Maneerance gt Bacng Ranore Ciefgr sen gt Bactr h e tore MME Configarten Backup MMB Configuration Hij To backup te NOME Corfigaranon chek Bacicep bator _ Backup Restore MMB Configuration To resore the MINE Conkgurwens eelect o ile and obok Lemere burma ou Raaj C u a FIGURE 8 4 Backup Restore MMB Configuration
293. he PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Hardware Installation Manual C122 HO04EN APPENDIX F Status Checks with LEDs This appendix describes the types of mounted LEDs for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series It also describes how to check the status with LEDs PACED TIPES riia E a A aires 325 F2 LED Mo nting Locations s siesiiiniiiisssisisiiriionan 331 F 3 LED list PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX F Status Checks with LEDs F 1 LED Types The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series has functions using LEDS to indicate any problems the power on off status and the physical location of each component You can check detailed status information on each component in the MMB Web UI The Alarm LEDs of all components go on when the resident power supply is turned on but this is not an error Each Alarm LED goes out as the corresponding component is confirmed to be normal Each component comes equipped with the following LEDs Power LED green This LED indicates the power status in the component Alarm LED orange This LED indicates whether there is an error in the component Location LED blue This LED indicates the mounting location of the component The display function of the LED is helpful in replacement The user can set this function to on or off This section describes the LEDs of each component F 1 1 Power LED Alarm LED and Location LED In principle each component for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series comes equipped w
294. he Reserved SB function can support only Flexible I O mode For an overview of Flexible I O mode see 5 6 Flexible I O in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series General Description C122 B022EN After the switch to the Reserved SB you may be asked for authentication of your license in the following cases You are using a Windows Server OS with a volume license or package product The SB being used is not an SB that was purchased together with the enable kit For details see License authentication with SB and enable kit combinations in 3 4 Adding Components 3 2 2 Memory Mirror The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series supports Memory Mirror by using CPU functions Enabling and disabling of Memory Mirror can be set from the MMB Web UI The default is Disabled Notes In maintenance and restoration after Memory Mirror is suspended because of CPU degradation start Memory Mirror again Note that after replacement of faulty parts Memory Mirror remains off Memory Mirror is suspended in only the following three cases 1 Memory Mirror is set for a partition that incorporates a Reserved SB and has a single SB configuration Furthermore the number of DIMMs mounted on the Reserved SB is not a multiple of 8 2 Memory Mirror has a 2 CPU 1 SB configuration Furthermore one CPU on SB 2 or SB 3 is degraded In this case Memory Mirror is suspended irrespective of the number of DIMMs mounted 3 Memory Mirror is set for a partition that incorporates a Reserved SB and has
295. he correspondence between the functions provided by PRIMEQUEST 1000 series and interfaces Remarks PSA Web UI is provided only with the PRIMEQUEST 1800E TABLE A 2 Correspondence between functions and interfaces Function MMB MMBCLI UEFI PSA Web PSA CLI Web UI UI SVS CLI System information display System status display Error Supported ETA System event log SEL display event log SEL display Supported Supported o System event log SEL download Supported PoP MMB Web UI CLI operating log Supported display information display P N S Supported Pf fp Firmware version display Supported Supported a ae Hardware status display LED operation on clear blinking Supported ee PSU power supply unit power on Supported count and status display System power consumption display Supported a S S o FAN status monitoring and FAN Supported Temperature monitoring and display Supported ee Voltage monitoring and display Supported a o o o chipset BMGDDC ere Ha GSPB status display Supported a o SAS disk unit SAS array disk unit Supported status display DVDB status display status DVDB status display Supported HSupported ff 305 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Function MMB MMB CLI UEFI PSA Web PSA CLI Web UI UI SVS CLI System settings Primary and secondary power feed Supported Suppo
296. he higher level application processing required before NIC removal Stop all access to the interface as follows Stop the application that was confirmed in step 2 as using the interface or exclude the interface from the target of use by the application 4 Deactivate the NIC Execute the following command to deactivate all the interfaces that you confirmed in step 2 The applicable command depends on whether the target interface is a single NIC interface or the SLAVE interface of a bonding device For a single NIC interface If the single NIC interface has a VLAN device you also need to remove the VLAN interface Perform the following operations These operations precede deactivation of the physical interface sbin ifdown ethX Y sbin vconfig rem ethx Y For the interface under bonding If the bonding device is operating in mode 1 use the following steps for safety purposes on the SLAVE interface to be removed to exclude it from operation In any other mode removing it immediately should not cause any problems Confirm that the SLAVE interface is the interface currently being used for communication 176 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 cat sys class net bondY bonding active_slave If the displayed interface name corresponds to the SLAVE interface to be removed execute the following command to switch to commun
297. he ioMemory Product Family User Guide Linux for Driver Release x x x or see the ioMemory Product Family User Guide Microsoft Windows for Driver Release x x x x x x is the version number at the following website http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest download e In a SWAP configuration Linux Windows 1 Power off the partition For details on stopping partitions see 8 1 2 Powering off a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 2 Add the PCI card 3 Power on the partition For details on powering on partitions see 8 1 1 Powering on a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 4 Make environmental settings for the added PCI card Remarks 75 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal For details on the environmental settings see the ioMemory Product Family User Guide Linux for Driver Release x x x or see the ioMemory Product Family User Guide Microsoft Windows for Driver Release X xX X X X X is the version number at the following website http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest download e 5 Restart the partition OS 76 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal 3 5 Removing Components This section describes how to remove components 3 5 1
298. he location indicated by the Fault LED amber that is on 7 From the above example you can confirm that the Fault LED of slot 2 of ioc0 is on so the inserted hard disk is in that slot Turn off the Fault LED by executing the following disk management command opt FJISVpsa bin diskctrl c ioc0 2 8 Confirm the location of the inserted hard disk by displaying the status with the disk management command opt FJISVpsa bin diskctrl ioco dev sda dev sdb dev sdc dev sdd 9 After the disk management command is completed mount the disk partitions If the disk has the Mirror configuration in PRIMECLUSTER GDS incorporate it in PRIMECLUSTER GDS Remarks In the following case execute the following PSA command manually You are performing hot maintenance of the hard disk with PRIMECLUSTER GDS in RHEL opt FUSVpsa sh force_search sh a 10 To restore each raw device take action as follows If the hard disk had contained a raw device Configure the raw device according to the manual of the application used for raw access to the replacement hard disk That application was stopped before the replacement After completing the configuration restart the application 94 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks 4 3 Replacing Hard Disks in a Hardware RAID Configuration This section describes how to replace hard disks in a Har
299. he partition must be restarted Restart the partition as instructed Fora partition where Windows is installed take account of the operation stoppage time for any SB failure and the time required for a restart That restart time includes both the time taken for a reboot for the switching to the Reserved SB and the time taken for the initial startup However if you apply in advance a workaround that suppresses restarts in the case of a failure you can limit the restarts to the one at the initial startup For 48 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal details on the workaround see Workaround for Windows restart in 3 4 3 Setting a Reserved SB in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN Reserved SB definition The Reserved SB definition is cleared after a Reserved SB enters operation Note In maintenance and restoration work after the Reserved SB enters operation replace the faulty unit and specify the Reserved SB definition again with the Web UI Reserved SB setting rules The Reserved SB setting criteria are as follows Any SB not belonging to a partition can be set as a Reserved SB An SB can be set as a Reserved SB for multiple partitions For a single partition multiple Reserved SBs can be set For a partition that consists of one SB a Reserved SB with one mounted CPU or two mounted CPUs can be set For a
300. heck box for Always trust content from this publisher and click the Execute button The connection procedure is as follows 1 Click the Logon button 2 Enter values in Username and Password in the ServerView Remote Management Frontend window 3 Click the Login button in the ServerView Remote Management Frontend window 32 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation BMC FW IP Address Logon Logoff Power Management Status enot available Command Console Redirection Enter Console IB ServerView Remote Management Frontend I semame jadmin Password e FIGURE 1 17 Text console redirection authentication window Text console redirection via telnet 1 Use terminal software such as Tera Term to connect to the IP for text console redirection via telnet 2 When the Main Menu window is displayed press the r key Tera Term H SESE SKES SLES HESS EREHE SEES KES S REESE te elcome to PRIMEQUEST Remote Wanagers Firmware Revision 1 264 1 26 Firmvare built May 24 2010 18 40 42 FSESSHESFCESEKSSS SS SESS ERASE SE SESE REE Main Menu c Change password r Console Redirection EMS SAC Enter selection or 0 to quit FIGURE 1 18 telnet connection for text console redirection 33 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Enviro
301. hk BIOS firmware Interrupt LAN z Units modules E SB CPU DIMM OB GSE z IOB SASBP z panel FAN tray z PSU PEXU ETT i LAN Production LAN FIGURE 1 2 External network functions 3 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 2 How to Configure the External Networks Management LAN Maintenance LAN Production LAN The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server must be connected to the following three types of external networks The respective external networks are dedicated to security and load distribution See FIGURE 1 1 External network configuration Management LAN Maintenance LAN Production LAN Note You can connect the management LAN and production LAN to the same subnet but you need to connect the maintenance LAN to another subnet This section describes the IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server 1 2 1 IP addresses used in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server Each of the SB GSPB and MMB units in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server have network interfaces Each port of these network interfaces must be assigned an IP address To the ports assign IP addresses appropriate to the external network environment of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server The following describes the IP addresses assigned to the ports TABLE 1 2 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server IP addresses set from the MMB lists the I
302. ho netck arptbl netck arping netck ifconfig netck stat show user_list help show snmp sys_location show snmp sys_contact show snmp community show snmp trap show maintenance_ip IP address of the management LAN partition To the partition side an IP address of the management LAN must be assigned to communicate with PSA running on the operating system or SVS from the terminal etc on the management LAN The IP address is assigned to the GbE port on the GSPB the IOB or the PCI_Box mounted on the network card Also for monitoring with SVOM an IP address must be assigned to the management LAN When it is linked with PRIMECLUSTER the PSA on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E or SVS on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 on the partition side communicates with the user port of the MMB via the management LAN It also provides the function for monitoring the status of the cluster node and the node switching function 1 3 2 How to configure the management LAN The network for MMB access from external terminals is the management LAN The MMB has three types of network port USER port duplicated used for management CE port used for maintenance and REMCS port used for remote maintenance The REMCS port and CE port are connected to one NIC through a switching hub The PSA to MMB network in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server is a dedicated LAN For management LAN related settings for MMB access use the CLI or the Network Configuration menu in the Web UI
303. iavs ht heo re eee 326 Scheduled Operations ee eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeee 232 Selecting Full control mode View only mode 2T Seryer View SUIE cssevassccsssessabestedssaaesaivseepacesscssepsseniyepss 249 Session Connections WindOw c ccccccsssseeseseteeeeees 204 Setting and display items in the System Event Log Detail WIDOW erasana er cocci vesvias eueuennaees E 282 Setting and display items in the System Event Log Filtering Condition Window c ccceceeseceessecessececeseeeeeesnseeesseeeeees 280 Shutdown from MMB Web UL 0 eee eeeeeeeereeeee 360 Simplified help for the shutdown commanid 239 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface 109 gt 26 137 gt wl 1697 I Starting iSCSI Initiator ee eeeeeeeeeeseceeneeeeneeees 201 Startup and Recovery dialog DOK eee eee eee 288 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Index Status Checks with LEDS ccccccccssseceesseeeeeseeeeeeeee 324 Supported storage types ee ceesecsseeeseeeeeeesseeeseeteees 40 System Event Log Detail Window eeeeeeeeeeee 282 System event log display eee cece cee cseereeeeeseeeee 270 System Event Log Filtering Condition window 280 System Event Log window eee eeeeeeseeteeeteeeees 279 System LED mounting locations eects 331 System Power Control window ccecceesseeceeteeeeeee 224 System problems
304. icating now with the other SLAVE interface sbin ifenslave c bondY ethzZ ethZ bondY configured interface not subject to hot replacement Finally remove the SLAVE interface being replaced from the bonding configuration Immediately after being removed the interface is automatically no longer used sbin ifenslave d bondY ethX To remove the interfaces including the bonding device deactivate them collectively by executing the following command sbin ifdown bondyY 5 Power off the PCI slot Confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for the target slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the slot number confirmed in step is shown at lt slot number gt in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt To disable a PCI card and make it ready for removal write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out The interface ethX is removed at the same time echo 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power 6 Remove the NIC from the PCI slot 7 Remove the interface configuration file Delete the configuration files of all the interfaces confirmed in step 2 by executing the following command rm etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg ethx When deleting a bonding device also delete the related bonding items ifc
305. ied Time Ea E fo o lo lo 8 Numbor of events to display 100 10493 Aepiy Cancet _Oetaun Setong _ FIGURE 11 16 System Event Log Filtering Condition window 2 Specify the condition to filter events Then click the Apply button The System Event Log window appears again The window displays the events matching the specified conditions To clear the specified conditions and return to the System Event Log window click the Cancel button To clear the specified conditions and restore the default values click the Default Setting button TABLE 11 8 Setting and display items in the System Event Log Filtering Condition window Severity Select the severity of events to display by using the following check boxes You can check multiple check boxes Error Warning Info All check boxes are checked by default Partition Select the partition to display Select the AlI or Specified radio button If you select All filtering by partition will not be applied In this case the check boxes for partitions in Specified are grayed out and cannot be checked If you select Specified you can check the check boxes for selecting a partition Even after a switch to All and back to Specified the window retains the selections made with the Specified check boxes 280 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Al
306. ied URL Remarks The above configuration must be complete for every registered PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server node 2 0 Rack grouping function linkage This section provides an overview of the rack grouping function linkage of Systemwalker and describes the procedure Overview of rack grouping function linkage 367 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX J Systemwalker Centric Manager Linkage Systemwalker enables automatic grouping per rack by collecting the IP address of the management LAN of each partition node from the MMB node of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server The management LAN must be configured in advance so that its IP address can be obtained from the MMB node Procedure for rack grouping function linkage Log in to the operating system of each partition with Administrator privileges to configure the management LAN For details on how to configure the management LAN see the following manuals For Linux RHEL 6 2 2 Confirming management LAN settings in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN For Windows Server 2003 6 3 1 Configuring the PSA to MMB communication LAN in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN For Windows Server 2008 6 4 1 Configuring the PSA to MMB communication LAN in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN For Windows Server 2012 the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series ServerView Mission Critical Option User Manu
307. ig hwconf etc sysconfig hwconf bak Save the interface configuration file Save all the interface configuration files that you checked in step 2 by executing the following command Kudzu and configuration scripts may reference the contents of files in etc sysconfig network scripts For this reason create a save directory and save these files to the directory so that kudzu and the configuration scripts will not reference them cd etc sysconfig network scripts mkdir temp mv ifcfg ethxX temp following also executed for bonding configuration mv ifcfg bondxX temp Power on the PCI slot To enable the card again and make it available write 1 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the disabled slot echo 1 gt sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power 113 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 This also installs the device associated with the relevant adapter on the system 11 Collect the latest hardware information A new NIC has been added Collect the latest hardware information by executing the following command sbin kudzu 12 Restore the saved common configuration file to the original file Restoring etc modprobe conf You can restore etc modprobe conf to the original file Restore the saved etc modprobe conf to the original file by executing the following command
308. iguration Alarm E Mail from the MMB menu You can also filter the notification such as by error status type partition or target component 267 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Wirth PEPES IHHT Arie M WIRI i Fart Sumber sical FUJITSU Eqriul Nakar LALL Trai cma FFT SHoteok Conical than EB Alarm E Mail Ta DEE fis Agp Ihaa m ajid 0 hangs O EEI ec pe en eo ewop Gon ado 2 fangs eae ETET TAG Re PA aero pair Fus Ayri Ter Aree Tarra 3 Tir Ter Pela 4 ap E FIGURE 11 9 Alarm E Mail settings window Miscellaneous Problems related to system startup or drivers may occur For details on these problems see the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Message Reference C122 E111EN If the status is one of the MMB error or warning statuses listed in the following operation interrupt criteria stop the system and contact a field engineer or your sales representative Before making contact confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the main unit Operation interrupt criteria The Alarm LED of the MMB is on The Active LEDs of MMB 0 and MMB 1 are both off You cannot connect to the MMB Web UI The Alarm LEDs of multiple boards in the device are on The MMB Web UI displays Read Error The System Status window of the MMB Web UI displays Not Present
309. ii 23 Video Redirection window menuB c ccceeceeeeeees 23 Virtual Memory dialog bOX eee eee eereeeeeeeeee 292 W Web UI functions ceccecccceesseceesseceeeessececsenseeeseeeeeeees 254 Windows Shutdown SettingS cece eeeeeeseeeneees 359 Window with a remote storage list cee eeeeeeeee 38 40 X x2APIC support of each operating system PRIMEQUEST T80QE2 aisses EE EET REEE 338 382 C122 E108 10EN cO FUJITSU
310. iles the etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg eth files and the etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg bond files regardless of whether the NIC to be replaced is a configuration interface of the bonding device An IP address does not need to be assigned to unused interfaces This procedure is for preventing the device name of the replacement target NIC from being changed after hot replacement If ONBOOT NO also exists the procedure described here may not work properly 1 Confirm the slot number of the PCI slot that has the mounted interface Confirm the interface mounting location through the configuration file information and the operating system information First confirm the bus address of the PCI slot that has the mounted interface to be replaced Example ethO interface ls l sys class net eth0O devic lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 10 17 sys class net eth0 device gt 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 0 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Excluding the rest of the directory path check the part corresponding to the file name in the symbolic link destination file of the output results In the above example the underlined part shows the bus address 0000 0b 01 in the example Note You will use the bus address obtained here in steps 2 and 11 Record the bus address so that you can reference it later 151 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manu
311. in the Video Redirection window failing to respond to user operation In such cases the window cannot be closed normally Reconnect to the network after forcibly ending the video redirection The following lists the functions of video redirection TABLE 1 10 Video redirection functions View only mode The user can display windows but not perform operations in them Full control mode The user can perform mouse operations During use of the mouse the on the terminal mouse pointer may not remain in The mouse pointers on both the terminal sync between the terminal and and partition move in sync partition To align the pointer The capability to show or hide the mouse positions click the Mouse Sync pointer on the terminal is an option The button relative position the next position calculated from the operation at the previous position or absolute position orthogonal coordinates can be set as the mouse position 26 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation Keyboard The user can perform operations from The special keys are not directly the PC keyboard Monitor The user can display windows but not Partition monitoring can be perform operations in them enabled disabled Special key buttons Clicking the Ctrl Alt or Win button sends the corresponding operation Use the Lock key to keep any of these buttons clicke
312. ing System Installation LINK lt ireisiiicsnsiinoisinnandiiissnnnii ninian iiano iaaneniiiianan 43 CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal seessssseesssersesseresrrersss 44 2h PPAR EU MD c2 iss seeds E E E E ane 45 3 1 1 Examples of partition configurations nsciis iscan iaai iiiaae iaaii ENE 45 3 1 2 Partition setup procedure using the MMB Web Ul 0 cece cece eeeeesee cere eeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseneeseeeseeeneeneeees 46 32 Hiomavalabiliiy CUP srezu son ccendeds inip iaaa iaaa aa E aaa a aaan 48 AE A a o e a E E E A E EE 48 a TiS il E E trerereeer tren 57 oA W VIRGINS a e A E A E A A devel dank ve ee ee tna eee dey A E P 59 dea SNE VOR RAID o aia aE E a a a E a aE a a Ea 60 To PROP UCU COMPONSE AEEA A SARE Naaa EAA e aA AANE TEAN 61 3 3 1 Replaceable CO PMNS eeessneiaEE ne hoes 61 4 0 2 Component Teplacemernt COMMONS socrii naiai gaa A a aa aiaa 63 3 3 3 Replacement procedures in hot maintenance seessssssresessrnneeersnnnesstrenneeennnnnnssttennnenennnnannnetennneanna 64 3 3 4 Replacement procedures in cold maintenance sseeeessrrrreseresrnrresserennneenennnnnnnnunttennnennennnnnnnnnneeenna 64 3 3 5 Replacing the battery backup unit of an array controller card cccsccccccesssssneeeeeeeesssnseeeeeeesessnanes 64 3 3 6 Replacing the battery unit of a UPS uninterruptible power supply sssssssssssssssssresssrsssrrrsssrnssssesssens 66 3 3 7 Replacing an internal solid state drive th
313. ing lists the replaceable components and replacement conditions TABLE 3 5 Replaceable components and replacement conditions Component name AC power on AC power on cold system All partitions Target Target partition on off partition off hot maintenance hot system hot system cold partition cold partition maintenance maintenance Replaceable PSU 1 Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable 2 p p E2 p Replaceable IOB Replaceable Replaceable 4 Not replaceable PCI Express card Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable 1 5 6 12 Replaceable GSPB Replaceable Replaceable 4 Not replaceable SAS disk unit 7 Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Not replaceable SAS Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable 1 unit SAS BBU 8 Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Not replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable MMB 9 Replaceable 9 9 Replaceable 9 61 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal Component name AC power off AC power on AC power on AC power on cold system All partitions Target Target partition on off partition off hot maintenance hot system hot system cold partition cold partition maintenance maintenance MM Replaceable Replaceable Battery Replaceable Replaceable 9 B C2
314. ing system shutdown Partition Power On Supported Powers on any partition Partition Power Off Supported Powers off any partition through an operating system shutdown Partition Force Power Not supported Forcibly powers off any partition without an operating Off system shutdown Use this item to forcibly power off a partition when shutdown from the operating system is disabled Power Cycle Not supported Powers off and on any partition The partition is forcibly powered off without an operating system shutdown Reset Not supported Resets any partition This reset does not involve an operating system reboot Not supported Issues an NMI interrupt to any partition For details on scheduled operation settings see 1 3 2 Schedule menu in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 233 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control For details on how to set Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2012 to shut down see APPENDIX I Windows Shutdown Settings 234 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 9 4 Automatic Partition Restart Conditions This section describes how to set automatic partition restart conditions 9 4 1 Setting automatic partition restart conditions Only users with Administrators privileges can set automatic partition restart conditions Note Set
315. ints again Whether the FC card is correctly inserted into the PCI slot Whether the latch is correctly set Eliminate the problem power on the slot again and check the log Ifthe message in a is displayed but the FC linkup message in b is not displayed the FC cable may be disconnected or the FC path may not be set correctly Power off the slot once Confirm the following points again Confirm the FC driver setting The definition file containing a description of the driver option of the FC driver lpfc is identified with the following command Example Description in etc modprobe d lpfc conf grep l1 lpfc etc modprobe d etc modprobe d lpfc conf Confirm that the driver option of the FC driver Ipfc is correctly set For details contact the distributor where you purchased your product or your sales representative Check the FC cable connection status Confirm the Storage FC settings Confirm that the settings that conform to the actual connection format Fabric connection or Arbitrated Loop connection were made Eliminate the problem power on the slot again and check the log If the messages in a and b are displayed but the messages in c are not displayed the storage is not yet found Check the following points again These are not card problems so you need not power off the slot for work Review FC Switch zoning settings Review storage zoning settings Review storage LUN Mapping
316. inux 5 sbin modprobe pciehp Executing the modprobe command automatically incorporates all relevant modules into the kernel Confirming the slot number of a PCI slot When adding a PCI card you need to manipulate the power supply to the appropriate slot through the operating system First use the following procedure to obtain the BUS number and slot number from the physical location of the PCI slot for the card It will be used to manipulate the power supply 1 Identify the mounting location of the PCI card to be added See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to check the mounting location board and slot of the PCI card to be added 2 Obtain the slot number of the mounting location Check the table in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers and obtain the slot number that is unique in the cabinet and assigned to the confirmed mounting location This slot number is identification information for operating the slot of the PCI card to be added Checking the power status of a PCI slot Using the PCI slot number confirmed in Confirming the slot number of a PCI slot confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for this slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the PCI slot number confirmed in Confirming the slot number of a PCI slot is shown at lt slot number gt location in the directory path in the following format where the dire
317. inux 5 7 and kernel 2 6 18 274 7 1 el5 or later version Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 6 and kernel 2 6 18 238 27 1 e15 or later version Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 3 and kernel 2 6 18 128 35 1 e15 or later version 1 Log in as the system administrator root 2 Execute the following command to check the running status of the ServerView RAID service sbin service aurad status Display example when the service is running 132 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Checking for ServerView RAID Manager amDaemon pid XXX is running XXX indicates the process ID Display example when the service is stopped Checking for ServerView RAID Manager amDaemon is stopped 3 If the ServerView RAID service is running execute the following command to stop the service sbin service aurad stop Confirming the installation of the PCI Hot Plug driver The Hot Plug driver must be installed on the system before you Hot Plug individual cards The method for installing the Hot Plug driver and confirming the installation is the same as in the PCI card replacement procedure Hot plug driver module for PCI Express cards pciehp Confirm the installation of the Hot Plug driver by using the following procedure 1 Execute the lsmod command Confirm that the PCI Hot Plug driver module is installed sbin lsmod grep pciehp pciehp 206984 0
318. ion Server installation environment LAN WAN system configuration Hardware configuration Installed option types and locations Configuration information UEFI Setup Utility settings Occurrence date and time Year Month Day Hour Minute Frequency Constantly Intermittently times per Unknown Triggered by Working before failure occurred Current situation Work details Work affected Symptom Hanging Slowdown Reboot OS panic stop OS startup not possible Communication unavailable Other Error message System event log Agent log Driver log OS message Other Status of various lamps 377 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX M Failure Report Sheet 378 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Index Index A Adapter Selection window in the WebBIOS 1 371 Adapter Selection window in the WebBIOS 2 esal Adapter Teaming properties esseeseeeeseeeeeereereseee 189 Adding Removing and Replacing Hard Disks 88 Adding Componentts cecesceseesecssecsecesessseesecsseeeenaes 72 Advanced options dialog DOX eee eee eseeeeeeeeeeeees 291 Agent Log Window ceeceessceeneeeeseeeeeneeeenees 272 284 Alarm E Mail settings window
319. ion preparation initialization and software installation PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Describes how to use the Web UI and UEFI to assure C122 E109EN User Interface Operating proper operation of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series Instructions server PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Describes how to use tools and software for system C122 E108EN Administration Manual administration and how to maintain the system component replacement and error notification PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Provides information on operation methods and settings C122 E110EN Tool Reference including details on the MMB PSA and UEFI functions PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Lists the messages that may be displayed when a C122 E111EN Message Reference problem occurs during operation and describes how to respond to them PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Describes REMCS service installation and operation C122 E120EN REMCS Installation Manual PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Defines the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series related terms C122 E116EN Glossary and abbreviations PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Gives a revised version of APPENDIX D Configuring C122 E155EN SAN Boot Environment the SAN Boot Environment in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Configuration Manual Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN This iv C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Preface manual describes procedures for installing the SAN boot environment and provides the latest information including notes on design Related
320. irectory contains a directory for the target slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the slot number confirmed in step 4 is shown at lt slot number gt in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt 112 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 10 Note lt BUS number gt and lt slot number gt are both four digit decimal values Here lt BUS number gt is information added to the slot number for descriptive purposes The operational target directory is defined uniquely with lt slot number gt To disable a PCI card and make it ready for removal write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out The interface ethX is removed at the same time echo 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power Confirm the existing interface names To confirm the interface names execute the following command Note You will use the output in step 13 Record the executed commands and output results for later reference sbin ifconfig a Replace the NIC Save the common configuration file Save etc modprobe conf and etc sysconfig hwconf by executing the following command cp etc modprobe conf etc modprobe conf bak cp etc sysconf
321. is Jason icon a r e gnere manm Dems enon FIGURE 6 1 Fibre Channel window example 4 Click the Refresh button to update the window and confirm that the information is displayed correctly It takes up to three minutes to update the window 6 1 4 Network card replacement procedure Network card referred to below as NIC replacement using hot plugging needs specific processing before and after PCI slot power on or power off Its procedure also includes to the common PCI card replacement procedure The procedure describes operations where a single NIC is configured as one interface It also describes cases where multiple NICs are bonded together to configure one interface bonding configuration 150 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Single NIC interface Bonding configuration interface MASTER SLAVE interface interface FIGURE 6 2 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface NIC replacement procedure This section describes the procedure for NIC replacement Notes When replacing multiple NICs be sure to replace them one by one If you replace multiple cards at the same time they may not be correctly configured To perform hot replacement in a system where a bonding device is installed design the system so that it specifies ONBOOT YES in all interface configuration f
322. is directory cat sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power When displayed 0 means disabled and 1 means enabled Powering on and off PCI slots You can power on and off a PCI slot through an operation on the file confirmed in Checking the power status of a PCI slot To disable a PCI card and make it ready for removal write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out cho 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power This operation concurrently removes the device associated with the relevant adapter from the system Note Be sure to manipulate the power supply from the operating system To enable the card again and make it available write 1 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the disabled slot cho 1 gt sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power This operation concurrently installs the device associated with the relevant adapter on the system Note 102 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 After power on you need to confirm that the card and driver are correctly installed The procedures vary depending on the card and driver specifications For the appropriate procedures see the respective manuals Restarting the ServerView RAID service If the ServerView
323. isabled on the standby MMB A field engineer configures the maintenance LAN and REMCS LAN during system installation 16 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 5 Production LAN This section describes the configuration of the production LAN for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series 1 5 1 Overview of the production LAN The GSPB includes eight 1000Base T LAN ports four ports per LGSPB for the production LAN You can mount additional LAN cards in the PCI Express slots on the IOB and PCI_Box as needed to use their ports for the production LAN 1 5 2 Redundancy of the production LAN This section describes redundancy of the production LAN Duplication of the transmission path between servers high speed switching method For details on duplication of the transmission path between servers see PRIMECLUSTER documents Duplication between the server hub switch in the same network Virtual NIC method NIC switching method For details on duplication between the server hub switch in the same network see PRIMECLUSTER documents Teaming by Intel PROSet The teaming configuration using Intel PROSet is available For details see the help for Intel PROSet Notes There are some precautions on teaming with Intel PROSet R For details on the precautions see APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions 17 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual
324. ise Linux 6 sbin ifdown ethxX Y sbin vconfig rem ethX Y For the SLAVE interface of a bonding device If the bonding device is operating in mode 1 use the following steps for safety purposes on the SLAVE interface to be replaced to exclude it from operation In any other mode removing it immediately should not cause any problems Confirm that the SLAVE interface to be replaced is the interface currently being used for communication First confirm the interface currently being used for communication by executing the following command cat sys class net bondY bonding active_slave If the displayed interface matches the SLAVE interface being replaced execute the following command to switch the current communication interface to another SLAVE interface sbin ifenslave c bondY ethZ ethZ Interface that composes bondY and does not perform hot replacement Finally remove the SLAVE interface being replaced from the bonding configuration Immediately after being removed the interface is automatically no longer used sbin ifenslave d bondY ethX 5 Power off the PCI slot Confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for the target slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the slot number confirmed in step 1 is shown at lt slot number gt in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt slot
325. isplayed results of step 3 as shown below it means that the interface name was replaced for the physical device In that example you will need to use 00 0E 0C 70 C3 41 Example ls l sys class net device grep 0000 0b 01 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 10 17 sys class net ethl devic gt devices pci0000 00 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 10 17 sys class net eth0 devic gt devices pci0000 00 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 1 Record the correspondence between the interface names and hardware addresses confirmed here so that they can be referenced later because you will uses them in step 15 14 Restore the saved interface configuration file to the original file Restore the interface configuration file saved to the save directory to the original file by executing the following command cd etc sysconfig network scripts temp mv ifcfg ethX following also executed for bonding configuration mv ifcfg bondXx 116 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 15 16 If a etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg ethX bak file is created by kudzu delete the file This operation is not essential Edit the interface configuration file Rewrite the old hardware address with a new hardware address In HWADDR set the hardware address confirmed in
326. it Network Connection Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 10 Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 11 Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 12 Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 9 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Sq EIRA Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port S Update Driver Software Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Enable Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Se Uni Other devices Scan for hardware changes Processors Storage controllers Properties E system devices 1E System management devices Universal Serial Bus controllers Enables the selected device FIGURE 7 8 Device Manager window 3 3 NIC addition procedure oJ Referring to 7 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Cards add a NIC 194 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows 7 4 FC Card Hot Plugging For FC card hot plugging replacement you need to especially consider other matters in addition to the procedure described in 7 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Cards The hot plugging of an FC card changes the WWN of the FC card if the WWN is set on an FC switch or RAID device ETERNUS For details on how to set the WWN again for a new card see the respective device manuals This section describes hot plugging of an FC card combined with ETERNUS MPD multipath driver For details on the fjpciswap command see 4 10 PCI Card Operation Command
327. ith the following LEDs TABLE F 1 Power LED Alarm LED and Location LED Indicates the power status of the component Indicates whether there is an error in the component Location Blue Identifies the component location Can be arbitrarily set to blink or turned off by the user Indicates the component undergoing maintenance when Maintenance Wizard is running F 1 2 Home LED The SB comes equipped with the Home LED This LED indicates the Home SB The Home SB is the SB whose Home LED is on The LED indicates whether the USB and VGA ports of the SB are enabled 325 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX F Status Checks with LEDs TABLE F 2 SB Home LED Home Green Indicates the Home SB Indicates the SB whose USB and VGA ports are enabled F 1 3 LAN The LAN port comes equipped with the following LEDs TABLE F 3 LAN LEDs 100M LAN Green Indicates the Link status and Activity status of a Mounted only on the MMB Link Act 100M LAN 100M LAN Green Indicates the communication speed of a 100M _ Mounted only on the MMB Speed LAN Indicates the Link status and Activity status of a Mounted only on the MMB and GbE LAN Green Orange Indicates the communication speed of aGbE Mounted only on the MMB and Speed LAN GSPB The HDD comes equipped with the following LEDs TABLE F 4 HDD LEDs HDD Access Indicates the HDD access status HDD Alarm Indicates whether there is an erro
328. ition 2 contains 1 SB 1 LIOB and 1 LGSPB Any combination of the SB and LIOB or LGSPB is possible b Partition configuration example Here is an example where two partitions are each configured with 2 SBs 2 Possible 1 LIOB and 1 LGSPB c Partition configuration example Combinations over the IOBs are possible such as LIOB_OA and 3 Possible d Partition configuration example No partition can consist only of an SB Likewise no partition can consist 4 Not possible only of an LIOB and LGSPB FIGURE 3 1 Examples of partition configurations in the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 1800E 3 1 2 Partition setup procedure using the MMB Web UI This section describes the partition setup procedure using the MMB Web UI 1 Stop the partition gt gt See 1 3 1 Power Control window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 2 Incorporate the SB IOB and GSPB into the partition 46 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal gt gt See 1 3 4 Partition Configuration window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Incorporate free SBs and GSPBs Release and incorporate Reserved SBs If no free SB or GSPB is available remove an SB or GSPB from another existing partition and incorporate it into the partition 3 Set the Home SB 4 Set the Reserved SB as needed gt gt See 1 3 5
329. ition 3 gt PSA gt PCI Devices Refresh Help Ethernet Controller Select a status check box and click the Status Clear button to clear status PCI Device Information Unit TOB 0 PCIC FUNCAI OK _ Tntel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 6 020000 oson 8086 105E 06 00 15 177BD5SD5 _ 1000Mbps IPv4 Interfaces Interface Name IP Address bn Local Area Connection 10 192 168 3150 255 255 255 0 IPv6 Interfaces f Tnterface Name all TPv6 Address fi Scope Local Area Connection 10 FE80 DDF0 74A0 20A8FOE2 64 Link MAC Statistics Status Clear_ Return FIGURE 7 23 Ethernet Controller window 3 Start iSCSI Initiator _ Services Ga Share and Storage Management Storage Explorer E System Configuration Control Panel Task Scheduler 1 Windows Firewall with Advanced Security FIGURE 7 24 iSCSI Initiator 4 Click the Targets tab in the iSCSI Initiator Properties window One of the targets displayed in Discovered targets is connected to the NIC to be replaced If you know which target select the target click the Devices button and proceed to step 9 If you do not know select any target click the Properties button and proceed to step 5 207 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows iSCSI Initiator Properties xi Targets
330. ition settings fatter swilchlitg sc rcosiiiacei nnana aaia aiana kaaa ei dE KERA aaa 83 TABLE 3 18 Reserved SB settings after switching cesceeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeneeeeesaaeesseneeeesaeeseeaaeeeea 84 TABLE 6 1 Correspondence between bus addresses and interface NAMES esssesssesssersssssiessrerrnsrrrressees 153 TABLE 6 2 Hardware address description examples ccccccecssecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeesneesaaeeeeeeenenenaaeees 154 TABLE 6 3 Example of interface information about the replacement NIC ccccceseeeeeeeeeneeeeeetaeeeeeteeeeteneees 157 TABLE 6 4 Example of entered values corresponding to the interface names before and after NIC replacement E EE E E EN TE E E A A T EE 158 TABLE 6 5 Confirmation of interface Names cccsicc ccezeccdec sncascceyedeeceeaceseeseeatsasenessandeaueceeetadaessceeceduzedezeedneatenens 160 TABLE 91 Poworon monod and UNE sisis kie ankak EnA REEERE AKAA een eed 225 TABLE 9 2 Power off methods and LIES ia c cccceesccecccdsestesscueskhsGeneccetvssessadeasseevccce dash leva vessbesecesahcdeescetensiess 226 TABLE 9 3 Power Oriol PTB SIONS serseri naiara ERa EE RRRA ARAE RRA ARE AREER RE 227 TABLE 9 4 Relationship between scheduled operations and power recovery mode sssssssseeseerrrrresssssss 232 IPELE SS PONI OWON sosca E aR E EEA AE TEARS EAEE eae a een een 233 TABLE 9 6 Display and setting items in the ASR Control Window ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee
331. k unit Expandable Expandable Expandable Expandable 5 SA oe array controller oe 72 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal Component name AC power off AC power on AC power AC power on cold system All partitions off on Target partition on hot system cold Target hot maintenance partition partition off maintenance hot system cold partition maintenanc e PCI IO_PSU N A N A N A _Bo FAN N A N A N A PEXU N A N A N A Expandable Expandable Expandable Expandable 3 6 The component does not belong to any partition 12 CPU expansion requires VRM expansion for both the CPU core and the cache 3 The PCI Hot Plug function is required 4 One SAS disk unit or SAS array disk unit and one SAS card or SAS array controller card make one set of maintenance parts Replacing only the card is not possible 5 This is supported only in Linux For details on Xen KVM or VMware support in Linux contact the distributor where you purchased your product or a Fujitsu sales representative or systems engineer SE 6 Hot maintenance of a 785 GB 1 2 TB internal solid state drive that uses a PCI slot is not possible Stop the partition before the replacement License authentication with SB and enable kit combinations If you purchased the SB together with the Windows Server 2008 R2 2012 Enable Kit you need not per
332. k drive on the terminal side How to select USB 2 0 or USB 1 1 If the remote storage list has two selected devices when you click the Connect button the USB 2 0 USB 1 1 selection dialog box appears 40 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation Storace Devices Connection Type Device Type CD ROM USB Memory Disk FIGURE 1 26 USB 2 0 USB 1 1 selection dialog box Click the Swap button to switch the USB settings of the two devices However if only one device is selected when you click the Connect button the dialog box does not appear USB 2 0 is always selected in this case The following lists the buttons available in the USB2 0 USB1 1 selection dialog box TABLE 1 16 Buttons in the USB 2 0 USB 1 1 selection dialog box Closes the dialog box and applies the modified settings Switches the USB 2 070SB 1 1 sting Closes the dialog box and restores the settings Retrying a connection after the Reserved SB is switched When changing the Home SB of the partition connect text console and video redirection again 1 6 4 ServerView Suite ServerView Suite environment setup for Windows For details on the environmental settings of ServerView Suite for Windows see the ServerView Suite ServerView Installation Manager ServerView Suite environment setup for Linux 41 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAP
333. l is grayed out and cannot be selected for users with Partition Operator accounts Also they can select partition filtering only for the target partition The default settings are as follows For other than Partition Operator All radio button For Partition Operator Specified radio button and target partition tem Select the source to display Select the All or Specified radio button If you select AI filtering by source will not be applied If you select Specified you can set filtering by source Check the check box of a unit to display the events of that source Even after a switch to All and back to Specified the window retains the selections made with the Specified check boxes The default is AlI Select the units to display Select the All or Specified radio button If you select AI filtering by unit is not applied If you select Specified you can set filtering by unit Check the check box of a unit to display the events of that unit Even after a switch to All and back to Specified the window retains the selections made with the Specified check boxes The default is AlI Sort by Date Time Select ascending or descending order for displaying events by using the radio buttons The default is New event first Start Date Time _ Select the first event or an event of the specified time by using the radio buttons If you select Specified Time you can enter the start time
334. lacement procedure This message does not indicate any problem 4 Set an IP address for the replacement device Set the IP address and subnet mask recorded in step 2 Remarks If the following message appears when you set the IP address select Yes Microsoft TCP IP xi The IP address 192 168 3 150 you have entered for this network o adapter is already assigned to another adapter Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 6 which is no longer presentin the computer If the same address is assigned to both adapters and they both become active only one of them will use this address This may result in incorrect system configuration Do you want to remove the static IP configuration for the absent adapter FIGURE 7 31 TCP IP deletion message 5 Click the Refresh button on the Targets tab in the iSCSI Initiator Properties window Confirm that the target status becomes Connected 213 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows Windows Server 2008 iSCSI Initiator Properties E3 Favorite Targets Volumes and Devices RADIUS General Discovery Targets To access storage devices for a target select the target and then click Log on To see information about sessions connections and devices for a target dick Details Targets Connected eternus2000 cm0 port1 eternus2000 cm1 port0 Connected FIGURE 7 32 iSCSI Initiator
335. lot containing the mounted FC card is enabled means that the FC card was successfully incorporated Emulex LPe1250 F8 8Gb PCIe Fibre Channel Adapter on PCI bus Of device 08 irq 59 a lpFC 0000 0f 01 0 1 1303 Link Up Event x1 received Data xl x1 x4 x0 b Vendor FUJITSU Model E4000 Rev 0000 waka Type Direct Access ANSI SCSI revision 05 c 2 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed If only the message in a is displayed but the next line is not displayed or if the message in a is not displayed the FC card replacement itself was unsuccessful See Note below In this case power off the slot once Then check the following points again Whether the FC card is correctly inserted into the PCI slot Whether the latch is correctly set Eliminate the problem power on the slot again and check the log Ifthe message in a is displayed but the FC linkup message in b is not displayed the FC cable may be disconnected or the FC path may not be set correctly Power off the slot once Confirm the following points again Confirm the FC driver setting Confirm that the driver option of the etc modprobe conf file FC driver Ipfc is correctly set For details contact the distributor where you purchased your product or your sales representative Check the FC cable connection status Confirm the Storage FC settings Confirm that the settings that conform to the a
336. ls on how to set it again contact your sales representative or a field engineer For PXE boot after replacing the GSPB the boot order must be reconfigured For details on how to reconfigure it see 5 4 2 Overview of UEFI boot specifications in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN SAS disk unit SAS array disk unit One SAS disk unit or SAS array disk unit and one SAS card or SAS array controller card make one set of maintenance parts Replacing only the card is not possible The HDD can be replaced without removal of the unit For the hot replacement procedure for hard disks see CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks For the BBU replacement procedure see 3 3 5 Replacing the battery backup unit of an array controller card MMB In a system with two MMBs installed hot replacement can be used to replace an MMB during system operation Since a faulty MMB would presumably have been switched with the standby MMB simply replace the faulty MMB 63 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal standby MMB To replace the active MMB switch it with the standby MMB before replacing it The replacement does not affect control and monitoring in the system DVD drive The DVD drive can be replaced while the system continues operating However from the viewpoint of the system the replacement appears to be the removal and addition of a US
337. ls on how to set overwrite and the path to the dump file see Configuring a kernel memory dump and minimum memory dump below Configuring a kernel memory dump and minimum memory dump Configure the memory dump file in the following procedure 1 Log in to the server with Administrator privileges 2 Confirm the free space on the drive to store the memory dump file 3 Select Control Panel System The System Properties dialog box appears 4 Click the Advanced tab Then click Startup and Recovery Settings The Startup and Recovery dialog box appears 287 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Startup and Recovery 24x System startup Default operating system Windows Server iFastdetect NoExecuiig IV Time to display list of operating systems 30 seconds T Time to display recovery options when needed 30 seconds To edit the startup options file manually click Edit Edit System failure z Write an event to the system log IV Send an administrative alert MV Automatically restart M Write debugging information Complete memory dump Dump file SystemRoot MEMORY DMP IV Overwrite any existing file cne FIGURE 11 19 Startup and Recovery dialog box 5 Specify the following values Select the type of memory dump file in Write debugging informati
338. m on the disk 285 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures This section describes how to set up the environment to acquire memory dumps in Windows To ensure system recovery from a failure configure the following to set up the memory dump environment before starting to use memory dumps Memory dump files and paging files Memory dump and paging files are described below A memory dump file stores debug information on a STOP error fatal system error that occurred in the system After installing the operating system and applications for operations make settings for acquiring memory dumps Different information collected by a memory dump The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series enables you to acquire the following four types of memory dump Each type of memory dump gathers different information Complete memory dump A complete memory dump records all the physical memory contents at the time when the system stops It requires free space equivalent to the physical memory size plus about 1 MB on the boot volume The system can store only one dump at a time The new file would overwrite any existing dump file at the specified storage location Kernel memory dump A kernel memory dump records the contents of the Kernel memory space only It creates a dump file of 150 MB to 2 GB on the boot volume The size varies depending on the situation The system
339. management tool installation for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series CHAPTER 2 Operating System Installation Link Chapter 2 provides a link to Chapter 4 Installing the Operating System and Bundled Software in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal Chapter 3 describes the component configuration and how to replace add and remove components for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks Chapter 4 describes hot replacement of hard disks CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Chapter 5 describes hot maintenance of PCI cards in Red Hat Enterprise Linux CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Chapter 6 describes the methods of PCI card replacement with the PCI Hot Plug function CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows Chapter 7 describes the hot plugging procedure for PCI cards in Windows CHAPTER 8 Backup and Restore Chapter 8 describes the backup and restore operations required for restoring server data CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control Chapter 9 describes how to start and shut down the system and control the system power CHAPTER 10 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures Chapter 10 describes functions for checking the configuration and status of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server The functions are broken do
340. manuals The following manuals relate to the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series You can access these manuals at the following site http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest manual e Contact your sales representative for inquiries about the ServerView manuals ServerView Suite ServerView Operations Manager Quick Installation Windows ServerView Suite ServerView Operations Manager Quick Installation Linux ServerView Suite ServerView Installation Manager ServerView Suite ServerView Operations Manager Server Management ServerView Suite ServerView RAID Management User Manual ServerView Suite Basic Concepts ServerView Operations Manager Installation ServerView Agents for Linux ServerView Operations Manager Installation ServerView Agents for Windows Describes how to install and start ServerView Operations Manager in a Windows environment None None None None None None None None Describes how to install and start ServerView Operations Manager in a Linux environment Describes the installation procedure using ServerView Installation Manager Provides an overview of server monitoring using ServerView Operations Manager and describes the user interface of ServerView Operations Manager Describes RAID management using ServerView RAID Manager Describes the basic concepts of ServerView Suite Describes installation and update installation of ServerView Linux Agent
341. ment LAN Maintenance LAN Production LAN 4 1 2 1 IP addresses used in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server cccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 4 ka Management LAN iiio piaga eie dead ciien sees We ween Gdn aded raaa a adnet idadaan dices 8 1 3 1 Overview of the management LAN sssssssseesssssssessssssssnsssnrsssnnesnnesnnessnnernnntnnnstnnstnensnnesstenssenssnnsennenn 8 1 3 2 How to configure the management LAN ccceccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeseaaaeeeaaaesedeeaeeeteneeeeeseeaaaees 10 1 3 3 Redundant configuration of the management LAN sssssssssesssssssssrnsssssssssnrsssrnsssnnsssrnnnossnnsrnnesssennnent 14 1 4 Maintenance LANJREMCS LAN c ccscccccccccsacecceeeeeeadedieeceeezseseadeneesadencneeesaecesueneenandaeeeedaneesueceneeseeedaniieneds 16 To Producton LAN cenas a aaa nde eee hice leak 17 1 5 1 Overview of the production LAN 2 00 ccc sceceads eed eeaecte ce sdbsey ste nah daedceneaehateabeceadteuesguddaauadeecnuaeeYaureeaesniteds 17 1 5 2 Redundancy of trie production LAN 5 c1c ceidii dee eeete des i iaaa aa aaa ii aaa Ea 17 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use ooo eeeceecceeeseeeceeeeeeeeeee sees eeeaaeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeaaesseneeess 18 MG MME e iiini ale a a dane tesa e ee e AT da a a a a ia As 18 eae E A E A E Sutensbtanleceesuasiegedeeaaavaelecs 19 1 0 9 Remote operalon BMO ririn ea E RA NEEE A A ete aS 19 E CE e E E A A cseat eatnlld cs cacenav tenes 41 CHAPTER 2 Operat
342. ment command and confirm the location with the Fault LED that is on opt FJISVpsa bin diskctr ioc0 0 dev sda Faul dev sdb Faul 1 2 mount Faul 3 dev sdd Faul 5 Replace the disk You can confirm that the hard disk is inserted into slot 2 of iocO because the Fault LED is on in that slot 91 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks Turn off the Fault LED by executing the following disk management command opt FISVpsa bin diskctrl c ioc0 2 Note If there is anSSD removing the SSD may output the W13139 message from FJSVpsa to the systemevent log Confirm the location of the inserted hard disk by displaying the status with the disk management command opt FISVpsa bin diskctrl 1 ioco dev sda Faul dev sdb Faul dev sdc Faul dev sdd Faul Remarks When a disk is removed the information for the removed disk remains in the PSA window In contrast when a disk is mounted the information in the window is updated with the information for the mounted disk 6 After the disk management command is completed mount the disk partitions If the disk has the Mirror configuration in PRIMECLUSTER GDS incorporate it in PRIMECLUSTER GDS Remarks In the following case execute the following PSA command manually You are performing hot maintenance of the hard disk with PRIMECLUSTER GDS i
343. n Red Hat opt FUSVpsa sh force_search sh a 7 To restore each raw device take action as follows If the hard disk had contained a raw device Configure the raw device according to the manual of the application used for raw access to the replacement hard disk That application was stopped before the replacement After completing the configuration restart the application 4 2 4 Replacement procedure for hard disk failures causing non responsiveness If HDD recovery using an HDD driver is not possible because a hard disk failure caused the relevant HDD to hang replace the hard disk by using the following procedure 1 Ifthe system is non responsive because of a hard disk failure the following message detected by PSA appears and the Fault LED of the hard disk goes on For RHELS 92 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks FJSVpsa E 14134 IOB n HDD n scsi h c i 1 Device error offlined vendor xxxxxxxx model xxxxxxxx serial no xxxxxxxxxx SCSI number h host number c channel number Si id number l lun number The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed 2 Confirm the status by executing the disk management command At this time the disk whose Fault LED is on is the disk where the offline error occurred RHELS SASU internal disk opt FISVpsa bin diskctrl 1 ioco dev sda Faul ED Off
344. n corresponding the PCI slot number You can confirm that it matches the mounting location of the operational target NIC If the NIC has multiple interfaces you need to deactivate all the interfaces on the NIC according to step 4 Confirm that all the interfaces that have the same bus address in a subsequent step Note You will use the output in step 13 Record the executed commands and output results for later reference Example ls l sys class net device grep 0000 0b 01 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 10 17 sys class net eth0 devic gt devices pci0000 00 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 10 17 sys class net ethl devic gt devices pci0000 00 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 1 As the above example shows when more than one interface is displayed they are on the same NIC If only one interface is displayed you can skip the rest of this step Proceed to step 4 Confirm the hardware address from the interface name managed by the operating system Example cat sys class net ethl address 00 06r Oc 70 rc3239 Confirm the interface name that has this hardware address 111 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Example grep il 00 0e 0c 70 c3 39 etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg eth etc sysconfig network script
345. n the operating system in each partition Console redirection IP address Console Redirection IP Address Console BMC Physical IP Set it from This IP address is used to access the console Redirection redirection function in each partition from IP Address the PC on the management LAN An IP address on the management LAN is assigned to each partition These three addresses must have the same subnet address 2 The server administrator need not be concerned with the individual IP addresses specified for communication 5 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 3 The IP address is intended only for communication with the active MMB 4 It is connected to the PSA to MMB communication LAN inside the cabinet and it is not connected to any external network The assigned IP address must be in a different subnet from the management LAN maintenance LAN or production LAN The default setting is 172 30 0 1 24 and it does not have to be changed unless it is in conflict with another subnet 5 This IP address is to access the console redirection function provided by BMC It accesses BMC from the user port on the management LAN of MMB via the dedicated network for BMC to MMB communication inside the cabinet MMB changes the local IP address of BMC to the IP address on the management LAN by NAT From the PC on the management LAN the console redirection func
346. n with duplication software Intel PROSET ETERNUS multipath driver This chapter describes the procedure needed for a NIC or FC card used in combination with such duplication software and the procedure needed for a NIC or FC card used alone Note The procedures include operations for related software Depending on the configuration the procedures may differ or require additional operations When doing the actual work be sure to see the related product manuals 1 1 Overall flow This section shows the overall flow of hot plugging The following procedures are required for all types of cards for PCI Hot Plug support in the current version of Windows Server 2008 If an operation is required for a specific type of PCI card the operation is described in the relevant procedure The contents of an operation depend on the software to be combined with the card For details on the fjpciswap command see 4 10 PCI Card Operation Command fjpciswap in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Replacement procedure 1 Confirm the physical location by using the display function of the fjpciswap command 2 Replace the PCI card by using the swap function of the fjpciswap command 182 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows 3 Confirm the replacement card by using the display function of the fjpciswap command Addition procedure 1 Add a PCI card by using the add
347. nalyze the system status Therefore we may ask you to download the event data and submit it to a Fujitsu certified service engineer Procedure 1 Click the Download button in the System Event Log window A dialog box for specifying the storage file and path appears 2 Enter the pathname The event data stored in the SEL is downloaded to the PC displaying the Web UI window Filtering the events to display 279 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Procedure 1 Click the Filter button in the System Event Log window The System Event Log Filtering Condition window appears DVDB MMB20 MMB 1 PCI_Boxw0 PCI_Box 1 Model PRIMEQUEST 1800E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCD3AC111 FUjiTSU Serial Number 1480935001 Sta Normal Og _ System Event Log Filtering Condition Heip Select the Gltering conditions and click the Apply button to take efect 4 Note The followings are AND conditions es a ISeverity E Error H Waming F lnfo J 2 Partition AL I OSpeciied 10 11 2 z 3Unit DAI 5 OSpecdied PSUs Fans J B20 SB I SB 2 SBs3 o 10B 0 10B 1 o GSPB 0 GSPB 1 J SASU O SASU 1 SASU 2 SASU 3 o o Source Al OSpectied CPU DIMM Chipset Vokage Temperature Other S Sort by Date Time New event frst Old event first 6 Start Date Time gt First event Specified Tame E Ce ee ee T End Date Time Last event Specif
348. nc number at Seg Bus Dev Func Perform the following steps 2 and 3 for each of these multifunction cards 195 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows 2 Select the UNIT name of the FC card to be replaced open the Fibre Channel window and record the WWN hex value of the replacement device gt Partition gt Partition 1 gt PSA gt PCI Devices Fibre Channel Refresh raw Select a status check box and click the Status Clear button to clear status PCI Device Information 05r Foie Funcn 10881 POICE4 FUNCSO D7 0 OHANsN InE8n a 0000 _ Status Choor Sowetan _Rewase an Retum FIGURE 7 10 Fibre Channel window 3 Start HBAnywhere and acquire the port number of the replacement device based on the WWN acquired in step 2 From the left pane select the relevant WWN From the right pane click the Port Information tab The information displayed in OS Device Name is a port number in the following example Scsi2 DE HBAnywaree ile EJ Eile Yew Port Discovery Batch Help DA i ekia Diagnostics l DHCHAP Transceiver Data veo amp Portinformation Statistics Maintenance TargetMapping Oriver Parameters irs e Port Attributes Port WWN 10 00 00 00 C9 88 57 C6 Driver Version Baier Node WWI 000 00 00 C9 68 57 C6 Driver Name OS Device Name ZAE Symbolic Nod
349. nctions that can be selected The node list tree appears 2 Select the network folder containing the MMB Then select Object Create Node from the menu bar If the network folder has not yet been created create it before performing this operation 3 For the node properties enter the required items such as the display name and host name For an operations management server PRIMEQUEST 1000 series running Linux click Basic Information Add Then select the MMB from the list Also click Interface Add to register the physical IP address of the MMB 4 The registered node appears as an MMB icon on the Systemwalker console For details on how to register the MMB nodes see the Systemwalker Centric Manager PRIMERGY PRIMEQUEST Administration Guide Remarks For an operations management server PRIMERGY whose operating system is Windows the Solaris OS or Linux the MMB icon will not appear though there is no problem with monitoring When the MMB node has been registered through detection the node icon may indicate a general computer not the MMB In this case change the properties to change the machine type to MMB Then select Policy Distribute Policy In the Distribute Policy window select Apply Immediately Then click the OK button 2 2 SNMP trap linkage This section provides an overview of SNMP trap linkage and describes the conversion definition procedure 364 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 100
350. nd 9 months from the start of use or replacement of the After about two years battery For details on the RAS Support Service see the RAS Support Service User s Guide Replacing the battery unit The battery unit replacement flow is described below 1 Stop the entire system Then ask a field engineer to perform step 2 A field engineer performs step 2 2 Replace the UPS battery unit 3 Take over the procedure from the field engineer Display the GUI of RAS Support Service on the partition under the UPS battery unit life cycle monitoring 4 On the list of service life components update the mounting date of the UPS battery to the replacement date 66 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal 5 Stop RAS Support Service 3 3 7 Replacing an internal solid state drive that uses a PCI slot This section describes the procedure for replacing an internal solid state drive that uses a PCI slot a 785 GB 1 2 TB internal solid state drive Note Hot replacement of an internal solid state drive that uses a PCI slot is not supported Stop the partition before the replacement In a RAID configuration LINUX software RAID 1 Place the faulty PCI card offline and remove the card e mdadm dev md0 fail dev fiob e mdadm dev md0 remove dev fiob 2 Power off the partition For details on powering off partiti
351. nd Procedures Function Reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Retrieves the secret key or CSR signature request stored 1 5 7 SSL menu on the MMB Imports the signed electronic certificate sent from the 1 5 7 SSL menu certificate authority to the MMB Creates a self signed certificate 1 5 7 SSL menu Creates a private key for the SSH server 1 5 8 SSH menu Makes the user settings required for control of the MMB 1 5 9 Remote Server Management window via RMCP from the remote server Operates access control for network protocols 1 5 10 Access Control window Sets e mail notification for when an event occurs 1 5 11 Alarm E Mail window Executes the batch firmware update process 1 6 1 Firmware Update menu Backs up and restores MMB UEFI configuration 1 6 2 Backup Restore Configuration menu information Provides support in the form of a wizard for device 1 6 3 Maintenance Wizard window maintenance Operates REMCS and makes settings related to REMCS 1 6 4 REMCS menu 244 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 10 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures 10 2 MMB CLI You can access the MMB CLI via the MMB serial port or the management LAN The commands that you can use from the MMB CLI include those for display and settings For details on MMB command lines see Chapter 2 MMB CLI Command Line Interfac
352. nection 11 Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 12 Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 9 Intel R PROJ1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 4 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 9 amp TEAM Team 0 gt TEAM Team 0 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 10 TEAM Team 0 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 3 Other devices f Processors lt gt Storage controllers gE system devices System management devices E Universal Serial Bus controllers FIGURE 7 6 Device Manager window 11 Execute the command that incorporates teaming information into server management software 191 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows C gt fjpciswap f Cie 3 2 Hot plugging a non redundant NIC This section describes the hot plugging procedure in networks without redundancy a NIC is not incorporated into teaming For the PRIMEQUEST 1800E perform operations from the PSA Web UI 1 Confirm the physical location by using the display function of the fjpciswap command Here replace IOB 1 PCIC 5 C gt fjpciswap 1 Replaceable PCI cards are displayed UnitName Func DeviceName TOB 1 PCIC 5 FUNC 0 Intel R PRO 1000 P7 L Port Server Adapter 15 TOB 1 PCIC 5 FUNC 1 Intel R PRO 1000 P1 L Port Server Adapter 16 C gt 2 Disable the relevant d
353. need to manipulate the power supply to the appropriate slot through the operating system First use the following procedure to obtain the slot number from the mounting location of the PCI slot for the card It will be used to manipulate the power supply 1 Identify the mounting location of the PCI card to be replaced See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to check the mounting location board and slot of the PCI card to be replaced 2 Obtain the slot number of the mounting location Check the table in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers and obtain the slot number that is unique in the cabinet and assigned to the confirmed mounting location This slot number is the identification information for operating the slot of the PCI card to be replaced Note The four digit decimal numbers shown in lt Slot number gt in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers have the leading digits filled with zeros The actual slot numbers do not include the zeros in the leading digits Power off the PCI slot Confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for the target slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the slot number confirmed in step 2 is shown at lt slot number gt location in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt To
354. nfiguration After registering an MMB node on the Systemwalker console you can monitor problem events SNMP traps from the MMB of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series hardware For duplicate MMBs register two MMB nodes to monitor each MMB for SNMP trap occurrence separately from the other MMB The MMB node registration procedure is as follows 1 In the Systemwalker console window select Edit from the functions that can be selected The node list tree appears 2 Select the network folder containing the MMB Then select Object Create Node from the menu bar If the network folder has not yet been created create it before performing this operation 3 For the node properties enter the required items such as the display name and host name For an operations management server PRIMEQUEST 1000 series running Linux click Basic Information Add Then select the MMB from the list In addition click Interface Add to register the physical IP address of the active MMB 4 For duplicate MMBs also register the standby MMB Select Object Create Node again For an operations management server PRIMEQUEST 1000 series running Linux add the MMB for each machine type For the interface register the physical IP address of the standby MMB 5 The registered node appears as an MMB icon on the Systemwalker console For details on the MMB node registration procedure and notes on when MMB switching occurs because of an MMB failure see th
355. nformation acquisition command PCI card operation command Firewall setting command for the management LAN interface For details on the CLI see the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Hardware configuration management This function displays hardware resources that configure a partition It displays the following configuration information SB configuration IOB configuration GSPB configuration CPU configuration identification information such as the maximum number of mounted CPUs CPU mounting locations and CPU type Memory configuration detailed information such as the mounting location and memory type PCI configuration error status and detailed information such as the mounted PCI cards mounted PCI devices and PCI device type Configuration of devices e g HDD tape drive with SCSI FC connections Network configuration network interfaces 254 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Operating system information display This function displays information on the operating system installed on the partition It displays the following information Operating system information operating system type operating system version package installation information Storage configuration information device capacity Network configuration information interface connection status speed Operatin
356. nformation at the Reserved SB switching time 2 Check the status Click System System Status Check the status in the System Status window 3 Stop the partition 1 Click Partition Power Control The Power Control window appears 2 Select Power Off in Power Control for the partition Then click the Apply button 4 Check the configuration of the partition Click Partition Partition Configuration Confirm the partition configuration in the Partition Configuration window 80 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal 5 Incorporate the replacement SB into the partition 1 Click Partition Partition Configuration Add Unit button The Add SB IOB GSPB to Partition window appears 2 Click the radio button of the replacement SB Then click the Apply button The replacement SB is incorporated into the partition 6 Restore the replacement Reserved SB back to a Reserved SB again 1 Click Partition Partition Configuration Remove Unit button The Remove SB IOB GSPB from Partition window appears 2 Click the radio button of the replacement Reserved SB Then click the Apply button The replacement Reserved SB is disconnected free from the partition 3 Click Partition Reserved SB Configuration Check the check box of the SB set free in the above step 2 in the Reserved SB Config
357. ngs For settings specific to SNMP v3 use the SNMP v3 Configuration menu SNMP Trap Specifies SNMP trap destinations You can set up to 16 destinations Each trap destination item includes the Community User name destination IP address SNMP version and authentication level settings Test Trap button Sends a test trap to the specified trap destination SNMP v3 Configuration Settings specific to SNMP v3 Specifies the Engine ID Enter the encryption hash function authentication passphrase and encryption passphrase for users SSL SSL settings Create CSR Creates a private key and a request for a signature CSR Certificate Signing Request SSL certificate status Displays the current status of SSL certificate installation Key length Length of the private key 1024 bits or 2048 bits Entered information on the owner specified for the CSR Country prefecture city town organization department server e mail address Create CSR button Displays a confirmation dialog box Clicking OK creates a new private key and a request for a signature After completion a dialog box appears Clicking OK registers the private key and causes a jump to the Export Key CSR window Clicking Cancel gives an instruction to discard the created private key and CSR Export Key CSR Exports an MMB private key CSR backup Export Key button Exports a private key Export CSR button Exports a CSR Note Clicking the Export Key
358. nit after the REMCS Center has been notified of the hardware problem notification thereon to the REMCS Center is suppressed Events detected by PSA are cleared when the operating system is rebooted or when PSA is stopped or restarted When a problem with a notification level that is higher than that of an event for which notification is being suppressed occurs in the same part problem notification takes place even within the notification suppression period At this time the notification suppression time is cleared to 0 and the notification suppression continues Periodic connection Automatically connects to the REMCS Center at specified times to confirm the existence of the communication path and REMCS Agent Installing the REMCS function The REMCS function of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series REMCS Agent consists of the MMB and PSA installed on the partition side The MMB REMCS Agent function is installed as standard For details on the procedure for installing the function in PSA see the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN Supported connection configurations The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series supports only the connection configurations shown below Each of these connection configurations uses only SMTP for communication with the REMCS Center Internet connection e mail Communication with the REMCS Center is executed via the Internet P P connection ISDN e mail Communication with the REMCS Center is executed with a point to
359. nment Setup and Tool Installation 3 A connection for text console redirection is established Tera Term pre Or press tilde dot FIGURE 1 19 telnet connection for text console redirection connection established Text console redirection via SSH 1 Use terminal software such as Tera Term to connect to the IP for text console redirection via SSH The following steps are the same as those for telnet 2 When the Main Menu window is displayed press the r key 3 A connection for text console redirection is established Forced disconnection of text console redirection Note The PRIMEQUEST 1800E has supported forced disconnection of text console redirection since version SA11021 The PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 has supported it with all integrated firmware versions 1 Only one user at a time is permitted to use the text console redirection function If a user attempts to connect using the function while another user is using it the message Console Redirection already in use appears The window appears as follows 34 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation Tera Term VT File Edit Setup Control Window Resize Help Hakokokokokokakokokokokekokokakekokokokekokokekokokokekokokokekokokokekokokokok Welcome to PRIMEQUEST Remote Manager Firmware Revision 5 13D 1 01A52 Firmware built Jan 27 2011 10 05 36 SERRE RR RRR ck chekeokk ckob
360. nnnnuserennnnenennna 59 TABLE 3 4 M mory Mirror Condilans rsrsrs iesean ano EENE KA AARRE TARONA E EENKEER RARA 59 TABLE 3 5 Replaceable components and replacement conditions 0 2 eee eee eee sence eee eeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeaaees 61 TABLE 3 6 Replacement notification messages of RAS Support Service BBU ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 64 TABLE 7 Evon We Bt CSUN arere eine vec baa ex veils SEE R AENA aS EE eeeeedt ands 65 TABLE 3 8 Event log when the battery level is low 1 eeeececcceeeeeeesee cee eeeeeenseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseeseseeeeeensenneaees 66 TABLE 3 9 Event log when the battery level is low 2 ooc cccccceeesecccceeeessnaned ceeeestuneeceved ees uneeceeeeestbbaseeeeevesiaantae 66 TABLE 3 10 Replacement notification messages of RAS Support Service UPS eccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeetteeeees 66 TABLE 3 11 Expandability of components and addition conditions eeetcecceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeteeaeeeeenaeees 72 TABLE 3 12 Component removal COMCMIOME sssrinin enia aaia aaia 77 TABLE 3 13 Partition settings before Switching sic cents ie aana NEKEEN K AANE ARRENE AN 82 TABLE 3 14 Reserved SB settings before switching ccceeseceeeseeeeeeeetesaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeneeeeetaaeesseaeeeesaeesteneeeeea 82 TABLE 2 15 Fariiion status TUT ie ce cece tate ccceeens esnie enas EARR A RREA AA RARR 83 TABLE 3 16 Explanation of partition status transitions o nsiussiiniinanoyinannn iaaa aaiae iaaa 83 TABLE 3 17 Part
361. nt of hard disks on a partition The hard disk controller used by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server enables disk LED control and disk status checks through the SGPIO Serial GPIO function You can use this provided function together with the disk management command to ensure safe maintenance with the SGPIO function at various times such as when a hardware failure is detected or when a disk is replaced or added Remarks The disk management command is supported in RHEL and Windows REMCS linkage This function reports resource information or problems in a partition to the REMCS Center in linkage with the MMB 255 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures For details on REMCS see the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series REMCS Installation Manual C122 E120EN For details on using PRIMECLUSTER linkage see the PRIMECLUSTER manuals Operations management software linkage This is the function for linkage with operations management software The following lists the software that can be mounted on partitions and can be linked with PSA PSA can be linked with operations management software such as Systemwalker The linkage uses SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Operations management software SNMP Reference PRIMEQUEST 1800E MMB MIB MMB firmware il Linux Windows To REMCS Management LAN z r System administrator
362. nterface interface FIGURE 5 2 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface NIC replacement procedure This section describes the procedure for NIC replacement Notes When replacing multiple NICs be sure to replace them one by one If you replace multiple cards at the same time they may not be correctly configured To perform hot replacement in a system where a bonding device is installed design the system so that it specifies ONBOOT YES in all interface configuration files the etc sysconfig networkscripts ifcfg eth files regardless of whether the NIC to be replaced is a configuration interface of the bonding device An IP address does not need to be assigned to unused interfaces This procedure is for preventing the device name of the replacement target NIC from being changed after hot replacement If ONBOOT NO also exists the procedure described here may not work properly 1 Make the necessary preparations If the ServerView RAID service is running temporarily stop the service by using the following procedure 1 Log in as the system administrator root 2 Execute the following command to check the running status of the ServerView RAID service sbin service aurad status Display example when the service is running Checking for ServerView RAID Manager amDaemon pid XXX is running XXX indicates the process ID Display example when the service is stopped Checking for ServerView RAID M
363. nting 0A0 0BO0 0CO and 0D0 DIMMs sequence 1 the partition cannot be started G 2 1 DIMM mounting sequence The sequence for adding DIMMs depends on the number of CPUs on the SB and whether or not the Memory Mirror function is used The following table lists the sequence for adding DIMMs as well as the slot locations 341 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions TABLE G 7 Mounting sequence of DIMMs where a single CPU is mounted on an SB 0A0 OBO 0CO ODO 0A0 OBO 0CO ODO 0A2 0B2 0C2 0D2 1 3 OA1 0B1 0C1 OD1 N A OA1 0B1 0C1 OD1 2 0A2 0B2 0C2 0D2 4 0A3 0B3 0C3 OD3 N A N A Not applicable TABLE G 8 Mounting sequence of DIMMs where two CPUs are mounted on an SB OAO OBO O0CO ODO OAO OBO O0CO ODO 1A0 1B0 1CO 1DO 1A0 1B0 1C0 1DO 0A2 0B2 0C2 0D2 2 0A2 0B2 0C2 0D2 1A2 1B2 1C2 1D2 0A1 0B1 0C1 OD1 1A2 1B2 1C2 1D2 1A1 1B1 1C1 1D1 0A3 0B3 0C3 0D3 4 0A1 0B1 0C1 OD1 1A3 1B3 1C3 1D3 1A1 1B1 1C1 1D1 N A 0A3 0B3 0C3 0D3 N A 1A3 1B3 1C3 1D3 N A N A Not applicable G 2 2 DIMM mounting patterns This section shows mounting patterns that satisfy both of the above described DIMM mixing criteria and DIMM mounting sequence The mounting pattern is determined by the number of CPUs on the SB and whether or not the Memory Mirror function is used TABLE G 9 DIMM mounting pattern S
364. nts Methods and Procedures This chapter describes the maintenance functions provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series It also describes the actions to take for any problems that occur 1A Mamona nee saia E 252 Tia TroubBsS RODNO ricinos aaea 263 11 3 Notes on Troubleshooting ceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 277 11 4 Collecting Maintenance Data 278 11 5 Configuring and Checking Log Information 296 TLG Fimmware UPOSIOS ciccsaccs cs cnckeeettiarceethengyeteeeeieceivvaete 297 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 11 1 Maintenance The PRIMEQUEST 1000 series supports hot maintenance of PSUs and fans This enables maintenance of the system as it continues operating Also the PCI Hot Plug function can be used for hot maintenance of PCI Express cards For details and a list of the replaceable components see CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal Remarks Field engineers perform the maintenance on the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server 11 1 1 Maintenance using the MMB The MMB provides system maintenance functions through the Maintenance menu of the Web UI You can use the Maintenance menu to back up and restore system configuration information For details on the Maintenance menu see 1 6 Maintenance Menu in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Maintenance foll
365. nts to check the mounting location board and slot of the PCI card to be removed 2 Obtain the slot number of the mounting location Check the table in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers and obtain the slot number that is unique in the cabinet and assigned to the confirmed mounting location This slot number is identification information for operating the slot of the PCI card to be removed 4 Power off the PCI slot Confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for the target slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the slot number confirmed in step 3 is shown at lt slot number gt in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt Note lt BUS number gt and lt slot number gt are both four digit decimal values Here lt BUS number gt is information added to the slot number for descriptive purposes The operational target directory is defined uniquely with lt slot number gt To disable a PCI card and make it ready for removal write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out echo 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power This concurrently removes the device associated with the relevant adapter from the system Note Be sure to manipulate the power supply from
366. o check the mounting location board and slot of the PCI card to be replaced 2 Obtain the slot number of the mounting location 101 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Check the table in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers and obtain the slot number that is unique in the cabinet and assigned to the confirmed mounting location This slot number is the identification information for operating the slot of the PCI card to be replaced Checking the power status of a PCI slot Using the PCI slot number confirmed in Confirming the slot number of a PCI slot confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for this slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the PCI slot number confirmed in Confirming the slot number of a PCI slot is shown at lt slot number gt location in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt Note lt BUS number gt and lt slot number gt are both four digit decimal values Here lt BUS number gt is information added to the slot number for descriptive purposes The operational target directory is defined uniquely with lt slot number gt Confirm that the PCI card in the slot is enabled or disabled by displaying the power file contents in th
367. of PSA MMB LAN use NIC in ICH on the Home SB The network device name is not defined uniquely It is searched in NIC in ICH on the Home SB by using the bus number device number and function number assigned to NIC Because the Reserved SB function keeps the communication between the PSA and MMB even if the Home SB is switched the MMB writes over the MAC address of the NIC in ICH on the Home SB and keeps the same MAC address as that before the SB was switched For this MAC address a unique value is assigned to each partition and managed as system FRU information so that it is unique per cabinet 7 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 3 Management LAN This section describes the configuration of the management LAN for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series 1 3 1 Overview of the management LAN The MMB has two GbE LAN ports USER ports dedicated to the management LAN The partition side can use the GbE LAN port on the GSPB as a management LAN port The PCL communications operations management server is connected to the MMB USER port through an external switch IP addresses of the management LAN MMB Each MMB has one physical IP address for the management interface of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server In addition to that the primary MMB shares a common virtual IP address in the system You can set these IP addresses from the MMB Web UI or CLI Remarks Virt
368. okck kek cekebekokek Main Menu c Change password r Console Redirection CEMS SAC Enter selection or 0 to quit onsole redirection already in use User 10 18 107 160 is currently connected If needed the current user can be disconnected Do you really want to force disconnect current user yes no FIGURE 1 20 Forced disconnection of text console redirection 1 2 The window displays the IP address of the user currently using text console redirection If the connection uses a proxy the displayed IP address may not be correct If the IP address is unknown the message with the IP address does not appear The yes no selection enables you to disconnect the user currently using text console redirection Enter yes to go to the Text Console Redirection window in place of the current user The terminal software of the disconnected user displays the following window 35 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation ui Tera Term VT File Edit Setup Control Window Resize Help onsole Redirection or EMS Emergency Management Services o exit the Console Redirection EMS SAC press lt ESC gt r press tilde dot onsole redirection interrupted User 10 18 107 160 took over the connection ress any key to continue E FIGURE 1 21 Forced disconnection of text console redirection 2 Enter no to return to the Main Menu window 3
369. ol PSU DDC power on control only as needed and status display FAN speed control Optimum control of FAN speed CPU voltage dynamic Dynamic control of CPU P state according to operating rate frequency control of application Time eter NTP client NTP client synchronization Monitoring and reporting functions Hardware Hardware problem ae ao Hardware problem monitoring by MMB BMC UEFI PSA monitoring and monitoring reporting Hardware life cycle TEA Life cycle monitoring of RAID battery backup unit monitoring Partition problem monitoring Watchdog Timer monitoring by MMB UEFI PSA Power control problem KEII one Power control sequence problem monitoring monitoring FAN speed problem monitoring Voltage problem monitoring Voltage problem monitoring Temperature problem Fan speed problem monitoring cake Temperature problem monitoring monitoring Hardware proactive Proactive monitoring of CPU DIMM and HDD hardware monitoring failures External reporting External reporting by e mail SNMP or REMCS 301 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Event monitoring Sensor detected event monitoring Threshold monitoring Threshold monitoring of temperature power voltage and fan speed Eco related status display Content improvement history information enhancement of MMB collected log System event log Hardware and UEF
370. ol window appears 230 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control Medel PRIMPQUEST 1500F Active AAIR Port Naber MCDIACLL Fujitsu Seria Number bseoe0 States Vows Power Control Sider Hej Select a Power Coctrsl opasa for cee oe more parson then chek te Apply batten te take eifect E SVIM RAS 4_ 101 Oa we l per aka le eer alo if i Loy 4 FIGURE 9 5 Power Control window The column has partition numbers For details on the Power Control window see 1 3 1 Power Control window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 3 Select Power Off in Power Control for the partition that you are going to power off Then click the Apply button The specified partition is powered off Remarks Windows shutdown from the MMB Web UI requires ServerView Agent For details on how to set ServerView Agent contact the distributor where you purchased your product or your sales representative 231 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 9 3 Scheduled Operations This section describes scheduled operations 9 3 1 Powering on a partition by a scheduled operation Setting scheduled operations for a partition will turn on the power to the partition at a set time A daily weekly or monthly schedule can be set or a schedule
371. ollers GbE 7 GbE 5 GbE 3 GbE 1 PCI_Box PCI_Box connection connection port 1 port o GbE 6 GbE 4 GbE 2 GbE 0 SAS 1 SAS 0 FIGURE B 3 GSPB port numbers OCO LOCAL REMOTE USER USER COM port 1 port 0 FIGURE B 4 MMB port numbers 313 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX B Physical Mounting Locations and Port Numbers 314 C122 E108 10EN APPENDIX C Lists of External Interfaces This appendix describes the external interfaces of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series C 1 List of External System Interfaces ceeeeee 316 C 2 List of External MMB Interfaces ccnn 317 C 3 List of Other External Interfaces 0 0 318 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX C Lists of External Interfaces C 1 List of External System Interfaces The following lists the external system interfaces TABLE C 1 External system interfaces IOB interface Number of Mounting component Remarks ports VGA 1 SB Max 1600 x 1200 dots 65536 colors LAN GSPB ok GSPB 1000Base T PCI_Box interface PCI Express 2 0 8 lane PCI_Box interface PCI_Box PCI Express 2 0 8 lane PCI Express slot onboard 7 ae IOB PCI Express slot PCI_Box HDD 4 SAS disk unit SAS array 2 5 inch HDD disk unit 316 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX C Lists of External Interfaces C 2 List of External MMB Interfaces The following lists the external MMB interfaces
372. olutions Product RAID 5 6 SAS based on LSI MegaRAID SAS address 0 50090057008068F0 a eons 512 MB Firmware version number FlashROM size of array controller _NVRAM size 32 KB SAE SAS Port SEAGATE ST3146855SS OK SAS Pot G Ferme package version 1101 0008 EE SAS Port mare version Ekai AE SAS Port Firmware build time Feb 6 2009 140252 FE SAS Port BIOS version 20600 EE SAS Port 7 Driver name msas2k3 FIGURE K 7 General tab in the ServiewView RAID Manager 5 When more than one target MegaRAID SAS array controller is mounted at the same time return to step 3 Use the same steps to confirm the firmware version number of other array controller 373 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX K How to Confirm Firmware of SAS Array Controller Card 374 C122 E108 10EN APPENDIX L Software Link For details on bundled software and drivers supplied with the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series hardware see Chapter 3 Software Configuration in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series General Description C122 B022EN APPENDIX M Failure Report Sheet This appendix includes the failure report sheet Use this sheet to report a failure M 1 Failure Report Sheet cceccceseeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeees 377 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX M Failure Report Sheet M 1 Failure Report Sheet OS Red Hat Enterprise Linux Version Windows Sever ae VMware Vers
373. omponents equipped with LAN PONTS io tiene Ee eE rete eas E E 331 E A D E E ES 332 LED WYP eS ici sascdises etensodessso ei eE a sel EEN E E SECON EERE 325 Legacy BIOS Compatibility CSM eee 348 List of External MMB Interfaces 0 ceesceeeseeeeeeeees 317 List of External System Interfaces eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 316 List of Other External Interfaces 0 cceecesceeeseeeeeeees 318 Lists of External Interfaces cccecceesseeeseesteeeneeeeees 315 Log file information 00 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeceaeeneenees 255 M Mi atm tM ANGE eostig tseni neei Ee ai iEneas 232 Maintenance LAN REMCS LAN eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneees 16 Maintenance LAN and REMCS LAN of the MMB 16 Maintenance mode functions ecceeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 259 Maintenance Modes ce eeeceeeceseceeeeeceeeeeeeceereeeeeeees 259 Management LAN cinien ereire 8 Management LAN configuration 9 Management Network Specifications cece 309 Management network specifications seeeeeeeeees 309 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use 18 Maximum number of connections using the remote operation PURCHOM a AONA EESE E A EE viel Wide Bede eee tee ste 20 Memory dump types and Sizes eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 286 Memory Mirror Conditions eee eeseceeeeeeeeeeseeeneeees 59 Menus provided by the UEFI 0 eee eeeeeeeee 248 MIB file Contents esesten eiras 356 MIB Tree StrUctUTe issiiieiiicsonciiise
374. on Kernel Memory Dump recommended The memory dump file records only the kernel memory Specify the directory together with the full path for saving the memory dump file in Dump File For the kernel memory dump checking the Overwrite any existing file check box causes the debug information to overwrite the specified file each time Small Memory Dump 64 or 128 KB The memory dump file records minimum information Specify the directory together with the full path for saving the minimum dump in Small Dump Directory The directory specified in Small Dump Directory will contain the new file created each time a fatal error occurs 6 Click the OK button to close the Startup and Recovery dialog box 7 Click the OK button to close the System Properties dialog box 8 Restart the partition 288 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures After the partition restart the settings take effect lt For Windows Server 2012 gt Configure the memory dump file in the following procedure 1 Log in to the server with Administrator privileges 2 Confirm the free space on the drive to store the memory dump file 3 Click Control Panel System and Security System Advanced system settings 4 Click Settings under Startup and Recovery on the Advanced tab The Startup and Recovery dialog box appears Sy
375. on ASR Automatic Server Restart Control Starts video redirection and text console redirection Sets various modes for the partition Displays information on the currently registered user account Changes the password of the currently logged in user the password of the currently logged in user Displays a list of users connected to the MMB via Serial Telnet SSH and Web UI Sets the MMB date and time Sets the IP address and other values for MMB access Sets Speed Duplex of each port on the MMB board Sets the network protocol of the MMB 1 3 7 Partition x menu 1 3 7 Partition x menu 1 3 7 Partition x menu 1 3 7 Partition x menu 1 4 1 User List window 1 4 2 Change Password window 1 4 3 Who window 1 5 1 Date Time window 1 5 2 Network Interface window 1 5 3 Management LAN Port Configuration window 1 5 4 Network Protocols window Configures automatic update for Web UI windows whose 1 5 5 Refresh Rate window status changes Makes settings related to SNMP Sets an SNMP trap destination Sets the Engine ID and makes user settings specific to SNMP v3 Creates a secret key and the corresponding CSR signature request 243 1 5 6 SNMP Configuration menu 1 5 6 SNMP Configuration menu 1 5 6 SNMP Configuration menu 1 5 7 SSL menu C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 10 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods a
376. on from the Console Redirection window of the MMB a Java applet is downloaded to the user s browser The terminal displays serial output from the partition connected via the LAN The following shows a connection diagram of text console redirection PRIMEQUEST 1000 X Partition o OS BIOS Text Console Redirection Java Applet FIGURE 1 14 Connection diagram of text console redirection The following shows the Text Console Redirection window 30 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation E RemoteView R Berial over LAN SOL 2 3 x IP Address 5 Logoff Power Management Status Power On Command Console Redirection 4 Leave Console 1 Connected to Console online Applet running Co eomma fereare voer conmas Enter Console Connects to the console If another console redirection connection has already been established clicking the Enter Console button will fail to establish a connection FIGURE 1 15 Text Console Redirection window 31 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation Text Console for Java IP Address 24 78 Power Management Status Power Off Command Console Redirection EnterGonscle FIGURE 1 16 Command pull down menu The Text Console Redirection window supports the following command operations
377. ondence between SB internal I O controllers and BUS numbers BUS DEV FUNC TABLE D 1 Correspondence between physical locations of SB internal I O controllers and BUS numbers HomeSB USB UHCI 00 1A 0 USB 1 1 used for video redirection controller 00 1D 0 Front 0 1 USB 1 1 00 1D 1 Front 2 3 USB 1 1 HomeSB USB EHCI 00 1A0 7 USB 2 0 used for remote storage controller 00 1D 7 USB 2 0 front USB ports 0 to 3 of the Home SB and USB ports for connecting the DVD drive with the built in DVDB 320 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX D Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Built in I O and PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers The following table shows the correspondence between PCI slot mounting locations and slot numbers TABLE D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers PRIMEQUEST Board Slot 1800E2 1800E 321 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX D Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Built in I O and PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers Board PRIMEQUEST z 1800E2 1800E PCI_Box 1 N A Not applicable 322 C122 E108 10EN APPENDIX E PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Cabinets Link For details on PRIMEQUEST 1000 series cabinets and components and PCI_Box cabinets and components see Chapter 1 Installation Information in t
378. ons 1 Authentication None Specified Header Digest None Specified Data Digest None Specified Configure Multiple Connected Session MCS To add additional connections to a session or configure the MCS policy for a selected session Mor tion on iSCSI Sessions FIGURE 7 26 Properties window 6 The Source Portal column in the Multiple Connected Session MCS window displays IP addresses Check whether any IP address matches that recorded in step 2 If an IP address matches 192 168 3 150 in this example this is the target connected to the device to be replaced 209 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows Multiple Connected Session MCS Ed MCS policy Round Robin x Description The round robin policy attempts to evenly distribute incoming requests to all processing paths This session has the following connections SSE El Target Portal Status Type Weight 192 168 3 100 ome Active n a To add a connection dick Add Add To remove a connection select the connection above and then Remove dick Remove To edit the path settings for the MCS policy select a Edit connection above and then click Edit ios Lk ce a FIGURE 7 27 Multiple Connected Session MCS window 7 Click the Cancel button to return to Properties window shown in step 5 and click the Cancel button again to
379. ons see 8 1 2 Powering off a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 3 Replace the faulty PCI card 4 Power on the partition For details on powering on partitions see 8 1 1 Powering on a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 5 Format the replacement PCI card Use the following procedure 1 fio detach Disconnecting the device from the operating system 2 fio format Low level formatting of the device 3 fio attach Making the device available on the operating system fio detach dev fct1 fio format dev fct1 fio attach dev fct1 Remarks For details on each command see the ioMemory Product Family User Guide Linux for Driver Release X X X X X X is the version number at the following website http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest download e 6 Add the device Remarks The work of adding the device will trigger the rebuild operation Example mdadm dev md0O add dev fiob 67 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal In a RAID configuration Windows software RAID 1 Place the faulty PCI card offline and remove the card Select the appropriate volume from Disk Management in Windows and execute Remove Mirror 2 Power off the partition For details on powering off partitions see 8 1 2 Powering off
380. opertes These are the devices exposed by iSCSI sessions to the target Click Advanced to view information about the device and configure the multipath policy Devices FUJITSU E2000 SCSI Disk Device Disk drive cw s FIGURE 7 20 Target Properties window 9 Record the values displayed on the SCSI address line in the Device Details window Port 2 Bus 0 Target ID 0 LUN 0 in this example 205 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows Device Details xi General mP10 Type Device number SCSI address Device interface name Legacy device name Volume path names Disk i W mpio disk amp ven_fujitsu amp prod_e20008rev _00004187f6ac24808453230354c34432 PhysicalDrive 1 E FIGURE 7 21 Device Details window Windows Server 2008 R2 1 From the MMB Web UI click Partition Partition N PSA PCI Devices to search for the NIC to be replaced You can search for the NIC to be replaced from the Unit names or BUS numbers Suppose that you are going to replace IOB 0 PCIC 7 The red box indicates the target device L Seite User Administration Networks Confizuration Mantenance Lice gt Pastition gt PartitionW3 gt PSA gt PCI Devices PCI Devices Refresh Heb To display the device information click on the unit entry eae a i es InteKR 82567LF 2 Gigabit Network
381. or all drives Drive specifies the drives on which paging files are created The selected drive under Drive of Paging file size for selected drive is displayed Notes No dump files and paging files can be stored at the iSCSI connection destination during internal disk boot and SAN FC boot The file system for ReFS volumes cannot store paging files 7 Select Custom size and enter a value in Initial size The specified size must be greater than the size of mounted memory plus 1 MB in order to acquire memory dumps normally The recommended size is approximately 1 5 times the size of mounted memory Notes Check Automatically manage paging file size for all drives Select System managed size 294 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 8 Enter a value in Maximum size Specify a value that is the same as or larger than Initial size The recommended size is the same as Initial size 9 Save settings Click Set under Paging file size for selected drive The settings are saved and Paging File Size of Drive displays the set values 10 Click the OK button to close the Virtual Memory dialog box The message You must restart your computer to apply these changes appears Click the OK button to close the message box 11 Click the OK button to close the Performance Options dialog box 12
382. or removal stop the smartd service The smartd service is intended to monitor a hard disk by using the self diagnosis function of the hard disk S M A R T Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology System The smartd service does not support the hot maintenance of a hard disk so that the hard disk information acquired at the start of the smartd service will not match the hard disk information after the hot maintenance Consequently it will output the following message every 30 minutes smartd XXXXX Device dev YYY No such device open failed XXXXX and YYY These parts vary with the environment That is why if the smartd service is used the smartd service must be stopped before hot maintenance of a hard disk and the smartd service must be restarted with the latest hard disk status after hot maintenance The procedure is as follows 1 Before hot maintenance of a hard disk stop the smartd service The running condition of the smartd service can be checked from the output result of the following operation Example Output results when the smartd service is running sbin service smartd status smartd pid XXXXX is running XXXXX This part varies with the environment If the smartd service has been started stop it by using the following operation sbin service smartd stop 2 Execute hot maintenance of a hard disk and complete it 3 Start the smartd service After stopping the smartd service in step
383. or text console redirection connection established cccceeeeeeeeeeneees 34 FIGURE 1 20 Forced disconnection of text console redirection 1 esceseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeseeaaeeessaaeeeeaees 35 FIGURE 1 21 Forced disconnection of text console redirection 2 o ecceeeecesesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeaaeeeseaaeeeeaees 36 FIGURE 1 22 Connection configuration for remote storage cccecceeeecceeeneeeeeeaeeeeseneeeseaaeeeesaaaeeseeneeeseeaees 37 FIGURE 1 23 Window with a remote Storage NRE cic ccecesceeceasisteedentsascatecetescecedtendtdex veered Rive thine eastern tees 38 FIGURE 1 24 Remote storage selection WINdOW ccecccceeeccceeeeeeeeecceeceaeeeeenaeecaeeeeeaaaeseaeesseaaaesneeeeeeaaeseeneees 39 FIGURE 1 25 Window with a remote storage NBO crescissi aiaa Kaet a raaa 40 FIGURE 1 26 USB 2 0 USB 1 1 Selection dialog BOK sscccscdsscsiasenesccecsevagcscveastecedsancssnesceeeuisesnevexnesssaceeesaedeasetens 41 FIGURE 3 1 Examples of partition configurations in the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 1800E ccccceeeeeeeseee 46 FIGURE 3 2 Example of operation where the SB in a test partition is a Reserved SB ecsscccessessteeeeesenaees 48 FIGURE 3 3 BlueScreenTimeout setting Configuration tab ceccceeescceeeseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeseeeeeeeeeeenees 51 FIGURE 3 4 BlueScreenTimeout setting Misc settings cececeesecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeecaaaessnsaeeeeeeaaeeeneaeeeeeees 51 FIGURE 3 5 Example
384. or the configurations of multiple partitions select the partitions and then click the Apply button 3 6 3 Checking the partition setting information at the Reserved SB switching time This section describes how to check the partition setting information at the Reserved SB switching time 81 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal Note The SEL information output from the MMB can be presumed to have the original partition settings However precise information is not guaranteed Therefore it is necessary to determine the original configuration of partitions according to how the partitions were operating when the Reserved SB became active The following descriptions assume a case of the following partition and Reserved SB setup SB c of Partition R is set as a Reserved SB for Partition P and Partition Q TABLE 3 13 Partition settings before switching Set partition ee ee ee eee a S a e a T e E A O Indicates that the SB is set for the partition TABLE 3 14 Reserved SB settings before switching Set partition E a O a eww o o o e a A O Indicates that the SB is set for the partition If a failure occurs on SB a and SB a is switched to Reserved SB c the statuses of the SBs of the partitions change as follows Partition P SB a Partition P SB c Partition Q SB b gt Partition Q SB b Partition R SB c Partition R
385. ot removal work on a PCI card restart the service by using the following procedure after the hot removal work 1 Log in as the system administrator root 2 Execute the following command to restart the ServerView RAID service sbin service aurad start 134 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 3 3 FC card Fibre Channel card removal procedure The descriptions in this section assume that an FC card is being removed Notes The FC card used for SAN boot does not support hot plugging This section does not cover configuration changes in peripherals e g UNIT addition or removal for a SAN disk device When removing the FC card via hot plugging you need to consider other matters in addition to the general hot plugging procedure The system restart after the failure addition removal or replacement of an FC card may change the device name dev sdX assigned to each disk of the SAN disk unit To prevent a device name mismatch of the disk of a SAN disk unit managed by PRIMECLUSTER GDS a preventive measure has been implemented To prevent a device name mismatch when directly accessing the disk of a SAN disk unit not registered with PRIMECLUSTER GDS use the by id name dev disk by id The by id name is not affected by FC card configuration changes FC card removal procedure The procedure for removing an FC card and peripherals i
386. otification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Diodot PRIMPQUEST Lae Actwe AAIR p Past Nusabrr MCDSACLU Fujitsu Serial Nuzwbe 14809 e0 State as we ad Partition Configuration Hoty Select a paster ther chk te AST Remove Urs Set Parzaen Name or Hermes batons to soakgure the partidor a v C p a 2 v 9 Note R rxpeeacats Rererved EB H reprerects Home SB represents kutte 6 TEM OBCISTE otis tun te above Sat Patios heme Adi ted Honom Unt Hers Cancel o d FIGURE 11 12 Partition Configuration window Finding out the partition error status Examine the partition error status Select the following in the MMB menu window PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 When SVmco or SVmcovm is installed System Partition Event Log window PRIMEQUEST 1800E When PSA is installed Partition PSA Agent Log window When SVmcovm is installed System Partition Event Log window On the Partition Event Log window or the Agent Log window you can find out about problems in the partition from the displayed log For details on how to read agent log messages see Chapter 3 PSA Messages in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Message Reference C122 E111EN The Message Reference lists the meanings of messages and corrective actions in order of event IDs The Partition Event Log or the Agent Log window lists event IDs and message details to inform you of problems Remarks For
387. oved Please replace the card and input y key y Adding the card The card has added When Please replace the card appears replace the FC card and insert the cable After replacing the FC card press the y key Remarks The process may stop with the following message This message is displayed if an application is referencing the FC card or if the card was replaced soon after the device went offline 197 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows Check whether any application is referencing the FC card If no application is referencing the card wait about 10 minutes and reexecute the command Depending on the configuration it may take a much longer time to replace the FC card C gt fjpciswap r IOB 1 PCIC 4 Selected card name is Emulex LightPulse LPe1l250 F8 PCI Slot 4 Storport iniport Driver Please delete all settings about this card Do you want to remove this card y n y Removing the card FUSVpsa E 08745 internal error Device_Eject failed PCI VEN_LODF amp DEV_F015 amp SUBSYS_F01510DF amp REV_03 8 amp 39e14fc5 amp 0 amp 00000008 0048 23 679 C gt The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed 6 Confirm the FC card installation by using the fjpciswap command C gt fjpciswap 1 Replaceable PCI cards are displayed UnitName Func DeviceName
388. owing an MMB failure in a single MMB configuration In a single MMB configuration if the MMB cannot operate such as because of an MMB failure use the following procedure 1 Shut down the operating system LAN from a remote terminal 2 Turn off the chassis AC power 3 Replace the MMB 4 Turn on the chassis AC power Remarks In a single MMB configuration hot replacement of the MMB is not possible 11 1 2 Maintenance using PSA PSA handles hardware problem monitoring configuration management and other such tasks on a partition This section describes the maintenance functions of PSA Remarks The PSA Web UI is provided only for the PRIMEQUEST 1800E In the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 SVS provides the management function of PSA For details on the SVS function see the SVS manual Notes 252 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures To operate the PRIMEQUEST 1800 you need to first install PSA If PSA is not installed the following restrictions apply T O e g PCI card HDD error notification and trap notification to the administrator are disabled Notification about exceeded thresholds in S M A R T monitoring of HDDs is disabled Operations management software cannot collect information on the partition side Even under an REMCS agreement no software errors are reported Hot maintenance of HDDs is not possible The
389. p Shutdown and Power Control PRIMPQUEST 1900F Active MAR MCDSACLU Power Control Raton mej Select a Power Coaral opaa for cee or more parsoni then chek the Apply bates te take effect ales 3 FIGURE 9 2 Power Control window The column has partition numbers For details on the Power Control window see 1 3 1 Power Control window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 3 Select Power On in Power Control for the partition that you are going to power on Then click the Apply button A confirmation dialog box appears 4 Click the OK button to power on the partition or the Cancel button to cancel partition power on Remarks If the power to the partition is already on or if the specified control fails because the power is currently off a warning message appears For details on the display and setting items in the Power Control window see 1 3 1 Power Control window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 9 2 7 Controlling partition startup by using the MMB Only users with Administrators or Operator privileges can set partition boot control This section describes the partition startup control procedure using the MMB 1 Click Partition Power Control The Power Control window appears 228 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control Medel PRIMPOURST 1900F A
390. partition For details on the procedure see Chapter 1 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Configuring the paging file Configure the paging file by using the following procedure 1 Log in to the server with Administrator privileges 2 Select Control Panel System The System Properties dialog box appears 3 Click the Advanced tab Then click Performance Settings The Performance Options dialog box appears 4 Click the Advanced tab 290 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Performance Options FIGURE 11 21 Advanced options dialog box 5 Click Change in Virtual Memory The Virtual Memory dialog box appears 291 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures irtual Memory 2 xi Drive volume Label Paging File Size MB C 2046 3956 Paging file size for selected drive Drive 2 Space available 38087 MB Custom size Initial size MB 2046 Maximum size MB 3986 System managed size No paging file Set Total paging file size for all drives Minimum allowed 16 MB Recommended 1534 MB Currently allocated 1534 MB cme FIGURE 11 22 Virtual Memory dialog box Spe
391. partition state when each partition is started or stopped For an MIB request received at this time from an external manager e g Systemwalker Centric Manager the MMB temporarily returns an error or time out is temporarily returned In this case information can be obtained by reissuing the MIB request The following shows the MIB tree structure 354 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX H Tree Structure of the MIB Provided with the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series internet 1 memt 2 Li mib 2 1 system 1 interfaces 2 Bes MIB information normally provided by MMB icmp 5 tep 6 t udp 7 snmp 11 private 4 L enterpris s 1 fuyitsu L products 1 lL iaServer 31 L primequest 1 mmb 1 sysInfo 1 E agentInfo 1 unitInformation 2 management 3 serverInformation 4 5 environment 5 t hardware 6 Physical configuration information for entire PRIMEQUEST system Partition configuration information MMB management information etc L recovery 7 i status 8 maintenance 9 deployment 10 mmbVariables 2 Information on traps detected by MMB P gt Variables accompanying trap information mmbEnterprise 3 z partition 2 PartitionCommon 100 physicalCompornentOfPartition 1 logicalCompornentForLinux 2 logicalCompornentF or Windows 3 monitoringFunctionOfPartition 4 thresholdF
392. pter 15 IOB 1 PCIC 5 FUNC 1 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 16 IOB 1 PCIC 7 FUNC 0 Team Team 0 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 23 IOB 1 PCIC 7 FUNC 1 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 24 C gt The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed 6 Replace the NIC by executing the fjpciswap command C gt fjpciswap r IOB 1 PCIC 5 Selected card name is Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 15 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 16 Please delete all settings about this card Do you want to remove this card y n y Removing the card The card has removed Please replace the card and input y key y 189 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows Adding the card The card has added When Please replace the card appears replace the NIC and insert the cable After replacing the NIC press the y key C gt fjpciswap 1 Replaceable PCI cards Fu FUNC 0 UnitName IOB 1 PCIC 4 nc are displayed DeviceName Storport Miniport Driver PCIC 5 FUNC O0 ter 15 PCIC 5 ter 16 PCIC 7 Port Server PCIC 7 FUNC 1 Adapter 24 FUNC 1 FUNC 0 Ge gt Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Team Team 0 Intel R Adapter 23 Intel R P
393. pull down menu operations TABLE 1 12 Commands in the Text Console Redirection window Power Off Forcibly turns off the power irrespective of the state of the operating system Reset Forcibly performs a reset irrespective of the state of the operating system Power Cycle Forcibly turns off and on the power irrespective of the state of the operating system Sends a shutdown request to ServerView Agent If ServerView Agent has not been Shutdown installed the request does not result in a shutdown Notes Infrequently the connection is cut the window closes If this occurs wait a moment before trying to connect again If Console redirection already in use is output when you try to connect again wait up to 10 minutes before trying to connect again While the text console redirection is connected if the message 1RMC at lt IP address gt is no longer reachable Please try later again is output and the connection is cut off the retried connection by pressing the Logon button may be cut off immediately If it occurs close the text console redirection window and try a connection again While the text console redirection is being used a warning message indicating that the digital signature is expired may be displayed This warning message does not affect the operation of Java Application Click the Execute button To avoid displaying this warning message every time the text console redirection is connected check the c
394. r window confirm that Status for the hard disk is Global Hot Spare or Dedicated Hot Spare After the rebuild is complete a copyback operation may be performed Exit ServerView RAID Manager 4 3 3 Hard Disk Replacement at Multiple Deadlock Occurrence Multiple deadlock occurs when more than one hard disk fail to be recognized at the same time When multiple deadlock occurs replace the SAS interface components array controller card SASU etc and the hard disk Since system data is not guaranteed when this type of failure occurs reconfigure the hardware RAID This executes the corrective measure of recovering the data after backing it up When replacing the SAS interface components and the hard disk the partition is stopped for maintenance The workflow is described below Remarks A field engineer performs the following step 2 only 1 Turn off the power to the partition 97 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks 2 Replace the SAS interface components and hard disk 3 Restart the partition and then start WebBIOS from the Boot Manager front page 4 Create the array configuration with WebBIOS 5 Restore the data for backup 98 C122 E108 10EN CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 This chapter describes hot maintenance of PCI cards in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 5 1 Hot Replacement of PCI Cards 100
395. r User s Guide For Linux 163 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 6 2 Hot Addition of PCI Cards This section describes the PCI card addition procedure with the PCI Hot Plug function The procedure includes common steps for all PCI cards and the additional steps required for a specific card function or driver Thus the descriptions cover both the common operations required for all cards e g power supply operations and the specific procedures required for certain types of card For details on addition of the cards not described in this section see the respective product manuals 6 2 1 Common addition procedures for all PCI cards Performing the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI card type Confirming that the PCI slot power is off See Powering on and off PCI slots Adding a PCI card Powering on a PCI slot See Powering on and off PCI slots a A WN e Performing the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI card type Notes This section describes instructions for the operating system and subsystems e g commands configuration file editing Be sure to refer to the respective product manuals to confirm the command syntax and impact on the system before performing tasks with those instructions The following sections describe card addition with the required instr
396. r details on how to use getosvmco contact the distributor where you purchased your product or your sales representative 11 2 11 Problems with partition operations Status in the information area of the MMB Web UI changes to Error when Power Off Reset or Force Power Off is executed on the partition or when the partition is shut down from the operating system Also the MMB Web UI displays Read Error in Part Number and Serial Number of each component Cause Hardware may have failed Corrective action Contact your sales representative or a field engineer Do not execute Reset or Force Power Off on the partition until the problem is solved Before making contact confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the main unit 275 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures During the partition power on sequence from the beginning of power on until execution of the reset process if another partition is powered on in a scheduled operation the booting of the partition powered on earlier may not complete Cause An MMB firmware restriction causes this problem Corrective action Execute Force Power Off on the partition causing the problem and execute Power On again 276 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents M
397. r in the HDD and the hot operation status TABLE F 5 HDD status and LED display a a T 326 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX F Status Checks with LEDs HDD location indicated Off Regular Blinking fast When the SAS disk unit SAS array disk unit is used Array rebuild in progress Blinking Regular Blinking slow When the SAS array disk unit is RAID used F 1 5 PCI Express card slot PCI Express card slots come equipped with the following LEDs The LED display of PCI Express card slots conforms to PCI Express specifications TABLE F 6 PCI Express card slot LEDs Indicates the power status of a PCI Express card slot Indicates whether there is an error in a PCI Express card The following table lists the LED indications for each status of the PCI Express card However it shows only the LED indications to be noted for each status A blank space indicates that the LED can be on or blinking TABLE F 7 PCI Express card status and LED display PCI Express card problem detected a Ce F 1 6 DVDB The DVDB comes equipped with an LED indicating the status of the whole device the MMB Ready LED and the System Alarm LED From the DVDB LED display you can check the power status of the entire device check for any problem and check the MMB firmware status TABLE F 8 DVDB LEDs System Power Indicates the power status of the device Ee System Alarm Indicates whether there is an
398. r module into the system by executing the modprobe command 126 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 sbin modprobe pciehp 2 Confirm the existing interface names To confirm the interface names execute the following command sbin ifconfig a 3 Confirm the slot number of the PCI slot containing an interface by using the following procedure 1 Identify the mounting location of the PCI card to be added See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to check the mounting location board and slot of the PCI card to be added 2 Obtain the slot number of the mounting location Check the table in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers and obtain the slot number that is unique in the cabinet and assigned to the confirmed mounting location This slot number is identification information for operating the slot of the PCI card to be added 4 Power off the PCI slot Confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for the target slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the slot number confirmed in step 3 is shown at lt slot number gt in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt Note lt BUS number gt and lt slot number gt are both four
399. ration continues Solved If a problem occurs in this product troubleshoot the problem according to the displayed message If the error recurs contact your sales representative or a field engineer Before making contact confirm the unit source part number event ID and description of the error as well as the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the main unit Remarks Labels are affixed at the location shown in FIGURE 11 5 Label location 1 or FIGURE 11 6 Label location 2 263 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures FIGURE 11 5 Label location 1 264 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures a 2 FIGURE 1 11 2 2 Model name Serial number 1 6 Label location 2 Items to confirm before contacting a sales representative Before contacting your sales representative confirm the following details Print the sheet in APPENDIX M Failure Report Sheet and enter the necessary information Items to confirm Model name and type of the main unit You can confirm the model name and type with the MMB Web UI You can also confirm them from the label affixed to the main unit Hardware configuration types and locations of the supplied
400. re Medel PRIMEQUEST Le Aenve AIME 7 Past Nussbrr MCDSACLI FUJITSU Serial Nianber POTET Srat w d Mamerrancs Bading Ranae Coefigxraten Bact BIOS Coafgraton Backup BIOS Configuration Hej Select a parstce then dck the Backup beter 2 4 7 F j EVM RS 4 101 Uus Cewe SL a FIGURE 8 1 Backup BIOS Configuration window Backing up UEFI configuration information 1 Select the radio button of the partition for which to back up the configuration information Then click the Backup button The save destination dialog box of the browser appears 2 Select the save destination path Then click the OK button Download of the file begins The default BIOS Configuration file name for the backup is as follows Partition number_save date_BIOS version dat Restoring UEFI configuration information From the Restore BIOS Configuration window restore BIOS configuration information 219 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 8 Backup and Restore Bledel PRIMPOURST 190E Arnve DIM Ben Pust Nusaber MCD3ACLU FU Serial Nimbos sero Stages 2Mamcerance hacg Rerore Coefigaaten gt Reaere BIOS Configurace Restore BIOS Configuration Hei Select a BIOS Co asa He Upload Conca aims 3 FIGURE 8 2 Restore BIOS Configuration window 1 Select the backup BIOS Configuration file stored on the remote PC Then click the Upload button File transfer to t
401. re changes may be executed in the system reboot after NIC removal Take corrective action by using the following procedure Ina window displayed by kudzu select whether to delete the device information for the removed interface from the system Confirm the displayed contents The device information is removed from the system when an interface is removed The choices are Remove Configuration Keep Configuration and Do Nothing Select Keep Configuration 142 C122 E108 10EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 This chapter describes hot maintenance of PCI cards in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 6 1 Hot Replacement of PCI Cards ccscccceeeseesteees 144 6 2 Hot Addition of PCI Cards c ceccesssceceeeeeeeeesnnaees 164 6 3 Removing POl Cards ccccsc ceaseless 172 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 6 1 Hot Replacement of PCI Cards This section describes the following methods of PCI card replacement with the PCI Hot Plug function Common replacement operations for all PCI cards such as power supply operations Specific operations added to procedures to use a specified card function or a driver for installation Remarks For details on the card replacement procedures not described in this chapter see the respective product manuals 6 1 1 Overview of common replacement procedures for all PCI
402. re the saved interface configuration file to the original file Restore the interface configuration file saved to the save directory to the original file by executing the following command 160 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 cd etc sysconfig network scripts temp mv ifcfg ethx following also executed for bonding configuration mv ifcfg bondx 17 Activate the replaced interface The method for activating a single NIC interface differs from that for activating the SLAVE interfaces under bonding For a single NIC interface Execute the following command to activate the interface Activate all the necessary interfaces sbin ifup ethx Also if the single NIC interface has a VLAN device and the VLAN interface was temporarily removed restore the VLAN interface If the priority option has changed set it again sbin vconfig add ethX Y sbin ifup ethx yY enter command to set VLAN option as needed For SLAVE under bonding Execute the following command to incorporate the SLAVE interface into the existing bonding configuration Incorporate all the necessary interfaces sbin ifenslave bondY ethX The VLAN related operation is normally not required because a VLAN is created on the bonding device 18 Remove the directory to which the interface configuration file was saved After all the interfaces to be r
403. replacement procedure in 6 1 4 Network card replacement procedure 1 Perform the work for suppressing access to the iSCSI connection interface 1 Use the iscsiadm command to log out from the path iqn through which the iSCSI card to be replaced is routed and disconnect the session 2 Use the iscsiadm command to confirm that the target session has been disconnected You can confirm the disconnection of sessions on multipath products using DM MP 1 or ETERNUS multidriver 2 1 Write down the DM MP display contents at the session disconnection 2 See the ETERNUS Multipath Driver User s Guide For Linux Work to be performed after NIC replacement For iSCSI NIC hot replacement be sure to follow the procedure below when Step 19 of the NIC replacement procedure in 6 1 4 Network card replacement procedure 1 To restore access to the iSCSI connection interface perform the following 1 Use the iscsiadm command to log in to the path iqn through which the replacement iSCSI card is routed and reconnect the session 2 Use the iscsiadm command to confirm that the target session has been activated 3 You can confirm the activation of sessions on multipath products using DM MP 1 or ETERNUS multidriver 2 162 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 1 Write down the DM MP display contents at the session activation 2 See the ETERNUS Multipath Drive
404. requisites for remote shutdown ccccceeecceceeceeeeceeeeseseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeesensaeeeeensenseeeeenennaees 238 9 6 2 How to use romolo SINT ssesreecsrneniisd ekaan a Na EREE RRR RREAN ARER 238 CHAPTER 10 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures s s s 241 TOT MME PEG ninr E a Eaa a vad sesgantocsseceneas le E 242 AM ARS E E T E E E E E E EE TE 245 IUa Fon WED UI innnan 246 ON E A AEA E E AT 247 A UEPI e m a E E E E E EEE 248 REEE a E E E ETA E E E E 249 CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 251 TLI Mameng orcarina nannaa EE EE EAE EEOAE OEE EAE EAE 252 TELT M intehance using Ts MMB o0 2 2 c ccecceeaecceds cea ceeadiee cnegeeatasscepeeeddedtecbecedtaeseasencdsnecsaeeaniseedeieecnneates 252 Die Mainienance URINE PSA mirioni aan dette find rede aA aaa AE Naai 252 TRES Maintenance MENOU etier inedia iiaee aiaa iaae iaiia aeiia 258 11 1 4 Ma imenante Mod s oeii a EAE AA EEE AEAEE EEEE EAA 258 TL19 M intenance of the IOB and GSPB cccaccs ce ojeseccsiees cascades eueassdenieshsaacstecezenesnedeseeadlapectvanetekeenssaiccs 260 11 1 6 Maintenance policy preventive maintenance seessssssrrsesesrerrrnenenrrnnnnnnnnntnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanne 260 TLL REMCO GERACE OveniOW 2c cscs cele cedena devas ache aves dates ene iana niaaa e aea aaa 260 UTM REMCO KAGE oe iss hee tee cence ck As ote cub eieececestevtitvedeceuvlioncdeauttanns ceavvinede shee
405. ribed in TABLE J 1 Files and tools to prepare to include the TrapMSG conversion definition file see TABLE J 1 Files and tools to prepare into Systemwalker to run on the operations management server Move to the command installation directory Execute the following command Example of execution on the operations management server Linux CNSetCnfMg exe f lt TrapMSG conversion definition file name full pathname gt c 3 To represent the OID used in trap conversion as characters use the MIB extended manipulation function of Systemwalker to register the prepared extended MIB file for traps described in TABLE J 1 Files and tools to prepare in Systemwalker Use the Systemwalker console screen for the operations management client For Systemwalker Centric Manager version earlier than V13 2 1 Select Operation Operate Extended MIB from the menu bar 2 Execute MIB Registration At this time specify the extended MIB file for traps See TABLE J 1 Files and tools to prepare For Systemwalker Centric Manager version V 13 2 or later 1 Select Policy Policy Definition Monitor Node Operate Extended MIB from the menu bar 2 Execute MIB Registration At this time specify the extended MIB file for traps See TABLE J 1 Files and tools to prepare 4 Apply the TrapMSG definition file to Systemwalker by performing the following step 365 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual
406. ries Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows Please replace the card and input y key y Adding the card The card has added After replacing the PCI card press the y key 3 Confirm the replacement card by using the display function of the fjpciswap command C gt fjpciswap 1 Replaceable PCI cards are displayed UnitName Func DeviceName IOB 1 PCIC 5 FUNC 0 Intel R PRO 1000 P7 Adapter 15 IOB 1 PCIC 5 FUNC 1 Intel R PRO 1000 P7 Adapter 16 CiN 7 2 2 Addition procedure 1 Add a PCI card by using the add function of the fjpciswap command L Port Server L Port Server Insert the PCI card into a PCI card slot Then specify the PCI card slot and execute the add command a C gt fjpciswap a IOB 1 PCIC 5 Adding the card 2 The card is recognized by the operating system The command is completed C gt fjpciswap a IOB 1 PCIC 5 Adding the card The card has added C gt 3 Confirm the added card by using the display function of the fjpciswap command C gt fjpciswap 1 Replaceable PCI cards are displayed UnitName Func DeviceName 185 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows IOB 1 PCIC 5 FUNC 0 1 R PRO 1000 PT 1 Port Server Adapter 15 IOB 1 PCIC 5 FUNC 1 L R PRO 1000 P7 L Port Server Adapter 16 C gt 2 0 About removal
407. river Slave interface eth0 Permanent HW addr 00 0e 0c 70 c3 38 You can use this procedure only when the bonding device is active If the bonding device is not active or the slave has not been incorporated use the same procedure as for a single interface Also the correspondence between the interface name and hardware address is automatically registered by the system in the udev function rule file etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules Confirm that the ATTR address and NAME items have the same definitions as in the above output Example ethO 153 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 grep eth0 etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS ATTR address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 38 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME eth0o The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed You can always obtain the correct hardware address from the description in etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules regardless of whether the interface is incorporated in bonding Confirm the hardware address of other interfaces by repeating the operation with the same command The following table lists examples of descriptions TABLE 6 2 Hardware address description examples Interface name Hardware address Slot number eth0O 00 0e 0c 70 c3 38 0000 0b 01 0 20
408. roblems related to the main unit or a PCL Box This section describes problems related to the main unit or a PCI_Box It also describes how to correct the problems An LED on the main unit does not go on or the orange LED is on Cause The main unit may have failed Corrective action Contact your sales representative or a field engineer Before making contact confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the main unit An error message appears on your display Cause An error occurred in the device Corrective action Confirm the error message and take action according to the description of the error The keyboard and mouse do not work Cause The cables are not correctly connected to the USB ports of the Home SB Corrective action Connect the cables correctly to the USB ports of the Home SB The DVD is not recognized Cause The DVD was not correctly inserted Corrective action Insert the DVD correctly Part Number or Serial Number in the MMB Web UI displays Read Error Cause A failure occurred and prevents the part or serial numbers from being read Corrective action Contact your sales representative or a field engineer Do not execute Reset or Force Power Off on the partition until the problem is solved Before making contact confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the main unit 273 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CH
409. roduct manuals to confirm the command syntax and impact on the system before performing tasks with those instructions The following sections describe card addition removal and replacement with the required instructions e g commands configuration file editing for the operating system and subsystems together with the actual hardware operations 1 2 PCI card replacement procedure in detail This section describes how to replace a PCI card Stopping the ServerView RAID service When hot replacement of a PCI card is performed while the ServerView RAID service is running a system panic may occur For this reason before starting hot replacement temporarily stop the ServerView RAID service by using the following procedure Note that this work is not required if you are using any of the following versions Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 8 or later Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 7 and kernel 2 6 18 274 7 1 el5 or later version Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 6 and kernel 2 6 18 238 27 1 e15 or later version Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 3 and kernel 2 6 18 128 35 1 e15 or later version ay Log in as the system administrator root 2 Execute the following command to check the running status of the ServerView RAID service 100 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 sbin service aurad status Display example when the service is running Checkin
410. rsieeseiosnesesesss 354 MIB tree StrUct tS acions escuset 355 Mirroring operations by model and configuration 59 Mirroring within CPU and Mirroring between CPUs 59 MMB device status and LED display 329 MMBC lorraine nere E cisco tees 245 MMB LED mounting locations cece teers 331 MMB LEDS senioare ene ia aan ees 328 MMB port numbe S eee eeeeceeeeceeeceeecesecesessseeaeenaes 313 MMB Web Ulisssncticnii cia cin sshelas decisis 242 Mounting sequence of DIMMs where a single CPU is Mounted ON an SB soseer edenes 342 Mounting sequence of DIMMs where two CPUs are mounted ON Al SB git E E E E E 342 Multiple Connected Session MCS window 210 N Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation l NIC Hot Plugging eee ceeeeceseeeeeeseeesecseeeaeesaes 187 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Index Notes on specific connections in switching to a Reserved SB E E E E E a A T af Notes on Troubleshooting ccceeccessseeceseeceeneeeeeeeeeeee 217 Numbers of SBs and CPUs per partition 339 O Operating sequence of video redirection eee 21 Operating System Installation Link eee 43 Operations management software linkage 256 Operations that can be performed from the GUI of the PATTON scssi teisen a en or Een E Enes EES EE EEE nei 257 Other external interfaces ce eeeeseeeeeteeesteeeeeeeeeeees 318 Overview of H
411. rted Power on setting at power recovery Supported Supported ae Shutdown delay time at power Supported Supported failure Start delay time at power recovery Supported Supported E Wo E Installation altitude Supported Supported o o t PSU redundancy setting Supported Supported eo Eo o o System operation System power control On Off Supported Supported Force P off Partition configuration and operation setting Reserved SB allocation Supported Supported a a Console redirection setting Supported a S S o DVD assignment to internal Supported partition Memory Mirror mode Supported Supported a i ASR Automatic Server Restart Supported setting for partitions I O space allocation to I O device fo Supported a ne Partition power control Partition power control S O poen oa O ooroo soore sra S a a arnan O omona s S o ida tf o on Scheduled operation Supported ae ae ae OS boot settings 306 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Function PSA CLI Web UI UI SVS CLI O f boe OS boot priority setting Supporeaf o OS boot option setting Supporeaf o a a ae ae a ae OS boot device selection OS boot delay time setting Supported PXE boot network device setting Supported Boot control boot setting override Supported i Partition operation tools Video redirection remote storag
412. rting during maintenance work The maintenance modes provide the following advantages They prevent the system from switching to a status not expected by the field engineer because of a power supply operation by someone other than the field engineer They prevent error reporting caused by a maintenance error or maintenance work The following table lists the maintenance modes and their functions Note that Operation mode is the normal operation mode and not a maintenance mode 258 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures TABLE 11 4 Maintenance modes Operation Normal operation Normal operation Hot System Maintenance For maintenance work performed while the system power Active for work system is on Hot Partition Maintenance For maintenance work performed while the target partition Active for work partition power is on Warm System Power Off For maintenance work performed while the system power Partition stopped for maintenance is on and the maintenance target partition power is off Cold System Maintenance breaker on For maintenance work performed while the system power Stopped for work standby is off and the AC power supply is on Cold System Maintenance breaker off For maintenance work performed while the system power Stopped for work AC off is off and the AC power supply is off TABLE 11 5 Maintenan
413. rver primequest manual Global site http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest manual e RIMEQUEST 1000 Series Describes what manuals you should read and how to C122 E114XA Getting Started Guide access important information after unpacking the iii C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Preface PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server This manual comes with the product PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Contains important information required for using the C122 E115XA Safety and Regulatory PRIMEQUEST 1000 series safely Information PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Provides errata and addenda for the PRIMEQUEST C122 E119EN Errata and Addenda 1000 series manuals This manual will be updated as needed PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Describes the functions and features of the C122 B022EN General Description PRIMEQUEST 1000 series Fujitsu M10 SPARC M10 _ Provides the necessary information and concepts you C120 HOO7EN Systems SPARC Enterprise should understand for installation and facility planning PRIMEQUEST Common for SPARC M10 Systems SPARC Enterprise and Installation Planning PRIMEQUEST installations Manual PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Includes the specifications of and the installation C122 H0O04EN Hardware Installation location requirements for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Manual series PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Describes how to set up the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series C122 E107EN Installation Manual server including the steps for installat
414. s For details on scheduled operations see 9 3 Scheduled Operations If startup of an external SAN unit connected to the UPS or other such unit is slow during power recovery the SAN unit does not become usable even if the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server powers on the partition For this reason SAN boot may fail In this case you can set Partition Power On Delay in units of seconds 0 to 9999 default 0 in addition to the above settings For details on how to set system operations for a power failure occurrence or power recovery see 1 2 7 System Setup window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 237 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 9 6 Remote Shutdown Windows Windows Windows XP and later comes with a shutdown exe command You can perform remote shutdown from a management terminal by using this command 9 6 1 Prerequisites for remote shutdown The prerequisites for using remote shutdown Windows are as follows The OS of the management terminal is one of the following Windows XP Windows Vista Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 R2 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 Windows Server 2012 Windows 8 The Windows to be shut down by a management terminal must be connected to a network Firewall settings of the target Windows system In the Exception setting of the
415. s This appendix describes the physical mounting locations of components and shows GSPB and MMB port numbers B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components 312 B2 Pon NUMOS errors iaaa a aa 313 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX B Physical Mounting Locations and Port Numbers B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components This section describes the physical mounting locations of components ee GSPB i GSPBi0 Front Right side Rear FIGURE B 1 Physical mounting locations in the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 1800E 10_PSU 0 Pcic o PCIC S PCIC 4 PCic s PCIC S PCIC 7 PCIC S PCIC 9 PCIC 10 PCIC 1 10_ PSUs PCIC t 10_PSU 0 10_PSu 1 Front Right side Rear FIGURE B 2 Physical mounting locations in the PCI_Box 312 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX B Physical Mounting Locations and Port Numbers B 2 Port Numbers This section shows the numbering policy of each GSPB and MMB port Remarks The character strings used in numbering are the port numbers as viewed from firmware These port numbers differ from the character strings in the port identification printed stamped or otherwise marked on units FIGURE B 3 GSPB port numbers shows GSPB port numbering FIGURE B 4 MMB port numbers shows MMB port numbering GbE 0 and GbE 1 GbE 2 and GbE 3 GbE 4 and GbE 5 and GbE 6 and GbE 7 are connected to the same respective LAN contr
416. s 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 1000 RX bytes 0 0 0 b TX bytes 0 0 0 b 115 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Memory 8ab20000 8ab40000 As a result of the above confirmation if the interface name changes before or after one NIC is replaced this may occur if a configuration file with ONBOOT NO exists you need to perform step 3 again to take the correspondence between slot mounting locations and slot numbers and confirm the correct MAC address of the replaced NIC You also need to confirm this MAC address if two or more NICs are replaced at the same time Based on the bus address confirmed in step 3 e g 000 0b 01 confirm the interface again by executing the following command Example ls l sys class net device grep 0000 0b 01 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 10 17 sys class net eth0 devic gt devices pci0000 00 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 10 17 sys class net ethl devic gt devices pci0000 00 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 1 If the results displayed here match the displayed results of step 3 it means that the interface name was not replaced for the physical device In this example there is no problem so you can use 00 0E 0C 70 C3 40 If the results displayed here do not match the d
417. s as follows 1 Make the necessary preparations Stop access to the FC card by stopping applications or by other such means If the ServerView RAID service is running temporarily stop the service by using the following procedure 1 Log in as the system administrator root 2 Execute the following command to check the running status of the ServerView RAID service sbin service aurad status Display example when the service is running Checking for ServerView RAID Manager amDaemon pid XXX is running XXX indicates the process ID Display example when the service is stopped Checking for ServerView RAID Manager amDaemon is stopped 3 If the ServerView RAID service is running execute the following command to stop the service sbin service aurad stop 2 Confirm that the PCI Hot Plug driver is installed 135 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Execute the Ismod command Confirm that the PCI Hot Plug driver module is installed sbin lsmod grep pciehp pciehp 206984 0 If not installed incorporate the PCI Hot Plug driver module into the system by executing the modprobe command sbin modprobe pciehp 3 Confirm the slot number of the PCI slot by using the following procedure 1 Identify the mounting location of the PCI card to be removed See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Compone
418. s by using the host number sys class scsi_host hostxx modeldesc xx in hostxx is the host number entered in step 1 If the file does not exist the judgment is that no such message was output from the FC card 3 If the file exists check the file contents by using the following operation cat sys class scsi_host hostxx modeldesc Emulex LPe1250 F8 8Gb PCIe Fibre Channel Adapter xx in hostxx is the host number entered in step 1 If the output is like the above the judgment is that the relevant message was output by the incorporation of the FC card 149 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 How to confirm the FC card incorporation results using Web UI of PSA 1 From the Web UI of PSA display the Fibre Channel window For details on how to display the Web UI see Chapter 3 PSA Web UI Web user interface Operations in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 2 Confirm that all the information of the disk incorporated in the FC card is displayed in Information about devices connected to controller and that n a or hyphen is not displayed for any item in the disk information 3 Ifany item is not properly displayed FIGURE 6 1 Fibre Channel window example restart PSA or execute the following PSA command manually opt FISVpsa sh force_search sh a Meade POOMEULEXT Le Arive Mie Pan Member Memaact
419. s ifcfg ethl The above operations enable you to confirm that the interface existing on the same NIC as eth0 is eth 4 Deactivate the NIC Execute the following command to deactivate all the interfaces that you confirmed in step 3 The applicable command depends on whether the target interface is a single NIC interface or the SLAVE interface of a bonding device For a single NIC interface sbin ifdown ethX If the single NIC interface has a VLAN device you also need to remove the VLAN interface Perform the following operations sbin ifdown ethxX Y sbin vconfig rem ethX Y For the SLAVE interface of a bonding device Confirm that the SLAVE interface to be replaced is the interface currently being used for communication First confirm the interface currently being used for communication by executing the following command cat sys class net bondY bonding active_slave If the displayed interface matches the SLAVE interface being replaced execute the following command to switch the current communication interface to another SLAVE interface sbin ifenslave c bondY ethZ ethZ Interface that composes bondY and does not perform hot replacement Finally remove the SLAVE interface being replaced from the bonding configuration Immediately after being removed the interface is automatically no longer used sbin ifenslave d bondY ethX 5 Power off the PCI slot Confirm that the sys bus pci slots d
420. s operations management server install dir MpWalker dm MpCNappl MpCNmegr bin CNSetCnfMg exe 2 Execute the command on the Linux Solaris operations management server opt FJS Vfwntc MpCNmegr bin CNSetCnfMg exe 3 Systemwalker Centric Manager implements hierarchical operations management to ensure efficient management The operations management client is one application For details contact your sales representative or a field engineer 4 For details on the Systemwalker technical information contact your sales representative or a field engineer 362 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX J Systemwalker Centric Manager Linkage J 2 Configuring Systemwalker Centric Manager linkage This section describes how to configure Systemwalker linkage with various settings MMB node registration SNMP trap linkage Event monitoring linkage GUI linkage PRIMEQUEST 1000 series rack grouping linkage Linkage with ServerView Suite 2 1 MMB node registration The MMB monitors the hardware of the entire rack The MMB can be duplicated optional so that monitoring can continue even if it fails For monitoring by duplicate MMBs in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server with Systemwalker be sure to register two MMB nodes and monitor these two nodes This section provides an overview of MMB node registration and describes how to register the MMB nodes for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series For a dual MMB co
421. s property sheet for the current selection FIGURE 7 4 Device Manager window 190 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 7 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Windows 9 On the Teaming tab check Team this adapter with other adapters select the team into which the adapter was incorporated before the replacement and click the OK button Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 10 Properties KJ Eg General Link Speed Advanced Power Management Teaming VLANs Boot Options Driver Details Resources intel Adapter Teaming v Team this adapter with other adapters New Team Team Select a team Properties Select a team Team 0 Team with other adapters Allows you to specify whether a network connection will participate in a team For an overview of teaming click here If not checked this adapter is not part of a team FIGURE 7 5 Teaming tab 10 In the Device Manager confirm that the NIC is incorporated into the team gal Device Manager _ ol x File Action View Help 9 mliG B mls Gis Eg w508x86 m Computer a Disk drives E Display adapters E Emulex PLUS hg Human Interface Devices Keyboards z A Mice and other pointing devices E Monitors E a Network adapters a Intel R 82567LF 2 Gigabit Network Connection Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 10 iy Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Con
422. stem administrator root 2 Execute the following command to check the running status of the ServerView RAID service sbin service aurad status Display example when the service is running Checking for ServerView RAID Manager amDaemon pid XXX is running 137 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 XXX indicates the process ID Display example when the service is stopped Checking for ServerView RAID Manager amDaemon is stopped 3 If the ServerView RAID service is running execute the following command to stop the service sbin service aurad stop 2 Confirm that the PCI Hot Plug driver is installed Execute the lsmod command Confirm that the PCI Hot Plug driver module is installed sbin lsmod grep pciehp pciehp 206984 0 If not installed incorporate the PCI Hot Plug driver module into the system by executing the modprobe command sbin modprobe pciehp 3 Confirm the slot number of the PCI slot that has the mounted interface Confirm the interface mounting location through the configuration file information and the operating system information This is because the interface name used by the user may differ from that managed by the operating system First confirm the hardware address of the interface to be deleted Example grep HWADDR etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg eth0 HWADDR 00 0
423. stem startup Default operating system Windows Server 2012 v V Time to display list of operating systems 30 H seconds _ Time to display recovery options when needed 30 seconds System failure Write an event to the system log V Automatically restart Write debugging information Automatic memory dump v Dump file SystemRoot MEMORY DMP V Overwrite any existing file FIGURE 11 20 Startup and Recovery dialog box 5 Specify the following values Select the type of memory dump file from Write debugging information Set the dump file storage location in Dump file 6 Click the OK button to close the Startup and Recovery dialog box 7 Click the OK button to close the System Properties dialog box 289 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 8 Restart the partition After the partition restart the settings take effect Then make the following settings Confirming the memory dump configuration Acquire a memory dump Confirm that dump was created correctly Also measure the time taken to output the dump and restart the system so as to estimate the time required until business could resume Then reconsider the type of dump to acquire as needed To acquire a memory dump select Partition and then the Power Control window of the MMB Web UI Then specify NMI for the target
424. step 13 Also for SLAVE under bonding the file contents are partly different but the lines to be set are the same ROTO static R 00 0E 0C 70 C3 40 ROADCAST 192 168 16 255 PADDR 192 168 16 1 MASK 255 255 255 0 RK 192 168 16 0 Ethernet Activate the replaced interface The method for activating a single NIC interface differs from that for activating the SLAVE interfaces under bonding For a single NIC interface Execute the following command to activate the interface Activate all the necessary interfaces sbin ifup ethx Also if the single NIC interface has a VLAN device and the VLAN interface was temporarily removed restore the VLAN interface If the priority option has changed set it again sbin vconfig add ethX Y sbin ifup ethx yY enter command to set VLAN option as needed For SLAVE under bonding Execute the following command to activate the interface Activate all the necessary interfaces sbin ifenslave bondy ethX Note The ifup command has a function that assigns the correct ethX according to the MAC address but the ifenslave command does not have that function If the same name as before the replacement is assigned to the NIC replaced in step 13 only the ifenslave command will encounter no problems If the assignment is changed however you need to correctly assign the NIC 117 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI
425. stration Manual APPENDIX G Component Mounting Conditions G 2 DIMM This section describes the number of DIMMs that can be mounted and the criteria for mixing different types of DIMM Notes The maximum memory size recognized by the operating system depends on the operating system type For details see the respective operating system manuals For details on the maximum memory capacity in Windows operating systems contact your sales representative or a field engineer When the Memory Mirror function is used the memory size recognized by the operating system is half the mounted memory size The maximum memory size recognized depends on the operating system type Example If 16 GB of DIMM is installed and the Memory Mirror function is used the operating system recognizes 8 GB of memory If the CPU is degraded memory is also degraded DIMM mounting conditions At least four DIMMs are required per CPU Up to 16 DIMMs can be mounted per CPU If a single CPU is mounted on the SB the maximum number of DIMMs that can be mounted is 16 DIMMs must be mounted in the following units for all models Units of four DIMMs when Mirror mode is disabled Units of eight DIMMs when Mirror mode is enabled DIMM mixing criteria 2 GB and 4 GB DIMMs can be mounted in a single SB or partition 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB DIMMs cannot be mixed with DIMMs of other sizes in an SB or partition Identical DIMMs means those with the same size TAB
426. t Addition and Removal The SAS array disk unit has a space dedicated for the BBU battery backup unit Together with the SAS array controller card installation of a SAS array disk unit with a BBU mounted battery backup feature enables the write back cache which improves write performance in the RAID configuration For details on the Hardware RAID configuration see the ServerView RAID Management User Manual For details on hard disk replacement in a Hardware RAID configuration see 4 3 Replacing Hard Disks in a Hardware RAID Configuration Notes Hardware RAID and Software RAID GDS are mutually exclusive in one partition To use Hardware RAID consider either of the following requirements to protect your data in the event of a power failure A BBU is mounted Appropriate means such as a redundant power supply dual system power reception mechanism CVCF and UPS are used to secure a margin for the AC power supply 3 2 4 ServerView RAID For details on ServerView RAID see the ServerView RAID Management User Manual 60 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal 3 3 Replacing Components You can identify the components to be replaced by looking at the LEDs The boards to be replaced and the operation panel have these LEDs For details on the LEDs see APPENDIX F Status Checks with LEDs 3 3 1 Replaceable components The follow
427. t BUS number gt and lt slot number gt are both four digit decimal values Here lt BUS number gt is information added to the slot number for descriptive purposes The operational target directory is defined uniquely with lt slot number gt To disable a slot and make it ready for the addition of a PCI card write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out echo 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power Note Be sure to manipulate the power supply from the operating system 4 Physically add the target card 5 Reconfigure the peripheral according to its manual For example suppose that the storage device used is ETERNUS and that the host affinity function is used to set the access right for each server Their settings would need to be changed as a result of FC card replacement 6 Connect the FC card cable 7 Power on the PCI slot To enable the target slot and make it ready for use write 1 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the slot of the added PCI card 125 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 echo 1 gt sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power This also installs the device associated with the relevant adapter on the system 8 Confirm the incorporation results The contents of this confirmation method
428. t Replacement of PCI Cards ceeeeeeeeeeees 100 144 Hot Replacement Procedure for iSCSI eee eee 200 How to Configure the External Networks Management LAN Maintenance LAN Production LAN c08 4 I Icons indicating the system status seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 267 Identical DIMM groups sseeseseeeeeeesssresrsrrerssreresreersrees 341 Information WindOW c cccccscceeesceessecceseeeeeseeesteeenees 230 Installation Environment ccceeceesseceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeees 350 TIO PSU EEDS ioina a aai 330 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server IP addresses set from the MMB cc ccceccssscceceessseeeeeeees 4 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server set from the operating system in a partition eee 6 SCSI Initiator osne au 207 380 iSCSI Initiator Properties window in Windows Server 2008 es eel iets eee TE EE 202 214 iSCSI Initiator Properties window in Windows Server 2008 R2 sscvesisheciecscetieetet cesiwwives Me ounetvands 208 211 215 Items in the remote storage selection window 39 L Label location 1 ieccsscecssccstavatncecthcavadectarseascnivecheteentevees 264 Label location 2 csccsceccscerecccassssenel va vacs dance e ei Erat 265 LAN LEDSis sen oi iislnciee ah Acie cin lecheiven ie a ERa 326 TEED A T AA E E A eee aoe oi 332 LED Mounting Locations sessseseeseseeseersreererrsrrererree 331 LED mounting locations on c
429. ta values in hexadecimal 11 4 2 Logs that can be collected by PSA PSA can collect agent logs An agent log is a history of actions taken by PSA log output REMCS transmission and SNMP trap transmission etc The following figure shows the Agent Log window of the MMB Web UI Remarks PSA is provided only with the PRIMEQUEST 1800E 283 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Medel PRIMPOURST 1900F Arnve ADIP p Past Nusbri MCD3ACLL FUjiTSU Serial Numbers Heer ie0 State se Agent Log dapis Cetaded rformatin cick or the erty rumber Domein Fine Shand p2 FIGURE 11 18 Agent Log window The agent log stores up to 5 000 entries in the binary file format After the number of stored entries reaches the maximum value the new entry will overwrite the oldest entry You can download the collected agent log from the Web UI This section describes operations with the agent log Downloading an agent log 1 Click the Download button The Download File dialog box appears 2 Click Save in the Download File dialog box The Save As dialog box appears 3 Enter a file name in the Save As dialog box select CSV as the file format with the csv extension Then click the Save button This downloads the CSV file to the specified path Then the Download completed dialog
430. tc modprobe conf Remove the unnecessary associations between interfaces and drivers When deleting a bonding device also delete the related bonding items hl e1000e h2 igb h3 igb h4 igb h5 igb h6 igb h7 igb Co 0 O02 0 0 0 MO O h8 igb eth9 igb eth10 e1000e eth11 e1000e scsi_hostadapter mptbase scsi_hostadapterl mptscsih usb controller ehci hcd al al al al al al al al al al al al al al usb controllerl uhci hcd 141 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 lias scsi_hostadapter2 lias ethO e1000 Del Note There are no means to dynamically remove the MASTER interface bondY of the bonding configuration If you want to remove the entire bonding interface you can disable the bonding configuration and remove all the SLAVE interfaces but the MASTER interface itself remains However even if you have a MASTER interface with no SLAVE interface continue operation as is because there will be no operational problems The bonding interface will be completely removed at the next system startup 9 Perform the necessary post processing If you stopped the ServerView RAID service in step restart the service by using the following procedure sbin service aurad start Corrective action for the kudzu utility when removing a NIC card The utility kudzu for checking for hardwa
431. te procedures see the respective manuals Postprocessing of software using a PCI card After replacing a PCI card restart the software stopped before the PCI card replacement or make the software operation applicable again as needed 145 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 6 1 3 FC card Fibre Channel card replacement procedure The descriptions in this section assume that an FC card is being replaced For the PRIMEQUEST 1800E perform operations from the PSA Web UI Notes The FC card used for SAN boot does not support hot plugging This section does not cover configuration changes in peripherals e g UNIT addition or removal for a SAN disk device To prevent a device name mismatch due to the failure addition removal or replacement of an FC card access the SAN disk unit by using the by id name dev disk by id for the device name If all the paths in a mounted disk become hidden when an FC card is hot replaced unmount the disk Then execute PHP After PHP has been executed a device name mismatch may occur FC card replacement procedure The procedure for replacing only a faulty FC card without replacing other peripherals is as follows 1 Make the necessary preparations Stop access to the faulty FC card such as by stopping applications Confirm the slot number of the PCI slot When replacing a PCI card you
432. tere t 000 reversal 2100 express htelo PRO TO0D PT Dial Port Sarver Acactar 20 Acdactor error Could not estaki E vendo 8065 dorico HA1CSE revaiorrOS of KD epreceintelR 255 Cigebit Dusi Port Netacrk QSPBPI CREH 2 Connection 27 Adicto error EEPROM amer vento ia sce d 109 reveortl o OD express ioral PRONTO 2 13 ORS gt OCs 115226 PUNCH INO 13 1182 3 FIGURE 11 14 Agent Log window 212 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 11 2 6 Checking into errors in detail Check the details of messages to take appropriate action According to the message ID in the displayed log check the message details in the list of messages in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Message Reference C122 E111EN Then take appropriate action System event messages detected by the MMB Chapter 2 MMB Messages in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Message Reference C122 E111EN Messages detected by the partition Chapter 3 PSA Messages in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Message Reference C122 E111EN Remarks Be sure to write down the message ID and message details because they will be needed when you contact a field engineer or your sales representative If the list of messages in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Message Reference C122 E111EN does not include the displayed message contact a field engineer or your sales representative 11 2 7 P
433. tered trademark of VMware Inc in the United States and other countries Novell and SUSE Linux Enterprise Server are trademarks of Novell Inc Xen is a trademark or registered trademark of Citrix Systems Inc or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries Other company names and product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Trademark indications are omitted for some system and product names in this manual ix C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Preface Safety Precautions List of important alert items This manual does not contain important alert items Warning labels The following warning labels are affixed to this product These labels are intended for the users of this product A CAUTION Never remove the warning labels 3E CAUTION FPRETART SHC EET PLERT EL RE CAMRARERLET ALG BATH RR SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE INSTALLING THIS UNIT UUE ACED WORE LUO LOE COU BOLO ULa do APNNCTREOH UMA TAI s ELECTROSTANC SENSMVE DEVICES WS 62 TOMBU 2 VAAMEIEINAE TT OBEE RINAT ERY D RRINE CECT ECOBOET COMA CR EATRMCNMENTSLSERONS cevaner VODA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation i sa Jo thg folowing tygo conditions 1 Ths device may not cause ad this device must accept any rence Induding Inteeterence that may causa un operation BSEOUOCULUB OOOO outm 4 5 ff of Ees maa m
434. the ServerView RAID service is running execute the following command to stop the service sbin service aurad stop 2 Confirm that the PCI Hot Plug driver is installed Execute the lsmod command Confirm that the PCI Hot Plug driver module is installed 3 If not installed incorporate the PCI Hot Plug driver module into the system by executing the modprobe command sbin modprobe pciehp 4 Confirm the slot number of the PCI slot When replacing a PCI card you need to manipulate the power supply to the appropriate slot through the operating system First use the following procedure to obtain the slot number from the mounting location of the PCI slot for the card It will be used to manipulate the power supply 1 Identify the mounting location of the PCI card to be replaced See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to check the mounting location board and slot of the PCI card to be replaced 2 Obtain the slot number of the mounting location Check the table in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers and obtain the slot number that is unique in the cabinet and assigned to the confirmed mounting location This slot number is the identification information for operating the slot of the PCI card to be replaced 5 Power off the PCI slot Confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for the target slot information which will be referenced and other
435. the required items Then click the OK button to close the dialog box 5 Distribute the event filtering definition to the changed PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server Select Policy Distribute Policy from the menu bar In the Distribute Policy window select Apply Immediately Then click the OK button 2 4 GUI linkage This section provides an overview of GUI linkage and describes the registration procedure Overview of GUI linkage To permit access to the URL of the MMB login window of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series from Systemwalker register it from the Operation menu For a dual MMB configuration configure GUI linkage for both of the MMB nodes GUI linkage procedure 1 Register the menu to start the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series MMB console Open the command prompt on the operations management client Execute the following command see TABLE J 1 Files and tools to prepare in any directory mpaplreg ex a m lt menu name gt p lt node name gt c lt URL gt w lt menu name gt Menu name displayed on the Systemwalker console lt node name gt Node host name of the server to register Usually select the MMB node lt URL gt URL starting with http for the top page of PRIMEQUEST 1000 series system management 2 Reboot the Systemwalker console 3 After the reboot confirm that the new menu was added to the Operation menu Display the menu by right clicking the specified node and display the webpage with the specif
436. the same way as the Alt key Win Functions in the same way as the Windows key Context Displays the right click menu of the mouse Lock Holds down the Ctrl Alt or Windows key To unlock click Lock again Ctrl Alt Del Functions in the same way as pressing the Ctrl Alt and Del keys at the same time be If clicking Mouse Sync does not synchronize the mouse pointer make the setting below in the operating system on the target partition for video redirection Then click Mouse Sync to synchronize the mouse pointer For Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2008 Display properties 1 Start the Control Panel and select Display 2 Click Advanced on the Settings tab 3 On the Troubleshooting tab move the Hardware Acceleration slider to the index that is one increment to the left of the Full index Then click the OK button Mouse properties 1 Start the Control Panel and select Mouse 2 If Enhance pointer precision on the Pointer Options tab is checked uncheck it 3 Click the Mouse Sync button in the Video Redirection window to synchronize the mouse pointer If the mouse pointer is not synchronized correctly adjust the slider on Select a pointer speed For Windows Server 2012 Mouse properties 1 Start the Control Panel and select Mouse 2 If Enhance pointer precision on the Pointer Options tab is checked uncheck it 25 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 10
437. this mounted interface Example ls l sys cla lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 S gt devices pci0000 01 0 ss net eth0 devic ep 29 10 17 sys class net eth0 devic 00 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b Excluding the rest of the directory path check the part corresponding to the file name in the symbolic link destination file of the output results In the above example the underlined part shows the bus address 0000 0b 01 in the example Check the PCI slot number for this bus address 110 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Example grep il 0000 0b 01 sys bus pci slots address sys bus pci slots 0023_0020 address Read the output file path as shown below and confirm the PCI slot number sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt address Notes lt BUS number gt and lt slot number gt are both four digit decimal values Here lt BUS number gt is information added to the slot number for descriptive purposes If the above file path is not output it indicates that the NIC is not mounted in a PCI slot e g GbE port in the GSPB With the PCI slot number confirmed here see D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers to check the mounting location and see also B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to identify the physical mounting locatio
438. ting system First use the following procedure to obtain the slot number from the mounting location of the PCI slot for the card It will be used to manipulate the power supply 1 Identify the mounting location of the PCI card to be replaced See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to check the mounting location board and slot of the PCI card to be replaced 2 Obtain the slot number of the mounting location Check the table in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers and obtain the slot number that is unique in the cabinet and assigned to the confirmed mounting locations This slot number is the identification information for operating the slot of the PCI card to be replaced 144 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Note The four digit decimal numbers shown in lt Slot number gt in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers have the leading digits filled with zeros The actual slot numbers do not include the zeros in the leading digits Checking the power status of a PCI slot Using the PCI slot number confirmed in Confirming the slot number of a PCI slot confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for this slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the PCI slot number confirmed in Confirming the slot number of
439. ting items in the ASR Control window Number of Restart Tries Sets the number of OS restart retries when a Boot Watchdog or PSA Software Watchdog time out occurs You can set 0 to 10 times If 0 is specified OS restart is not retried The default is 5 times Action after exceeding Specifies the action taken if the number of OS restart attempts for a Restart Tries Watchdog time out exceeds the aforementioned number of retries Set any of the following items as Action Stop rebooting and Power Off Stop the reboot process and power off the partition Stop rebooting Stop the reboot process and stop the partition Diagnostic Interrupt assert Stop the reboot process and issue instruction to implement NMI interrupt for the partition Attempt to collect data for investigation dump for the stopped partition to investigate the cause of the stoppage The default is Stop rebooting and Power Off Automatic Power On Delay Specifies the delay time that lasts until Power On is executed in an automatic restart You can specify 0 to 10 minutes The default is O minutes Cancel Boot Watchdog Cancels OS Boot Watchdog 3 To cancel the Boot Watchdog function check the Cancel Boot Watchdog check box 4 Click the Apply button Even after you have checked the Cancel Boot Watchdog check box the check box is unchecked but the cancellation is processed For details on how to operate the ASR Control window see 1 3 7 Partition x m
440. tings are available under the configuration rules If the memory capacity is expected to decrease after a switch to a Reserved SB confirm that the decreased capacity will be within the allowable range for applications The shutdown wait time for a switch to a Reserved SB being used by another partition is the value that is set from the MMB Web UI 0 to 99 minutes The default is 10 minutes Only one shutdown wait time can be set for the system in a cabinet If the shutdown completes before the specified time elapses the switching begins immediately Set only a shutdown wait time that would be acceptable under the circumstances lt For the SA11011 MMB2 90 and earlier versions for the PQ1000 series gt The maximum shutdown wait time for a switch to a Reserved SB being used by another partition is 10 minutes Set only a shutdown wait time that would be acceptable under the circumstances When setting Reserved SBs be sure to use NTP for time synchronization at switching When using Linux for the NTP setting do not specify NTPDATE_OPTIONS B for the etc sysconfig ntpd file When using Windows Server in the workgroup environment execute the following procedure 1 Use Date and Time on the control panel or the w32tm command for NTP settings Example w32tm config manualpeerlist lt time synchronization destination gt For details see Help displayed by executing the w32tm command From the taskbar start Server manager
441. tion of BMC is used via MMB 6 If Disable is set for this address the PSA Web UI cannot be viewed Also neither REMCS notification nor e mail notification related to PSA on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E or SVS on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 is sent A separate subnet must be assigned to 1 Management LAN 2 Maintenance LAN external network and 3 MMB PSA LAN inside the cabinet LAN Because 3 MMB PSA LAN is closed to the outside of the cabinet the same subnet as that for 3 MMB PSA LAN in another cabinet can be used For the IP address to be assigned to 4 Console redirection the same subnet as that assigned to 1 Management LAN must be used Remarks MMB uses the following subnets permanently for internal communication The following subnets cannot be specified 127 1 1 0 24 127 1 2 0 24 127 1 3 0 24 The ICH I O controller hub on an SB in each partition has a 100 Mb Ethernet port connected with the PSA to MMB communication LAN inside the cabinet The operating system assigns the IP address of the 100 Mb Ethernet port TABLE 1 3 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server set from the operating system in a partition IP address setting TR LAN port Description method 100 MbE port on Set it from the OS in 100 MbE port connected to the PSA to MMB LAN inside SB NIC in ICH 1 each partition the cabinet This IP address and the IP address of the MMB PSA IP Address in TABLE 1 2 IP addresses for the P
442. to the bonding configuration sbin ifenslave bondY ethX To perform this operation for more than one interface execute the ifup command and the ifdown command in succession on all interfaces At this time the ifup command may fail to execute In such case skip the interface once and execute the ifup and ifdown commands on the other interfaces Then retry executing the ifup and ifdown commands again on the failed interface 17 Remove the directory to which the interface configuration file was saved 118 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 After all the interfaces to be replaced have been replaced remove the save directory created in step 9 by executing the following command rmdir etc sysconfig network scripts temp 18 Perform the necessary post processing If you stopped the ServerView RAID service in step 1 restart the service by using the following procedure sbin service aurad start 5 1 5 Assigning a fixed interface name to a NIC Under normal operation in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 a NIC interface name may change as another NIC is mounted or unmounted This is because NIC interface names are created specifying the order that hardware is detected In such an event unexpected problems will occur in programs that directly use interface names One method to prevent this problem is to set fixed NIC interface names This section
443. tration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal 1 fio detach Disconnecting the device from the operating system 2 fio format Low level formatting of the device Remarks If the device is used as a swap device the formatting must have a 4K sector size 3 fio attach Making the device available on the operating system Remarks Example Example Example fio detach dev fct0 fio format b 4K dev fct0 fio attach dev fct0 For details on each command see the ioMemory Product Family User Guide Microsoft Windows for Driver Release x x x x x x is the version number at the following website http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest download e 7 Create a volume for the replacement PCI card Create a new volume from Disk Management in Windows 8 Confirm the serial number of the replacement PCI card Example fio co nfig g FIO_PREALLOCATE FIO_PR EALLOCATI EMI re MI EMORY EMORY XXXXXXXXX For details on how to confirm the serial number see the ioMemory Product Family User Guide Microsoft Windows for Driver Release x x x x x x is the version number at the following website http jp fujitsu com platform server primequest download e 9 Register the serial number of the replacement PCI card in PREALLOCATE_MEMORY Example fio co nfig p FIO_PREALLOCATE_MEMORY XXXXXXXXX
444. ts LEDs The order of MMB LEDs arranged from the left or the top is as follows Ready Alarm Active and Location on o 2 Ll FIGURE F 2 MMB LED mounting locations Alarm Ready The order of System LEDs arranged from the left or the top is as follows Power Alarm CSS Location MMB Ready gt 5 B Q w m z N oO Ss e2a8 0000 1 FIGURE F 3 System LED mounting locations The order of PCI_Box LEDs arranged from the left is as follows IO_PSU IO_FAN 0 IO_FAN 1 Power Alarm Location 1O_FAN 1 10 PSU 10_FAN 0 Alarm Location Power FIGURE F 4 PCl_Box LED mounting locations 331 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX F Status Checks with LEDs F 3 LED list The following table lists the mounted LEDs for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series TABLE F 16 LEDs MMB LAN Link Act Green Network not link eee Blinking in Network active MMB P green On green Network link Link Act Off ed m Speed Green 10Mbps On green 100Mbps LAN k Green or Network not link peer Blinking in Network active TX MMB green On green Network link GSPB LAN Off 1000BASE T SAS disk unit HDD SAS array disk unit Speed Green Orange On green 100Mbps On orange 1000Mbps en Spe Green Orange 10Mbps On orange 1000Mbps f f Green o Network not link a g On green Network link HDD normal Error at HDD Hot removal possi
445. tting Description method Virtual IP Virtual IP Setitfrom The PC connected to the management LAN Address address the MMB uses this IP address to communicate via the CLI or MMB Web telnet etc with the active MMB Web UI The PC user need not be aware of which MMB is active MMB 0 or MMB 1 MMB 0 1 Physical Setitfrom The PC connected to the management LAN IP address the MMB uses this IP address to communicate with CLI or MMB MMB O0 2 Web UI MMB 1 1 Physical Setitfrom The PC connected to the management LAN IP address the MMB uses this IP address to communicate with CLI or MMB MMB L1 2 Web UI Maintenance LAN IP address Maintenance IP address This IP address is used for communication when the MMB is connected to the maintenance LAN Maintenance MMB Physical IP Set it from This IP address is used for communication IP Address common address with REMCS without using the 3 CLI or MMB management LAN The MMB also uses the IP address to communicate with the maintenance terminal connected to the CE port MMB PSA LAN IP address MMB PSA IP Address This is a dedicated IP address for MMB communication with PSA on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E or SVS on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 running on the operating system in each partition Physical IP Set it from This is a dedicated IP address for IP Address address communication with PSA on the 3 PRIMEQUEST 1800E or SVS on the PRIMEQUEST 1800E2 running o
446. tual IP address from the active MMB to ensure continuous service The following interfaces are available with a configured management LAN Interfaces available to the system administrator Web UI interface using HTTP HTTPS CLI interface via telnet SSH Partition and console operations through the video redirection function Interface available to system management software RMCP and RMCP interface Remarks The restrictions on management LAN interfaces other than Virtual LAN channels are described below TABLE 1 4 Restrictions on the management LAN Channel name RMCP connection Web UI connection CLI connection UDP http https EA PLAN te LAN channel Active MMB Not possible Possible with Possible with Physical LAN channel Standby MMB A Not possible etl restrictions 1 2 restrictions 3 The connection cannot send or receive data of over 4 Kbytes 2 The connection sends data to the active MMB so adequate performance cannot be obtained 3 Only the following commands can be executed Set command set active_mmb 0 Show commands show active_mmb show access_control show date show timezone show gateway show http 9 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation show http_port show https show https_port show ssh show ssh_port show telnet show telnet_port show ip show network show exit_code ping w
447. tus check by using the Partition Configuration window System Status window and SB x window from the MMB Web UI Immediately after a faulty SB is switched with a Reserved SB and the partition reboots the status is as follows The Reserved SB is incorporated in the partition in place of the faulty SB If the incorporated Reserved SB was a Reserved SB for multiple partitions before the switch the Reserved SB setting for multiple partitions has been canceled The faulty SB is disconnected free from the configuration of the partition 3 6 2 Processing after replacement of a faulty SB This section describes how to reconfigure a Reserved SB after replacement of a faulty SB Make settings as needed taking account of the current configuration and operating state After the Reserved SB switching and partition reboot perform the following task 1 or 2 To continue operation without setting a new Reserved SB the partition configuration needs to be reset 1 Restore the Reserved SB that was incorporated to replace the faulty SB back to a Reserved SB again 2 Set the replacement SB as a Reserved SB The procedure for the above task 1 is as follows 1 The Reserved SB incorporated in place of the faulty SB is referred to below as the replacement Reserved SB Identify all partitions configured with the replacement Reserved SB by using logged information For the partition identification procedure see 3 6 3 Checking the partition setting i
448. tware using a PCI card When a PCI card is removed there must be no software using the PCI card For this reason before removing the PCI card stop the software using the PCI card or make the software operations inapplicable Confirming the slot number of a PCI slot When removing a PCI card you need to manipulate the power supply to the appropriate slot through the operating system First use the following procedure to obtain the BUS number and slot number from the physical location of the PCI slot for the card It will be used to manipulate the power supply 1 Identify the mounting location of the PCI card to be removed See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to check the mounting location board and slot of the PCI card to be removed 2 Obtain the slot number of the mounting location Check the table in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers and obtain the slot number that is unique in the cabinet and assigned to the confirmed mounting location This slot number is identification information for operating the slot of the PCI card to be removed Note 172 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 The four digit decimal numbers shown in lt Slot number gt in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers have the leading digits filled with zeros The actual slot n
449. ual LAN interfaces are used for the management LAN interfaces The physical LAN interfaces are used only for recognizing the respective MMBs The physical LAN interface of each MMB makes redundant the two User ports located in that MMB using the interface redundancy function to create a single LAN interface Virtual LAN interfaces handle the common virtual IP address shared between the two redundant MMBs The Virtual LAN interfaces share the physical LAN interfaces which are ports on the two MMBs The ports are treated as valid channels on the active MMB Any switching of the active MMB causes switching of the corresponding connections to Virtual LAN channels The following shows a management LAN configuration diagram The IP addresses are examples The addresses depend on the settings MMB O0 Active MMB 1 Standby Processor Processor 1 2 3 Switching hub 8 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 Physical LAN IP example MMB 0 10 20 30 101 2 Physical LAN IP example MMB 1 10 20 30 102 3 Virtual LAN IP example 10 20 30 100 FIGURE 1 3 Management LAN configuration If either USER port fails the interface redundancy function switches to the other port in the MMB to ensure continuous service If a failure occurs in the active MMB itself the Virtual LAN channels become unusable Then the standby MMB inherits the vir
450. uctions e g commands configuration file editing for the operating system and subsystems together with the actual hardware operations 6 2 2 PCI card addition procedure in detail This section describes operations that must be performed in the PCI card addition procedure Confirming the slot number of a PCI slot When adding a PCI card you need to manipulate the power supply to the appropriate slot through the operating system First use the following procedure to obtain the BUS number and slot number from the physical location of the PCI slot for the card It will be used to manipulate the power supply 1 Identify the mounting location of the PCI card to be added See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to check the mounting location board and slot of the PCI card to be added 2 Obtain the slot number of the mounting location Check the table in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers and obtain the slot number that is unique in the cabinet and assigned to the confirmed mounting location This slot number is identification information for operating the slot of the PCI card to be added Note The four digit decimal numbers shown in lt Slot number gt in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers have the leading digits filled with zeros The actual slot numbers do not include the zeros in the leading digits 164 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST
451. ucture of the MIB Provided with the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series 353 RUMIB TEE SICUE miio annia aa aiia aiad eea aieiai da 354 HAZME File CGOMEME orinni a a a aa a a aaa 356 APPENDIX Windows Shutdown SOUS ssiri anaiai aa aaae aA AE ERE ACANA aAA evans 359 LT Shutiowvn trom MMB VSI ec occas cc tclyesteen aie devaecnseved avin 2ot peat exaaeenaceras EDE E EAEE A EEE R Ea 360 APPENDIX J Systemwalker Centric Manager Linkage ssssssosssesssssssssrrnosssnrssennssrnnennnnstennnssnnnnnnnsssnnnsent 361 J 1 Preparation for Systemwalker Centric Manager Linkage ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesaaeseeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeees 362 J 2 Configuring Systemwalker Centric Manager linkage c cccceeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseaaeeseecaeeeteeeeeeeeaaeees 363 LT MMB Node roge raO ioe eNe AEREE E AASR SKEE NEEESE RNS 363 she SNMP Tap INRI Resides tec esos sacce ss vccesnaaes vs aa aa E a aap aia Ea E aa aa 364 LAS Eas LVRS PUNE RAJO rences ansir a a AA E ra EEE RES 366 EA ETTE E E A E E AT 367 J25 Rack goang MUTINY RING ieran nausa aaae i se Ee Sa akaa TNA A ERNA ENAT ARAALE eiS 367 de Linkage wihi Sover VIEW anessin aa a E aaa a Ea 368 APPENDIX K How to Confirm Firmware of SAS Array Controller Card cccccccccseeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeanees 369 K 1 How to Confirm Firmware Version of WebBIOS ssssssseesssssssssrnossrnsssrnessrnnnorsnnsrrnessstnnsossnnssnnnnssnnnsent 370 K2 How to confirm with Server view RAID sisinio dannii aiaa aa a aaa Raa 373
452. ujitsu uses this information to identify the cause of the system problem and solve it quickly For an investigation you need a separate SupportDesk agreement TABLE 11 7 System problems and memory dump collection System status Memory dump collection Partition stopped abnormally A memory dump for the partition has 11 4 3 Collecting data for already been collected investigation Windows 11 4 4 Setting up the dump environment Windows 11 4 1 Logs that can be collected by the MMB The MMB Web UI can collect the events that occur in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series system The SEL system event log can hold up to 32 000 events When the system event log is full each new entry will replace the oldest entry in the system event log You can filter the events to display download event data stored in the SEL and clear all the stored events in the SEL from the System Event Log window This section describes operations with the system event log Checking the event log Procedure 1 Click System System Event Log The System Event Log window appears 278 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Medel PRIMPQUPRST 1900F Arnve DID Ret 3 Past Nussber MCDSACLU FUjiTSU Sesial Number 3603200 2 State nw we i E DI E Maston ty OF FM 52 CUT eee anes etme bgt Som 10 38 10743 F OG Ruan
453. ult LED Identify is displayed for the slot by the status display function of the disk management command opt FISVpsa bin diskctrl 1 ioco 0 none 1 none Fault LED Identify Remarks If the slot location is incorrect in step 4 Turn off the blinking Fault LED by executing the location off function of the disk management command opt FISVpsa bin diskctrl o ioc0 1 Repeat steps 3 and 4 by specifying other slots until the correct slot location is confirmed Remarks 88 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks In the following case execute the following PSA command manually You are performing hot maintenance of the hard disk with PRIMECLUSTER GDS in Red Hat opt FUSVpsa sh force_search sh a 4 2 2 Removal procedure Remove the hard disk by using the following procedure 1 To remove a hard disk containing a partition specified as a raw or swap device take action as follows If the hard disk contains a raw device If the hard disk to be removed contains a partition operating as a raw device terminate all the applications that may access this partition as the raw device Then remove the hard disk If the hard disk contains a swap device If the hard disk to be removed contains a partition specified as a swap device stop the system Then replace the hard disk 2 Take action as follows The action depends on whether the hard disk
454. umbers do not include the zeros in the leading digits Checking the power status of a PCI slot Using the PCI slot number confirmed in Confirming the slot number of a PCI slot confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for this slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the slot number is shown at lt slot number gt location in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt Confirm that the PCI card in the slot is enabled or disabled by displaying the power file contents in this directory cat sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power When displayed 0 means disabled and 1 means enabled Powering off a PCI slot You can power off a PCI slot through an operation on the file confirmed in Checking the power status of a PCI slot To disable a PCI card and make it ready for removal write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out cho 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power This concurrently removes the device associated with the relevant adapter from the system Note Be sure to manipulate the power supply from the operating system 6 3 3 FC card Fibre Channel card removal procedure The descriptions in this section assume that an FC card is being removed Notes The FC card used for SAN boot does not s
455. unctionOfPartition 5 statusFunctionOfPartition 6 otherFunctionOfPartition 7 Partition component information OS information etc PartitionVariables 200 Information on traps detected by PSA Variables accompanying trap information partitionEnterprise 201 FIGURE H 1 MIB tree structure Note MIB information under partition 2 is provided only with the PRIMEQUEST 1800E Remarks 1 In the above MIB tree ios 1 org 3 dod 6 is omitted before internet 1 2 The above MIB tree omits detailed MIB information defined at the branches 3 For details see the MIB file stored on the ServerView Suite DVD 355 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual APPENDIX H Tree Structure of the MIB Provided with the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series H 2 MIB File Contents The following table lists the contents of MIB files Remarks PSA MIBs is provided only with the PRIMEQUEST 1800E TABLE H 1 MIB file contents Partition A Information ies MIB file Purpose operating Description source system MMB MMB COM MIB txt Reference MMB MIB information such as the MIBs firmware hardware configuration of the entire cabinet MMB ComTrap Monitoring MIB txt MIB information for hardware failure monitoring across the entire cabinet MMB SEL event PSA PSA COM MIB txt Reference Linux PSA MIB information on the MIBs Windows hardware configuration including PCI cards belonging to the partition PSA L
456. up window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Video redirection With the video redirection function users can access windows for the partition side from a remote location When a user starts video redirection from the Console Redirection window of the MMB a Java applet is sent to the user s terminal Through the Java applet the terminal displays VGA output sent to the LAN User input with the mouse or keyboard on the terminal is routed through the LAN to the partition The following shows a diagram of the connection configuration for video redirection Processor gt gt p _ __ g pF Video memory Terminal gt USB Mass Storage emulation gt Video redirection ICH10 USB 2 0 FIGURE 1 5 Connection configuration for video redirection The following shows the operating sequence of video redirection PRIMEQUEST 1000 series 1 Login from MMB Java 2 Download of Java applet applet for video redirection J smo1q q M yaldde eaer PC terminal FIGURE 1 6 Operating sequence of video redirection In the diagram 1 to 5 indicate the following operations 21 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 Log in to the server from the terminal 2 Display the window and start video redirection 3 You can perform partition op
457. upport hot plugging This section does not cover configuration changes in peripherals e g UNIT addition or removal for a SAN disk device To prevent a device name mismatch due to the failure addition removal or replacement of an FC card access the SAN disk unit by using the by id name dev disk by id for the device name FC card removal procedure The procedure for removing an FC card and peripherals is as follows 1 Make the necessary preparations Stop access to the FC card by stopping applications or by other such means 173 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 2 Confirm the slot number of the PCI slot by using the following procedure 1 Identify the mounting location of the PCI card to be removed See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to check the mounting location board and slot of the PCI card to be removed 2 Obtain the slot number of the mounting location Check the table in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers and obtain the slot number that is unique in the cabinet and assigned to the confirmed mounting location This slot number is identification information for operating the slot of the PCI card to be removed Note The four digit decimal numbers shown in lt Slot number gt in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers hav
458. uration identification information including the maximum number of mounted CPUs CPU mounting location and CPU type Memory configuration detailed information such as the mounting location and memory type PCI configuration error status and detailed information such as about the PCI cards mounted PCI devices mounted and PCI device type SAS FC connection device configuration e g HDD tape device Network configuration network interface error status Operating system information Operating system information operating system type operating system display and operations version package installation information Storage configuration information device capacity Network configuration information interface connection status speed routing information Operating system status operation time number of login users Maintenance operations Display and saving of log information agent log Export of the current configuration and status in the partition Information managed by partition The following lists the information managed by partition TABLE 11 3 Information managed by partition Hardware information Model CPU information mount information status type version frequency miormanon Memory information mount information status type size SB IOB GSPB PCI_Box information mount information PCI card information mount information adapter name detailed information 257 C122 E108 10EN P
459. uration to erase the data on the hard disk 7 When the data has been erased exit WebBIOS and power off the partition A field engineer performs step 7 as the hard disk recovery procedure 8 Replace the hard disk that S M A R T predicted to fail 9 Start the partition Then start WebBIOS from the Boot Manager front page 10 In WebBIOS create an array configuration 11 Restore backup data or reinstall the operating system For the RAID 1 RAID 1E RAID 5 RAID 6 or RAID 10 configuration hot replacement Hot replacement is applicable to hard disks in the RAID 1 RAID 1E RAID 5 RAID 6 and RAID 10 configurations The workflow is described below For the PRIMEQUEST 1800E perform PSA window operations from the MMB Web UI 1 Start ServerView RAID Manager 2 In ServerView RAID Manager confirm the mounting location by selecting the hard disk that S M A R T predicted to fail 3 Check whether other hard disks are faulty If a hard disk is faulty replace it 4 Ensure consistency to make the hard disks error free 5 In the tree view select the hard disk that S M A R T predicted to fail Confirm that Status is SMART Error 96 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 4 Hot Replacement of Hard Disks 10 11 12 13 14 With the hard disk selected in the tree view select Locate device from the right click menu to cause the Alarm LED to blink at high speed interval of
460. uration window Select the partition to reserve the SB for its configuration Then click the Apply button To reserve the SB for the configurations of multiple partitions select the partitions and then click the Apply button 7 Start the partition Click Partition Power Control Select Power on for Power Control for the partition in the Power Control window Then click the Apply button Start the partition Setting the replacement SB as a Reserved SB Use the following procedure for the replaced SB 1 The Reserved SB incorporated in place of the faulty SB is referred to below as the replacement Reserved SB Identify all partitions configured with the replacement Reserved SB by using logged information For the partition identification procedure see 3 6 3 Checking the partition setting information at the Reserved SB switching time 2 Check the status Click System System Status Check the status in the System Status window 3 Check the configuration of the partition Click Partition Partition Configuration Confirm the partition configuration in the Partition Configuration window 4 Set the replacement Reserved SB as a Reserved SB 1 Click Partition Reserved SB Configuration The Reserved SB Configuration window appears 2 Check the check box of the SB replaced for maintenance Select a partition to reserve the SB for its configuration and click the Apply button To reserve the SB f
461. use 2 Power off the partition For details on powering off partitions see 8 1 2 Powering off a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 78 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal 3 Remove the PCI card 4 Power on the partition For details on powering on partitions see 8 1 1 Powering on a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN In a SWAP configuration Linux Windows 1 Cancel the environmental settings of the PCI card in use 2 Power off the partition For details on powering off partitions see 8 1 2 Powering off a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 3 Remove the PCI card 4 Power on the partition For details on powering on partitions see 8 1 1 Powering on a partition in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Installation Manual C122 E107EN 79 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Addition and Removal 3 6 Processes after Reserved SB Switching and an Automatic Partition Reboot This section describes the processes after Reserved SB switching and an automatic partition reboot e g status check reconfiguration 3 6 1 Checking the status after Reserved SB switching and an automatic partition reboot After the partition reboots perform a sta
462. ux 5 Corrective action for the kudzu utility when replacing a NIC card The utility kudzu for checking for hardware changes may be executed in the system reboot after NIC replacement Take corrective action by using the following procedure 1 In a window displayed by kudzu select whether to delete the device information for the removed interface from the system Confirm the displayed contents 2 Leave device information as is in the system because it is used by the interface The choices are Remove Configuration Keep Configuration and Do Nothing Select Keep Configuration 3 Then a window appears that asks whether to add device information for the added interface to the system The choices are Configure Ignore and Do Nothing Select Ignore 1 6 Hot replacement procedure for iSCSI NIC When performing hot replacement of NICs used for iSCSI connection use the following procedures 5 1 1 Overview of common replacement procedures for all PCI cards 5 1 2 PCI card replacement procedure in detail 5 1 4 Network card replacement procedure 5 1 5 Assigning a fixed interface name to a NIC A supplementary explanation of the procedure follows Prerequisites for iSCSI NIC hot replacement The prerequisites for iSCSI NIC hot replacement are as follows The storage connection is established on a multipath using DM MP Device Mapper Multipath or ETERNUS multidriver EMPD To replace more than one iSCSI card one c
463. wise used Below the slot number confirmed in step 4 is shown at lt slot number gt location in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target 104 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 5 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 10 11 12 sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt Note lt BUS number gt and lt slot number gt are both four digit decimal values Here lt BUS number gt is information added to the slot number for descriptive purposes The operational target directory is defined uniquely with lt slot number gt To disable a PCI card and make it ready for removal write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out echo 0 gt sys bus pci slots lt BUS number gt _ lt slot number gt power This operation concurrently removes the device associated with the relevant adapter from the system Note Be sure to manipulate the power supply from the operating system Physically replace the target card Reconfigure the peripheral according to its manual For example suppose that the storage device used is ETERNUS and that the host affinity function is used to set the access right for each server Their settings would need to be changed as a result of FC card replacement Connect the FC card cable Power on the PCI slot To enable the card again
464. wn by firmware or other software and by tool CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Chapter 11 describes the maintenance functions provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series It also describes actions to take for any problems that occur APPENDIX A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Appendix A lists the functions provided by the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series APPENDIX B Physical Mounting Locations and Port Numbers Appendix B describes the physical mounting locations of components and shows GSPB and MMB port numbering APPENDIX C Lists of External Interfaces Appendix C describes the external interfaces of the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series ii C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual Preface APPENDIX D Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Built in I O and PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers Appendix D shows the correspondence between the physical locations and BUS numbers of built in I O in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server It also shows the correspondence between PCI slot mounting locations and slot numbers APPENDIX E PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Cabinets Link Appendix E provides a link to Chapter 1 Installation Information in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Hardware Installation Manual C122 HO04EN APPENDIX F Status Checks with LEDs Appendix F describes the types of mounted LEDs for the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series It also describes how to check the status with the
465. wn the PRIMEQUEST 1000 series server and control the system power 9 1 Powering On Off the Whole System ceeeee 224 9 2 Powering On and Off Partitions ccssseeeeseeneees 225 9 3 Scheduled Operations cceccceeecseeeeeeeeeeeteeeteneees 232 9 4 Automatic Partition Restart Conditions 00 235 9 5 Power Failure and Power Recovery sesers 237 9 6 Remote Shutdown Windows sseeeeeeeeeeneees 238 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 9 1 Powering On Off the Whole System This chapter describes the power on and power off controls supported by the system The power supply to the whole system is controlled from the System Power Control window of the MMB Medel PRIMPOUPST 190E Arnve AMAIR Past Nussber MCD3ACLU Fujitsu Serial Nianber 19800460 Sites System Power Control He Select a power ccetrel actos then chck the Apply button Dower Oe al pacttce Powe OF all patic all patis wil be actoceatacally ubetioand Force Power OF g v e oy o a a 2 o 2 a Aggy Coed e a FIGURE 9 1 System Power Control window For details on the System Power Control window see 1 2 8 System Power Control window in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN 224 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 9 System Startup Shutdown and Power Control
466. xamples The contents of the displayed screen such as a version number may be different from the contents of the actual screen 1 From the menu screen select UEFI shell to start the UEFI shell 2 Execute the drivers command in the shell to confirm the driver numbers of UEFI and LSI EFI SAS Driver Shell gt drivers T O D YEI R PFA V VERSION E GG 0 C DRIVER NAME IMAGE NAME 1E 00000004 D 1 PC AT ISA Device Enumeration Driver IsaAcpi 42 00000000 PCI VGA Mini Port Driver VgaMiniPort 43 0000000A D 3 Platform Console Management Driver ConPlatformDxe 44 0000000A D Platform Console Management Driver ConPlatformDxe 45 0000000A B 3 3 Console Splitter Driver ConSplitterDxe 46 0000000A Console Splitter Driver ConSplitterDxe 47 00000000A Console Splitter Driver ConSplitterDxe 48 00000000A B 2 Console Splitter Driver ConSplitterDxe 49 0000000A Console Splitter Driver ConSpl itterDxe 4C 0000000A D UGA Console Driver GraphicsConsoleDxe O00000A VgaClassDxe 4134000 B X X CISi EFI SAS Driver D FIGURE K 1 drivers command in the UEFI shell 3 Execute the dh command to confirm the controller number of LSI MegaRaid SAS Controller In the following example the controller number is B4 Shell gt dh d 6a B6 Image ImageDevPath Pci 0x3 0x0 Pci 0x0 0x0 DriverBinding Diagnostics Diagnostics2 ComponentName ComponentName2 Configuration Configuration2 Driver Name LSI EFI SAS Driver Image Name
467. xplorer version 6 Service Pack 1 or later Mozilla FireFox version 3 or later Cause 4 JavaScript is not enabled in the browser Corrective action The MMB Web UI uses JavaScript Enable JavaScript in the browser 11 2 9 PSA related problems If a problem occurs in PSA you can collect the PSA data for investigation by using the following procedure Remarks PSA is provided only with the PRIMEQUEST 1800E In Linux Use the system information collection tool fjsnap to collect the system information together with the PSA data for investigation Note that if you need to collect only the PSA data for investigation such as when instructed by SupportDesk use the command for collecting PSA data for investigation getopsa instead For details on how to use getopsa see 4 4 Command for Collecting PSA Data for Investigation getopsa in the PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN In Windows Use the Software Support Guide to collect the system information along with the PSA data for investigation 274 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 11 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures For details on how to use the guide see the Software Support Guide manual Note that if you need to collect only the PSA data for investigation such as when instructed by SupportDesk use the command for collecting PSA data for investigation getopsa instead For details on how to us
468. y from the operating system 4 Add the NIC to the PCI slot 5 Power on the PCI slot To enable a PCI card and make it ready for use write 1 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the slot to which the PCI card is added The interface ethX is added at the same time 168 C122 E108 10EN PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual CHAPTER 6 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 echo 1 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power 6 Confirm the newly added interface name Powering on the slot creates an interface ethX for the added NIC Execute the following command Compare its results with those of step 2 to confirm the created interface name sbin ifconfig a 7 Confirm the hardware address of the newly added interface Confirm the hardware address HWaddr and the created interface by executing the ifconfig command For a single NIC with multiple interfaces confirm the hardware addresses of all the created interfaces Example eth1 is a new interface created for the added NIC sbin i etho fconfig a Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 0E 0C 70 C3 38 BROADCAST MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 1000 RXbytes 0 0 0 b TX bytes 0 0 0 b Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 0E 0C 70 C3 40 BROADCAST MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 R

PRIMEQUEST 1000 Series Administration Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents